SOS SE es ee COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT: mii oLAR LINE Comprising Dairy Barn Equipment, Stalls, Stanchions, Stock Pens, Litter, Feed and Milk Can Carriers, Hay Carriers, Barn and Garage Door Hangers, Stock Tank Heaters, Wire Stretchers, Hoists, Coaster Wagons and Hardware Specialties Copyrighted 1919 Fugnat Elelm. Perris & Co. HARVARD, ILLINOIS and ALBANY, NEW YORK CATALOG No. 75 ‘soo a 800ds Uf acura, 2°Y Us to Stve S Suarannee “Pplies not only ¢G Workma = O"Structia, ang Peration as well. Y arty, re petactuneand: * Prove defae, thou, one Penny, Cos, You, at, H. im 2; The STAR and It antee ind It . y ap eC 1949 MAY 22 19 * Let Us Work Together OUR interests and ours are mutual. You want the best you can find in barn \ eed want to satisfy you. Whether you are a dealer or a user of our products, we place a great value on your good will. Our business is to serve you and we hope you will help us to do this in the best way possible. Everlastingly At It When a man does the same thing over and over again, year after year, he is bound to do that one thing well. This is the order in the Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co. factories, manufacturing STAR Equipment. The STAR Line is backed by long experience. The officers of this Company have been dairy farmers for many years, and still own and operate practical dairy - farms. Combined with this is the experience we have had in supplying the needs of dairymen farmers in all parts of the country. We have had the practical ex- perience which qualifies us to know how to plan your equipment and to produce it at reasonable cost. Long experience is a big asset in this business. It invites confidence—estab- lishes reliability and assures you of satisfactory service. Everything for the Barn We are complete outfitters of modern barns. We originate and draw plans for the building—we supply every part of equipment that goes into it. This means much to the STAR dealer and his customer. He does not have to go to one concern for one part of his equipment, and to some other concern for another, and so on, but can get all of his requirements fulfilled by one company. Here is a uniform standard of quality, convenience in ordering and receiving shipments, certainty of satisfactory : F results and no division of responsibility. —— Ree aeons STAR LINE EQUIPMENT x Page Three HELM -FERRIS & CO. > HONT is e a ay @ ~ a oO & ‘G vo Q. * ca Three of the Six STAR Four Page * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT We Stand Back of Our Goods We have spent many years building up a nation-wide reputation for STAR Line Equipment. Naturally we want to protect the name of our products. Read the guarantee on Page 2. It covers all STAR Goods and we live up LOMO them letter: We not only stand back of our goods but do our best to take care of our custo- mers at all times. We can point with pride to prompt shipments as a regular thing in our business. And there are times when promptness in filling orders is urgently needed. We Are Constantly Experimenting Improvements are always possible in almost any article. We are always looking for ways to improve the different articles in STAR Line Equipment. Our experimental department is constantly devoted to this work here in our factory. In addition, we have six experimental barns near Harvard in which new features are tried out. This work accounts for the many big exclusive features in the STAR Line. It is responsible for many of the new ideas we have introduced for keeping the barn more sanitary and for saving time and work in _ the building. In the STAR Line you will find not only everything for the barn but features for utility and convenience that place the STAR Line above and beyond any other line of equip- ment in giving you the most for your money. We want to serve you to the best of our ability. We have had the experi- ence, we have the equipment and are ready for the outfitting of any farm building. Tell us your needs. Let us work together. x Page Five > a HONT- HELM -FERRIS & CO-_ LOVELAND FARMS CO., Omaha, Nebraska, July 25, 1918 Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co., Harvard, Illinois. Gentlemen: The complete equipment you furnished for our Dairy Barn five years ago has given perfect satisfaction. We have had occasion to call on your Omaha representative for assistance, and have always found him more than willing to assist us. We like your service. THE LOVELAND FARMS COMPANY, (Signed) A. J. Love, President. The photograph below shows a view of Loveland Farms VEN if you don’t read another page in this entire book, don’t miss the next few pages showing exclusive STAR features. Here are the features that make STAR Barn Equipment different. They show why STAR Stalls and Stanchions are so much easier to install, why they look better and last longer, and why STAR equipped barns are so Page Six S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT much more convenient to work in. These features are A jan the results of our experimental departments, and years of ya Ne service in designing and manufacturing barn equipment. if PRN They account for the fact that STAR Equipment a is the first choice where only choice equipment is fe AL ii wanted. They answer every fancy of the man who | } builds the most elaborate show place barn, as well vy as meeting the needs of the practical dairyman farmer. \ , Page Seven EXCLUSIVE STAR FEATURES sSsTAR LINE EQUIPMENT | feature Showing how STAR Stalls may be added or removed under the Unit System The Star Unit System ‘“‘Grows with your Herd—One Stall or a Hundred”’ ERE is one of the main reasons why all dairy- men prefer STAR Barn Equipment. STAR Stalls are built individually. Each stall is a separate unit and connects with the next on either side. You can install as many as you need to exactly fit your herd. And you can always add more as your herd increases. This exclusive STAR feature saves much in in- stallation expense. The stalls go into the barn just as they leave the factory. Simply clamp them to the concrete curb and you have the complete unit, stanchion and all, ready for business. This shows the way STAR Stalls come to you—ready for installa- tion the minute they arrive Page Nine > 4 HUNT+> HELM - FERRIS & CO -- > 4 The Arched Stall Shows the Quality of Steel Star Goods are Made of The Star Stall Arch is | cide OROn aconnate T is impossible to use anything but piece of steel pipe. | the highest grade of steel in the eee ee eee ; manufacture of STAR Steel Stalls. ; making a stall arch ; As you can see in the illustration here, eee: the STAR Stall Arch is made of one continuous piece of round steel pipe. There are no clamp irons, couplings or other devices on it. It is a com- plete frame in ONE piece. There is a big advantage in this. It makes a more sanitary equipment. Having no clamps or couplings, there are no places to catch dust and dirt. The equipment is easier to keep clean. This is one of the reasons why STAR Equipment is selected where the most rigid rules on sanitary con- ditions are to be complied with. Only the toughest of steel can be used to form this type of stall. The pipe is formed into shape without heating the metal. If inferior steel was used, very likely it would give out at the round corners of the arch. It would not stand up under the bending process. Take a piece of ordinary steel tubing and bend it and see what happens. It will show you that there is a big difference in the quality of metals. But, the result of a right selection of material is worth while. You get not only a more sanitary equipment but a more durable and better job of installation. Page Ten S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT The Star Curb Clamp “Sixty Seconds Sets a Star Stall’’ HIS simple device has answered a big problem in barn equipment i installations. It does away with anchors or templates. It enables you to go ahead with your concrete or cement work and finish the job before the equipment reaches you. It enables you to build the floor and curb with less work and at less expense, and to avoid the possibility of costly errors in getting stalls in the wrong place. It simplifies the entire job of installation. Simply drop the curb clamps over the curb and tighten the bolts. Then bolt the stall arches to them and the job is done. Simple and convenient, and a permanently satisfactory installation. This is a patented STAR feature. You will find it on no other barn equipment. Eo] Fig. 685 The STAR Curb Clamp consists of just two malleable jaws, adjustable to the curb by means of draw bolts. By leaving five inch holes in the cow bed, the distance apart that the stalls are wide, you are enabled to clamp the stall arches to the curb and to fill in around the partitions with thin, rich cement. Page Eleven > HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & CO- Fig. 765 The Star Alignment Device ‘*The Clean Stall Means a Clean Cow’’ i HIS exclusive STAR feature keeps every cow in line at the gutter. It keeps the stalls clean which means keep- ing the cows clean. ; All cows are not of the same length. They vary in length just as people vary in height. Star Equipped Barn, owned by M. P. Daw Page Twelve Buhl, Idaho But you want every cow to fit her stall com- fortably and stand so that litter falls into the gutter instead of on the bedding. The STAR Alignment Device provides for this. It instantly lengthens or shortens the cow bed. And it takes no longer to make the ad- justment than it does to lock the stanchion. The adjustment is made instantly after the cow is in the stall. So easy to operate that a small boy can do it. No tools needed. Not even a monkey wrench. Just raise the lever and move the stan- * chion forward for large cows or backward for short cows. Five different positions in eleven and one-half inches. It does not matter whether the cow goes into the same stall each time or not. The Alignment Device instantly aligns her at the gutter. Regardless of how the herd changes, the STAR Alignment Device in- stantly adjusts the stanchion to the animal. Here is the only alignment device which can be adjusted quickly enough to make it practical. It’s the result of the experience and engineering skill back of STAR Equipment. It’s one of the features that give the STAR Line leadership. The stanchion can be placed in any of five different positions over eleven and one-half inches of space. The illus- tration at the top shows the stanchion moved forward for a long cow. The second illustration shows the stanchion moved back for a short cow. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT The top illustration shows the Star Alignment Device adjusted for long cow bed. The second illustration shows it ad- justed for short cow bed. Every cow in line at the gutter. Page Thirteen HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & COs % Fig. 510 The Star One-Hand Lock Three Big Advantages ONE—The STAR Stanchion is easily opened with one hand. You don’t have to set down your pail of milk in order to turn your cow loose. And, when it is open, it is in position to receive the cow when she returns again to the stanchion. The movable bar of the stan- chion being equipped with a locking guide, it can be easily closed with one hand. TWO—The fork or crotch device on the lock straddles the side of the stall arch, which prevents the stanchion from swinging and holds it in place while open. THREE—The guide of the One-Hand Lock of the STAR Stanchion removes all strain on the hinge, preventing the breaking of the hinge castings. It also insures the perfect operation of the lock even after years of wear. Page Fourteen STAR LINE EQUIPMENT The Star Stanchion Adjustment OU can adjust the ay: width of the STAR Stanchion instantly . to fit the neck of a bull or cow, a young heifer or a small calf. It adjusts in neck width from 5 to 91% inches by loosening two countersunk set-screws. This is a feature that means much in saving of time and labor and economy of room. In the first place, by having the stanchions adjustable, it is not necessary to purchase special equipment for young stock. Even if you do go to the extra expense of having special equipment for your young stock, you can’t tell when you buy your equipment how your herd is to be divided as to young and old stock next year. As long as the stanchions can be instantly adjusted, without taking them out of the stall arches, it is possible to keep your barn properly equipped all the time, and no matter how your herd changes, the stanchions fit. Page Fifteen > HUNT- HELM Page Sixteen “FERRIS & CO-e Fig. 537 The Star Wood Lining ‘*A Big Little Thing’’ HE STAR Stanchion has a wood lining which is there for keeps. It is fastened as securely to the metal as if it had grown there. Nothing much less than blast- ing powder will tear it off. Wood linings are necessary to the comfort of the animals. But MOST wood linings are not permanent. They are held only by short screws and are easily crowded off. Not so with the Wood Lining of STAR Stanchions. It is not merely “hung on” with screws, but is FORCED into the U-bar— wedged in—and cannot possibly be loosened by the cattle. In addition to that we have made it EXTRA safe by an added anchor of screws FROM the BACK, which go one and a quarter inches into the kiln-dried, hard maple of which it is made. You'll never have the petty annoyance and expense of replacing wood linings if you buy the STAR Stanchion. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT NOTHER exclusive feature that means STAR leadership. The double chain on STAR Stanchions is practically noiseless —no rattling or clanking to disturb the peace and comfort of the cows. The chain may be made as loose or as tight as you wish, thus giving the cow the desired amount of freedom. All the “play”? is backward and forward. This enables the cow to get up without incon- venience and without bruising her shoulders. There is no ‘‘play’’ from side to side. The cows are prevented from reaching over and stealing each other’s feed. This manner of hanging stanchions saves the need of cut-outs in the curb. The stan- chion hangs low enough for comfort without the curb being cut out. These cut-outs are not only expensive to make but allow the cow to work feed back into the stall and waste it. A level curb prevents the waste of feed. Feed costs money. You can’t afford to let cows waste it. The fact that there are no connections be- tween the stanchion and the curb means that you will never be obliged to tear out any con- crete work to make any replacements—there Fig. 511 The Star Double Chain Hanging are no anchors to set, no bolts to place, no threads to strip. If you have ever torn out any concrete work, you will know what this saving means. Page Seventee * Page Eighteen PUNT: HELM -FERRIS & Co. STAR Automatic Sure Stop Keeps Cows’ Heads out of Here The Star Automatic Sure Stop HIS is a simple device, but it saves lots of time and work. Did you ever see a cow that wouldn’t put her head in the wrong place if she could? That seems to be her nature. It is very annoying to have a cow poke her head in beside the stanchion and have to back her up before you can stanchion her. It wastes time, too. When a cow enters a STAR Stall with the stanchion open, there is only one place where she can put her head and that is right into the Stan- chion. There is no other place for it. The STAR Automatic Sure Stop keeps her head from going in on one side. The locked fork keeps her head from going in the other. This device is a simple bowed steel bar attached to the side of the stanchion. It swings with the stan- chion, so that it in no way interferes with the freedom of the cow. It is always in place, but never in the way. It never needs attention and _ saves valuable time when the herd enters the barn. x STAR LINE EQUIPMENT How We Get That Permanent Finish on Star Equipment surface. All material used in STAR EQUIPMENT is given a chemical bath, which removes mill scale, and insures a perfectly clean, smooth surface for the enamel. Aer, al finish can be secured only when applied to a clean A permanent finish applied on steel must be of exceptional quality to withstand the variation in temperature in the dairy barn. It must have elasticity to absorb the expansion and contraction of the steel. The special gray enamel on STAR EQUIPMENT was selected after long experimenting, to get the most attractive and lasting appearance, and embody necessary qualities to resist rust and to withstand the ammonia and gases in the barn. To insure an even coat and smooth finish, the completed piece is dipped into the enamel. After being dipped, it is conveyed to ovens where the enamel is thoroughly baked on. The care and thought given to STAR finish. assures an even color and an even, permanent finish. Page Nineteen > HUNT- HELM~- FERRIS & CO-- * EES STR II SO EIS I AST OCT RON «| SEPA oC LT aE Star Equipped Barn on Clark Estate, Cooperstown, N. Y. View of Pen Department in Star Equipped Barn, owned by J. C. Dold, Buffalo. N. Y. Page Twenty RB LE RI a ct ans ca 5 Sects sanies a Moa a PRR 7pmen e HHI mi fee Lgu Owned by ton, Del. ing Wilm H. J. Krebs, Interior of STAR Equipped Barn, Fig. 521 Page Twenty-two No. 10 STAR STEEL STALL (Equipped with Giant STAR Stanchion, Automatic Sure Stop, STAR Alignment Device and STAR Curb Clamps) S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 10 Star Steel Stall (Unit System) Equipped with Giant STAR Stanchion, Automatic Sure Stop, STAR Alignment Device and STAR Curb Clamps SPECIFICATIONS STAR “Unit System;’’ patented; ARCH made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. out- side diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. (Page 10). Adapted to any width stall by using longer or shorter stall arms —regular widths, 3 ft., 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in.; 3 ft. 6 in. width furnished unless otherwise specified. Stall Arms illustrated Page 64. STAR Triple Bend Stall PARTITIONS Partitions; made of high grade pipe 1° in. outside diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. Giant STAR Stanchion No. STANCHION 486; patented; adjustable in neck space from 5 in. to 9¥4 in. (Page 15); one-hand, cow-proof lock; malleable guide re- moves strain from hinge; lock-open device (Page 14); protected hinge; swivel hanging at top and double chain hanging at bottom (Page 17). Uprights are high carbon steel U-bars, 114 in. x 114 in. x *s in., completely filled with kiln dried hard maple linings driven in and secured by 114 in. drive screws (Page 16). STAR Automatic; made from SURE STOP Y% in. bowed steel; perma- nently secured to stanchion upright; operates automatically with stanchion (Page 18). STAR Alignment ALIGNMENT DEVICE Device; patented: instantly adjustable; built entirely of steel and best grade malleable iron; provides for extreme adjustment of 111% in. (Page 12). STAR Curb Clamps; pat- CURB CLAMPS ented; built of best grade malleable iron; jaws connected by %¢ in. x 734 in. draw bolts (Page 11). After all machine work has been FINISH done on the material entering into the construction of this stall, the mill scale, grease, or other foreign matter is. thoroughly removed by a special cleaning process, or acid bath. It provides a thoroughly clean surface for the rust and ammonia resisting gray enamel, which is then applied and baked on perma- nently (Page 19). WEIGHT — Average weight per stall, 80 lbs. Weight of Extra Stall Partitions, 13% lbs. Furnished free upon MANGER PATTERN request: made of hard wood; to be used as pattern for shaping concrete mangers. Specify pattern No. 1 where No. 515 STAR Manger Partitions are to be used and in every instance except where No. 524 STAR Self-cleaning Mangers are to be used, in which case specify special pattern No. 2. SPECIAL NOTE STAR Self-cleaning Mangers, Manger Parti- tions, Water Bowls, or Name Plates can be added to the No. 10 STAR Steel Stall at any time desired. STAR Stalls always shipped completely assembled and ready to install (Page 9). STAR Equipped Barn, owned by Oliver P. Ensley, Indianapolis, Ind. Page Twenty three HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & COs AA i || | Fig. 517 No. 11 STAR STEEL STALL (Equipped with Giant STAR Stanchion, Automatic Sure Stop, and STAR Curb Clamps) Page Twenty-four S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 11 Star Steel Stall (Unit System) Equipped with Giant STAR Stanchion, Automatic Sure Stop and STAR Curb Clamps SPE CrELCAT TONS STAR “Unit System; patented; made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. out- side diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. (Page 10). Adapted to any width stall by using longer or shorter stall arms—regular widths, 3 ft., 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in.; 3 ft. 6 in. width furnished unless otherwise specified. Stall Arms illustrated Page 64. ARCH STAR Triple Bend Stall Par- ‘titions; made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. outside diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. PARTITIONS Giant STAR Stanchion No. 486; patented; adjustable in neck space from 5 in. to 94 in. (Page 15); one-hand, cow-proof lock; malleable guide re- moves strain from hinge; lock-open device (Page 14); protected hinge; swivel hanging at top and double chain hanging at bottom (Page 17). Uprights are high carbon steel U-bars, 114 in. x 114 in. x *s in., completely filled with kiln-dried hard maple linings driven in and secured by 114 in. drive screws (Page 16). STANCHION STAR Automatic; made from 14 in. bowed steel; permanently secured to stanchion upright; operates auto- matically with stanchion (Page 18). STAR Curb Clamps; pat- ented; built of best grade malleable iron; jaws connected by %¢ in. x 734 in. draw bolts (Page 11). SURE STOP CURB CLAMPS After all machine work has been done on the material entering into the construction of this stall, the mill scale, grease, or other foreign matter is thoroughly removed by a special cleaning process, or acid bath. It provides a thoroughly clean surface FINISH for the rust and ammonia resisting gray enamel, which is then applied and baked on permanently (Page 19). WEIGHT Average weight per stall, 75 lbs. Weight of extra stall partitions, 1314 lbs. Furnished free upon request; made of hard wood; to be used as pattern for shaping concrete mangers. Specify pattern No. 1 where No. 515 STAR Manger Partitions are to be used and in every instance except where No. 524 STAR Self-cleaning Mangers are to be used, in which case specify special pattern No. 2. MANGER PATTERN SPECIAL NOTE STAR Alignment Device, Self-cleaning Man- gers, Manger Partitions, Water Bowls, or Name Plates can be added to the No. 11 STAR Steel Stall at any time desired. STAR Stalls always shipped completely assembled and ready to install (Page 9). Prize-winning Jerseys, owned by A. V. Barnes, New Canaan, Conn, (See interior of his barn in the illustrated section). Page Twenty-five HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & CO-s Fig. 851 Twen No. 12 STAR STEEL STALL Equipped with Giant STAR Stanchion and STAR Curb Clamps) STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 12 Star Steel Stall (Unit System) Equipped with Giant STAR Stanchion and STAR Curb Clamps SPE Cure Ad, COINS STAR “Unit System;’’ patented; made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. out- side diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. (Page 10). Adapted to any width stall by using longer or shorter stall arms—regular widths, 3 ft., 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in.; 3 ft. 6 in. width furnished unless otherwise specified. Stall Arms illustrated Page 64. ARCH STAR Triple Bend Stall Par- titions; made of high grade pipe 1° in. outside diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. PARTITIONS Giant STAR Stanchion No. 486; patented; adjustable in neck space from 5 in. to 9¥% in. (Page 15); one-hand, cow-proof lock; malleable guide re- moves strain from hinge; lock-open device (Page 14); protected hinge; swivel hanging at top and double chain hanging at bottom (Page 17). Uprights are high carbon steel U-bars, 114 in. x 114 in. x *s in., completely filled with kiln-dried hard maple linings driven in and secured by 114 in. drive screws (Page 16). STANCHION STAR Curb Clamps; pat- ented; built of best grade malleable iron; jaws connected by %% in. x 734 in. draw bolts (Page 11). CURB CLAMPS After all machine work has been done on the material entering into the construction of this stall, the mill scale, grease, or other foreign matter is thoroughly removed by a special cleaning process or acid FINISH bath. It provides a thoroughly clean surface for the rust and ammonia resisting gray enamel, which is then applied and baked on permanently (Page 19). WEIGHT Average weight per stall, 72 lbs. Weight of extra stall partitions, 13% lbs. Furnished free upon request; made of hardwood; to be used as pattern for shaping concrete mangers. Specify pattern No. 1 where No. 515 STAR Manger Partitions are to be used and in every instance except where No. 524 STAR Self-cleaning Mangers are to be used, in which case specify special pattern No. 2. MANGER PATTERN SPECIAL NOTE The No. 12 STAR Steel Stall can be supplied with STAR Automatic Sure Stop, if desired. STAR Alignment Device, Self-cleaning Mangers, Manger Partitions, Water Bowls, or Name Plates can be added at any time. STAR Stalls always shipped completely assembled and ready to install (Page 9). STAR Equipped Barn, owned by E. W. Wing, Elgin, Ill. Page Twenty-seven ee en NE a HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & Co Fig. 852 No. 13 STAR STEEL STALL (Equipped with Giant STAR Stanchion) age Twenty-eight STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 13 Star Steel Stall (Unit System) Equipped with Ciant STAR Stanchion SPE Cin GAT LOIN'S STAR “Unit System;” made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. out- patented; ARCH side diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. (Page 10). Adapted to any width stall by using longer or shorter stall arms—regular widths, 3 ft., 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in.; 3 ft. 6 in. width furnished unless otherwise specified. Stall Arms illustrated Page 64. See arons STAR Triple Bend Stall Par- titions; made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. outside diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. Giant STAR Stanchion No. eo 486; patented; adjustable in neck space from 5 in. to 9% in. (Page 15); one-hand, cow-proof lock; malleable guide re- moves strain from hinge; lock-open device (Page 14); protected hinge; swivel hanging at top and double chain hanging at bottom (Page iby) 114 in. x 114 in. x *s in., completely filled with Uprights are high carbon steel U-bars, kiln-dried hard maple linings driven in and secured by 114 in. drive screws (Page 16). After all machine work has been FINISH 5 matt: done on the material entering into the construction of this stall, the mill scale, grease, or other foreign matter is thoroughly removed by a special cleaning process or acid bath. for the rust and ammonia It provides a thoroughly clean surface resisting gray enamel, which is then applied and baked on permanently (Page 19). WEIGHT Average weight per stall, 70 lbs. Weight of extra stall partitions, 13!% lbs. MANGER PATTERN Furnished free upon request; made of hard wood; to be used as pattern for shaping concrete mangers. Specify pattern No. 1 where No. 515 STAR Manger Partitions are to be used and in every instance except where No. 524 STAR Self-cleaning Mangers are to be used, in which case specify special pattern No. 2. SPECIAL NOTE The No. 13 STAR Steel Stall can be supplied with STAR Automatic Sure Stop or Curb Clamps, if desired. STAR Alignment Device, Self-cleaning Mangers, Manger Partitions, Water Bowls, or Name Plates can be added at any time. STAR Stalls always assembled and shipped completely ready to install (Page 9). STAR Equipped Barn, owned by W. B. Gallemore, Seymour, Ind. Page Twenty-nine HUNT- HELM- FERRIS & CO- Fig. 853 Page Thirty No. 14 STAR STEEL STALL (Equipped with No. 434W STAR Adjustable Steel Stanchion with wood linings) STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 14 Star Steel Stall (Unit System) Equipped with No. 434W STAR Adjustable Steel Stanchion with wood linings SPECTEICA TIONS STAR “Unit System; patented; made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. out- side diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. (Page 10). Adapted to any width stall by using longer or shorter stall arms —regular widths, 3 ft., 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in.; 3 ft. 6 in. width furnished unless otherwise specified. Stall Arms. illustrated Page 64). ARCH STAR Triple Bend Stall Par- titions; made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. outside diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. ’ PARTITIONS STAR Stanchion No. 434W; patented; adjustable in neck space from 5 in. to 914 in. (Page 15); one-hand, cow-proof lock; malleable guide removes strain from hinge; lock open device (Page 14); protected hinge; swivel hanging at top and double chain hanging at bottom (Page 17). Uprights are high carbon steel U-bars, 1°% in. x 7g in. x 14 in., completely filled with kiln- dried, hard maple linings driven in and secured by 1 in. drive screws (Page 16). STANCHION After all machine work has been done on the material entering into the construction of this stall, the mill scale, grease, or other foreign matter is thoroughly removed by a special cleaning process, or acid bath. It provides a thoroughly clean surface for the rust and ammonia resisting gray enamel, which is then applied and baked on permanently (Page 19). FINISH WEIGHT Average weight per stall, 68 lbs. Weight of Extra Stall Partitions, 131% Ibs. Furnished free upon request; made of hardwood; to be used as pattern for shaping concrete mangers. Specify pattern No. 1 where No. 515 STAR Manger Partitions are to be used and in every instance except where No. 524 STAR Self-cleaning Mangers are to be used, in which case, specify special pattern No. 2. MANGER PATTERN SPECIAL NOTE The No. 14 STAR Steel Stall can be supplied with STAR Automatic Sure Stop or Curb Clamps, if desired. STAR Alignment Device, Self-cleaning Mangers, Manger Partitions, Water Bowls or Name Plates can be added at any time. STAR Stalls always shipped completely assembled and ready to install (Page 9). STAR Equipped Barn, Cedar Lake Farm, Mikana, Wis. Page Thirty-one Fig. 854 No. 15 STAR STEEL STALL (Equipped with No. 434 STAR Adjustable Steel Stanchion) EQUIPMENT No. 15 Star Steel Stall (Unit System) Equipped with No. 434 STAR Steel Stanchion SEC DE GAs iO NS STAR “Unit System; made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. out- ARCH patented; side diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. (Page 10). Adapted to any width stall by using longer or shorter stall arms —regular widths, 3 ft., 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in.; 3 ft. 6 in. width furnished unless otherwise specified. Stall Arms illustrated Page 64. STAR Triple Bend Stall Par- titions; made of high grade PARTITIONS pipe 1°¢ in. outside diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. STAR Stanchion No. 434; patented; adjustable in neck STANCHION space from 5 in. to 914 in (Page 15); one-hand, cow-proof lock; malleable guide removes strain from hinge; lock open device; protected hinge; swivel hanging at top and double chain hanging 17). Uprights carbon steel U-bars, 1° x 7 x 14 in. at bottom (Page are high After all machine work has been FINISH , anne done on the material entering into the construction of this stall, the mill scale, grease, or other foreign matter is thoroughly removed by a special cleaning process, or acid bath. for the rust and ammonia It provides a thoroughly clean surface resisting gray enamel, which is then applied and baked on permanently (Page 19). WEIGHT Average weight per stall, 65 lbs. Weight of Extra Stall Partitions, 131% lbs. MANGER PATTERN Furnished free upon made of request; hardwood; to be used as pattern for shaping concrete mangers. Specify pattern No. 1 where No. 515 STAR Manger Partitions are to be used and in every instance except where No. 524 STAR Self-cleaning Mangers are to be used, in which case specify special pattern No. 2. SPECIAL NOTE The No. 15 STAR Steel Stall can be supplied with STAR Automatic Sure Stop or Curb Clamps if desired. STAR Alignment Device, Self-cleaning Mangers, Manger Partitions, Water Bowls or Name Plates can be added at any time. STAR Stalls always ship- ped completely assembled and ready to install (Page 9). STAR Equipped Barn on Willow Brook Farm, North Pembroke, Mass. Page Thirty-three > HUNT:> HELM - FERRIS & CO- Fig. 855 No. 16 STAR STEEL STALL (Equipped with No. 999 STAR Tubular Steel Stanchion) Page Thirty-four STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 16 Star Steel Stall (Unit System) Equipped with No. 999 STAR Tubular Steel Stanchion SPECIELTCAT TONS STAR “Unit made of high grade pipe 15 in. out- System;’’ patented; ARCH side diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. (Page 10). Adapted to any width stall by using longer or shorter stall arms —regular widths, 3 ft., 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in.; 3 ft. 6 in. width furnished unless otherwise specified. Stall Arms illustrated Page 64. PARTITIONS STAR Triple Bend Stall Par- titions; made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. outside diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. STAR Stanchion No. 999; pat- oe TS EON ented; neck space of standard width; one-hand, cow-proof lock; lock open device; hinge at bottom extra heavy, made of steel with patented device preventing stanchion from opening only to necessary width; swivel hanging at top and double chain hanging at bottom. Uprights made from 1,°; in. pipe— new and tested (Page 48). After all machine work has been FINISH : : : done on the material entering into the construction of this stall the mill scale, grease, or other foreign matter is thoroughly removed by a special cleaning process, or acid bath. for the rust and ammonia resisting gray enamel, It provides a thoroughly clean surface which is then applied and baked on permanently (Page 19). WEIGHT Average weight per stall, 62 lbs. Weight of Extra Stall Partitions, 131% lbs. Furnished free upon MANGER PATTERN request; made of hard- wood; to be used as pattern for shaping concrete Specify pattern No. 1 where No. 515 STAR Manger Partitions are to be used and in every instance except where No. 524 mangers. STAR Self-cleaning Mangers are to be used, in which case specify special pattern No. 2. SPECIAL NOTE The No. 16 STAR Steel Stall can be supplied with STAR Curb Clamps, if desired. STAR Alignment Device, Self-cleaning Mangers, Man- ger Partitions, Water Bowls, or Name Plates can be added at any time. STAR Stalls always assembled and ready to install shipped completely (Page 9). 3 STAR Equipped Walworth County Dairy Barn Elkhorn, Wis. Page Thirty-five > 4 HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & COs: 2 | Do sperer seis V Fig. 856 No. 17 STAR STEEL STALL (Equipped with No. 452 STAR Adjustable Wood Stanchion) Page Thir S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 17 Star Steel Stall (Unit System) Equipped with No. 452 STAR Adjustable Wood Stanchion SPECIFICATIONS STAR ‘Unit System;” made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. out- side diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. (Page 10). Adapted to any width stall by using longer or shorter stall arms —regular widths, 3 ft., 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in.; 3 ft. 6 in. width furnished unless otherwise specified. Stall Arms -illustrated Page 64. ted; ARCH patente STAR Triple Bend Stall Par- titions; made of high grade pipe 1° in. outside diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. PARTITIONS STAR Stanchion No. 452; patented; adjustable in neck space from 414 in. to 814 in.; one-hand, cow- proof lock; malleable guide removes strain from hinge; lock-open device; protected hinge; swivel hanging at top and double chain hanging at bottom (Page 17). x 2% in. seasoned hardwood—strong and durable; cross pieces made of high grade steel, securely bolted and held in place by malleable iron braces (Page 50). STANCHION Uprights made of 114 in. After all machine work has been done on the material entering into the construction of this stall the mill scale, FINISH grease, or other foreign matter is thoroughly removed by a special cleaning process, or acid bath. It provides a thoroughly clean surface for the rust and ammonia resisting gray enamel, which is then applied and baked on permanent- ly (Page 19). WEIGHT Average weight per stall, 58 lbs. Weight of Extra Stall Partitions, 1314 Ibs. Furnished free upon request; made of hard- wood; to be used as pattern for shaping concrete mangers. Specify pattern No. 1 where No. 515 STAR Manger Partitions are to be used and in every instance except where No. 524 STAR Self-cleaning Mangers are to be used, in which case specify special pattern No. 2. MANGER PATTERN SPECIAL NOTE The No. 17 STAR Steel Stall can be sup- plied with STAR Curb Clamps, if desired. STAR Alignment Device, Self-cleaning Mangers, Manger Partitions, Water Bowls, or Name Plates can be added at any time. _ STAR Stalls always shipped completely assembled and ready to install (Page 9). STAR Equipped Barn, owned by Leslie Thompson Woodstock, IIl. Page Thirty-seven — eee rs co renee aca aniamemanenneesemin HUNtT- HELM -FERRIS & CO; | Fig. 857 Page Thirty-eight No. 18 STAR STEEL STALL (Equipped with No. 495 Boss STAR Stanchion, Automatic Sure Stop, STAR Alignment Device and STAR Curb Clamps) STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 18 Star Steel Stall (Unit System) Equipped with No. 495 Boss STAR Stanchion, Automatic Sure Stop, STAR Alignment Device and STAR Curb Clamps SPECIFICATIONS STAR “Unit System; patented; ARCH made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. out- side diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. (Page 10). Adapted to any width stall by using longer or shorter stall arms—regular widths, 3 ft., 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in.; 3 ft. 6 in. widths furnished unless otherwise specified. Stall Arms illustrated Page 64. STAR Triple Bend Stall Par- , PARTITIONS titions; made of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. outside diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. Boss STAR Stanchion No. 495; STANCHION patented; adjustable in neck space from 5 in. to 914 in. (Page 15); one-hand cow-proof lock; malleable guide removes strain from hinge; lock-open device (Page 14); pro- tected hinge; swivel hanging at top and double chain hanging at bottom (Page 17). Up- rights are high carbon steel U-bars, 114 x 144 x 36 in., completely filled with kiln dried hard maple linings driven in and secured by 114 in. drive screws (Page 16). STAR Automatic; made from SURE STOP V4 in. bowed steel; permanently secured to stanchion upright; operates auto- matically with stanchion (Page 18). STAR Alignment ALIGNMENT DEVICE Device; patented; instantly adjustable; built entirely of steel and best grade malleable iron; provides for extreme adjustment of 111% in. (Page 12). STAR Curb Clamps; pat- CURB CLAMPS ented; built of best grade malleable iron; jaws connected by 3¢ in. x 734 in. draw bolts (Page 11). After all machine work has been FINISH done on the material entering into the construction of this stall, the mill scale, grease, or other foreign matter is thoroughly removed by a special cleaning process, or acid bath. It provides a thoroughly clean surface for the rust and ammonia resisting gray enamel, which is then applied and baked on permanent- ly (Page 19). WEIGHT Average weight per stall, 80 lbs. Weight of Extra Stall Partitions, 131% lbs. Furnished free upon MANGER PATTERN request; made of hard- wood; to be used as pattern for shaping concrete mangers. Specify pattern No. 1 where No. 515 STAR Manger Partitions are to be used and in every instance except where No. 524 STAR Self-cleaning Mangers are to be used, in which case specify special pattern No. 2. SPECIAL NOTE STAR Self-cleaning Mangers, Manger Par- titions, Water Bowls, or Name Plates can be added to the No. 18 STAR Steel Stall at any time desired. STAR Stalls always shipped completely assembled and ready to install (Page 9). STAR Equipped Barn, owned by J. C. Dold Buffalo, N. Y. Page Thirty-nine Fig. 525 Page Forty No. 20 STAR STEEL STALL (Equipped with Giant STAR Stanchion, Automatic Sure Stop, STAR Alignment Device and STAR Curb Clamps) S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 20 Star Steel Stall (Unit System) Equipped with Giant STAR Stanchion, Automatic Sure Stop, STAR Alignment Device and STAR Curb Clamps SIPE Cll AT LON Ss STAR “Unit System;’ patented; ARCH nade of high grade pipe 1°¢ in. out- side diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. (Page 10). Adapted to any width stall by using longer or shorter stall arms —regular widths, 3 ft., 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft..6 in.; 3 ft. 6 in. width furnished unless otherwise specified. Stall Arms illustrated Page 64. STAR Triple Bend Stall Par- PARTITIONS titions; made of high grade _ pipe 1°¢ in. outside diameter—new and tested. Thickness of pipe wall, .14 in. Giant STAR Stanchion No. STANCHION 486; patented; adjustable in neck space from 5 in. to 91% in. (Page 15); one-hand, cow-proof lock; malleable guide re- moves strain from hinge; lock-open device (Page 14); protected hinge; swivel hanging at top and double chain hanging at bottom (Page 17). Uprights are high carbon steel U-bars, 114x114x%s in.; completely filled with kiln dried hard maple linings driven in and secured by 114 in. drive screws (Page 16). STAR Automatic; made from SURE STOP 14 in. bowed steel; permanently secured to stanchion upright; operates auto- matically with stanchion (Page 18). STAR Alignment ALIGNMENT DEVICE Device; patented; instantly adjustable; built entirely of steel and best grade malleable iron; provides for extreme adjustment of 1114 in. (Page 12). STAR Curb Clamps; pat- CURB CLAMPS ented; built of best grade malleable iron; jaws connected by %¢ in. x 734 in. draw bolts (Page 11). After all machine work has been FINISH Gone on the material entering into the construction of this stall, the mill scale, grease, or other foreign matter is thoroughly removed by a special cleaning process, or acid bath. It provides a thoroughly clean surface for the rust and ammonia resisting gray enamel, which is then applied and baked on per- manently (Page 19). WEIGHT Average weight per stall, 88 lbs. Weight of Extra Stall Partitions, 1314 lbs. Furnished free upon MANGER PATTERN request; made of hard wood; to be used as pattern for shaping con- crete mangers. Specify pattern No. 1 where No. 515 STAR Manger Partitions are to be used and in every instance except where No. 524 STAR Self-cleaning Mangers are to be used, in which case specify special pattern No. 2. SPECIAL NOTE Star Self-cleaning Mangers, Manger Parti- tions, Water Bowls or Name Plates can be added to the No. 20 STAR Steel Stall at any time desired. The No. 20 STAR Steel Stall is equipped the same as the No. 10 STAR Steel Stall, but is built to conform to any arrangement or size of steel posts or pipe columns placed in stall row, as shown in illustration on page 40. Any of the STAR Steel Stalls numbers 10 to 18, inclusive, can be built in this manner. For STAR Steel Supporting Columns, see Page 68. STAR Stalls always shipped com- pletely assembled and ready to install (Page te cus STAR Equipped Barn on London Prison Farm London, Ohio Page Forty-one 7 HON T- HELM -FERRIS &7 CO. SiR E EOS? EaRT Fig. 486 Page Forty-two GIANT STAR ADJUSTABLE STEEL STANCHION > STAR LINE EQUIPMENT. No. 486 Giant Star Adjustable Steel Stanchion ERE is the biggest selling stanchion in the world. And its huge sales are based on merit. Time tried and proven worthy, it is now the standard toward which all other manufacturers are striving. When our basic patents expire, they may duplicate the Giant Star— certainly not before. It is easily and quickly adjustable in neck width to fit the largest bull or the smallest calf. And the adjustment is firm and secure. No other stanchion made is as strong and heavy as the Giant Star— comparison will prove this. It is equipped with a one-hand lock so you don’t have to set down your pail of milk to turn the cow loose. And, automatically, it drops into position to receive the cow on her return to the stall. The sliding guide of the Giant Star Stanchion removes all strain on the hinge and insures perfect operation of the lock at all times. The wood lining is wedged into the U-bar—secured as tightly as if it were part of the metal—then additionally anchored with inch and a quarter screws. This wood lining is made of seasoned hard maple, thoroughly é kiln-dried, and is the only wood lining that the cattle can ‘ nN not crowd off. The Giant Star costs but little more and offers so much more satisfaction and wear that it is by far the cheapest in the long run. Finished in gray enamel, thoroughly baked on. No. 486 Giant Star Stan- chion hung with chains top and bottom, Fig. 537 weight each, 25 Cross section of Giant POUN ds. Hun gz Star Stanchion, showing i j wood lining. This lining is with swivel at top made of thoroughly kiin- and double chain dried hard maple, forced : in under pressure, and hanging at bottom, then secured by long wei g ht each DT screws. It cannot be ; loosened pound S. erat) STAR Equipped Barn, owned by Salvation Army, Mentor, Ohio Page Forty-three Fig. 495 Page Forty-four BOSS STAR ADJUSTABLE STEEL ST S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 495 Boss Star Adjustable Steel Stanchion HE Boss STAR Adjustable Steel Stanchion shown on the opposite page combines cow com- fort and security in the highest degree. With this stanchion there will never be any need of squeezing large cows into stanchions which are too narrow for them, and never any occasion to rip off the wood lining of the stanchion to give a large cow the necessary neck space and comfort. It is instantly adjustable in neck width from five and one-half to nine and one-half inches. This adjustment in neck width is quickly and easily made. Simply loosen two set screws and narrow or widen the stanchion as you please. The wood lining of this stanchion is so applied that it cannot possibly be loosened. The lining is carefully shaped and fitted into the U-bar; it is wedged in place. Moreover, it is fas- tened by screws which stick into the wood an inch and a quarter. The face of this lining is rounded the same shape as the inner edge of a stanchion on which the cows have been rubbing for years. The Boss STAR Stanchion is just as comfortable the first time the cow puts her head through as it is after years of use. The upper end of the movable upright of the Boss STAR Stanchion is fitted with a guide. This guide relieves the strain on the hinge. It slides back and forth in the tube which forms the top of the stanchion so that the lock can’t miss when the stanchion is slammed shut. A malleable loop forms the latch. This drops over a catch on the movable upright and securely locks the stanchion. The loop or latch is so protected that it cannot be raised by cattle. The spring which holds it in place is made of best quality spring steel, tempered in oil, especially constructed to stand continuous torsion strain without weakening. The Boss Stanchion Lock is absolutely cow proof, yet it can be easily opened or closed with one hand. The upper end of the movable upright is fitted with a crotch device which sets astride the stall frame when the stanchion is open. This prevents the stanchion from swinging. Finished in gray enamel, thoroughly baked on. No. 495 Boss STAR Adjustable Steel Stanchion, hung chain top and bottom; weight each, 2514 pounds. Hung with swivel at top and double chain hanging at bottom, weight each, 27 pounds. STAR Equipped Barn, owned by Oliver P. Ensley Indianapolis, Ind. Page Forty-five Fig. 434W WITHOUT Wood Lining WITH Wood Lining Page Forty-six STAR ADJUSTABLE STEEL STANCHION > a STAR LINE EQUIPMENT ay Nos. 434 and 434W Star Adjustable Steel Stanchions HE Star Adjustable Steel Stanchion is constructed of special high carbon U-bar steel, with malleable fittings throughout and with or without Star wood linings. It is built to supply the demand for an adjustable stanchion, with wood lining, if desired, at a moderate cost. It is neat in appearance, light and easy to operate, but at the same time strong enough to secure any dairy cow. The lock, or latch is a strong feature of this stanchion. It is identical with that used on the Boss Stanchion, shown on page 44. This stanchion is fitted with a guide which slides in the upper cross-bar. When the stanchion is open the movable upright is always guided, and when closed it is locked by the malleable loop which drops over the guide. The lock is so protected that it cannot be opened by animals, but can be re- leased by the operator with one hand. The stanchions can be closed by simply shoving them shut, and you can turn the cow loose without stopping to set down your pail of milk. The stanchion is fitted with a yoke or crotch device, which straddles the side of the stall frame and holds the stanchion in place when open. Just by loosening two set-screws, one holding the upper cross-bar and the other holding the lower cross-bar, this stanchion can be instantly ad- justed in neck width from 5 to 914 inches, so that the same stanchion can be used to accommodate a calf, or cow, as desired. Finished in gray enamel, thor- oughly baked on. No. 434W Star Adjustable Steel Stanchion, wood lined, weight each, 2314 pounds. Furnished either chain or swivel hung. No. 434 Star Adjustable Steel Stanchion, without wood lining, weight each, 21 pounds. Furnished either chain or swivel hung. STAR Equipped Barn, on Haldaway Dairy Farm, Provo, Utah Page Forty-seven 4 Pe A Fig. 999 Be sory STAR TUBULAR STEEL STANCHION * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 999 Star Tubular Steel Stanchion HE No. 999 STAR Tubular Steel Stanchion, illustrated on the op- posite page, meets with instant favor where a sanitary steel stanchion at a moderate price is desired. This stanchion is constructed of 1 5-16 inch outside diameter high grade, tested steel pipe. It is the strongest and most satisfactory stanchion of this type on the market. In this stanchion is com- bined simplicity with strength of design. Assuming that a stanchion has the necessary strength, there are two vital points to consider: The first is the lock. The lock on the No. 999 STAR Tubular Stanchion can be operated with one hand. It is positive and cow-proof. It is so designed that no pressure applied in any manner either above or below will cause it to unlock—yet, with the thumb and finger it can be instantly released. To close the stanchion it is only necessary to slam the movable bar into place and it locks automatically. The hinge on this stanchion was designed with a full knowledge of the unusually hard service demanded of a stanchion of this type. Its design and construction make hinge breakage im- possible. The two-part hinge is built of pressed steel, rather than iron. The inside half of the hinge attached to the movable bar is slotted so as to regulate the distance that the stanchion can be opened and, at the same time, to dis- tribute the strain between the large rivet operating through this slot and the heavy bolt upon which this hinge While this hinge bolted to the bars, a permanent con- turns. is securely nection is made by actually welding the hinge to the uprights, making a con- nection as secure as though all were of one piece. Each stanchion is equipped with a crotch device attached to the movable bar which engages the frame in which This holds the stanchion in place when open and prevents it from it is hung. turning or twisting sideways. The neck space is 7 inches in width. Finish, gray enamel, thoroughly baked on. No. 999 STAR Tubular Steel Stan- chion, chain hung, as illustrated, weight, Saxon, 7 illos. STAR Equipped Barn, at U.S. Indian School, Genoa, Neb. x Page Forty-nine a HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & COs * No. 452 Star Adjustable Wood Stanchion HE Star Adjustable Wood Stanchion offers all the advantages of any wood stanchion in addition to the adjustable feature. The uprights are made of seasoned hardwood, and are very strong and durable. The crosspieces are of all pressed steel, securely bolted and held in place by malleable braces. The stanchion is adjustable in neck width from 414 to 814 inches, and can thus be made to accommodate very young heifers or full sized cows. This adjustable feature means economy. It won’t be necessary to buy stanchions of special sizes for special sized animals. Your stan- chions will fit your herd a/ways—no matter how it changes. The latch is a vital part of the stanchion. The Star Adjustable Wood Stanchion locks automatically when slammed shut. The latch is made of a single piece of malleable iron, the simple gravity lock requiring no spring. This latch slides in between two pressed steel side plates, connect- ing the upper part of the stanchion, so that the movable upright is always guided when open. The stanchion is also provided with a fork or yoke casting on the latch which holds the stanchion in proper position when open. The stanchion is furnished with chain hangings, or if desired, with swivels. Be sure to specify which style of hanging is wanted when or- dering. No. 452 Star Adjustable Wood Stanchion, weight 15 Ibs. Page Fifty ee Stanchion Fastenings LL Star Stanchions are regularly furnished hung either single A chain or swivel top and bottom. Where special fastenings, to attach single chain hung stanchions to wood or concrete are desired, those shown in Figs. 627 and 628 will answer all requirements. These attachments being all malleable, are light and strong. Note that 2!4 x %s-inch lags are furnished for attaching the top malleable to wood. Machine bolts 3% x %-inch are furnished to fasten the bottom malleable to concrete. Attachments for single chain hung stanchions complete with two lags and two bolts, as illustrated, weight per set, 34 pound. When so specified, any of the various styles of stanchions will be ‘furnished hung swivel top and double chain bottom, exactly as illus- trated below. The Star Double Chain Hanging has become so popular that we have been forced to supply it where stanchions are used in wooden frames. Formerly this hanging was furnished only in connection with Star Stalls. This Double Chain Hanging is especially desirable for the reason that it permits the stanchion to hang as close to the curb as possible and because it gives the necessary freedom backward and forward without any tendency toward side motion. Star Double Chain Hangings fastenings, with 34 x %-inch with malleable curb machine bolts, and top as illustrated, weight per swivels with 2! x 3s-inch lags, set, 3 pounds. Fig. 629 STAR LINE EQUIPMENT. * Ld Fig. 627 Fig. 628 Page Fifty-one * HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & CO-. Fig. 523 Fig. 524 ; Page Fifty-two Showing Mangers up for Cleaning or Watering Star Self Cleaning Steel Mangers in Place * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT * No. 524 Star Self-Cleaning Steel Mangers HE best results in feeding can be had only when the cows are fed separately. For this reason, an individual feed box is desirable in order to get full value from the feed consumed. It is difficult to feed-properly from a common trough. The cows that eat fast get too much; those that eat slowly don’t get enough. The STAR Self-cleaning Steel Manger affords an individual feed box for each cow so that the feed may be properly regulated. These Mangers are constructed in sections of three, ordinarily, or they may be made in sections of two on special order. They are of heavy, 18-gauge gal- vanized steel, reinforced by steel angles to which they are riveted. They are fitted with counterbalancing springs which make it easy to lift them up. These springs "are adjusted for stiffness to hold the Mangers up when the trough is being cleaned. Owing to the heavy galvanized angle used along the front which gives a stiff- ness that could not otherwise be secured, STAR Steel Mangers are much more substantial than others. Even the edges of the partitions or divisions are rolled — no possible point that could make for durability or sanitation has been overlooked. There is no bottom in these Mangers, the sections being so shaped that they fit into a shallow concrete trough which forms the bottom of the Mangers. This trough can be cleaned and flushed with water when the mangers are raised, and filled with water so that the animals can be watered in their stalls. Where STAR Self-cleaning Mangers are to be used, we furnish free a wooden templet or form by which the concrete manger trough is properly shaped. Finish galvanized and then covered with gray enamel, thoroughly baked on. No. 524 STAR Self-cleaning Man- gers, for use with any type of STAR Stalls, weight, each, 75 lbs. Bay eg ‘ = STAR Equipped Barn, owned by Oneida Indian School, Oneida, Wis. Page Fifty-three x. HONT- HELM -FERRIS & CO- Fig. 764 Fig. 717 Page Fifty-four Star Connected Manger Partitions Raised Star Connected Manger Partitions in Place * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT | * No. 717 Star Connected Steel Manger Partitions TAR Connected Steel Manger Partitions are identically the same as STAR S Self-cleaning Mangers, with the exception that the manger fronts are omitted. These manger partitions fit into a concrete trough which forms bottom and front of the mangers. This trough can be cleaned and flushed with water when the manger partitions are raised; also filled with water, permitting of watering the animals in the stalls. They are constructed of heavy 18-gauge galvanized steel, reinforced by steel angles. The rolled edges of these partitions and the heavy galvanized angle along - the front, which connects them and permits of their being raised in sections, gives a stiffness and durability which could not otherwise be secured, and is found only in STAR Connected Manger Partitions. Counter-balancing springs make it easy to lift them up and these springs are adjusted for stiffness so as to hold the manger partitions out of the way while the trough is being cleaned. The connected manger partitions combine the good features of the complete mangers with those of the individual manger partitions and are meeting with universal favor. Where our connected manger parti- tions are used, we furnish free, a wooden templet or form by which the concrete manger trough may be properly shaped. Finish, galvanized and then covered with gray enamel, thoroughly baked on. No. 717 STAR Connected Manger ~ Partitions for use with any type of Star stalls, weight each, 25 lbs. STAR Equipped Barn, owned by H. J. Ferris Harvard, IIl. Page Fifty-five x HUNT+- HELM - FERRIS & CO- a pula: \ io pacts) = _ Ad a Fig. 516 Fig. 515 Star Individual Manger Partitions Raised Star Individual Manger Partitions in Place * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT jw No. 515 Star Individual Steel Manger Partitions so divided that each cow has her own feed box. This effectively prevents one cow stealing from another; it prevents waste of feed; it gives the slow eater an even chance and enables you to give each cow just what you want her to have. BR: use of Star Individual Steel Manger Partitions the concrete trough can be Star Individual Steel Manger Partitions place you in a position to feed prop- erly and get the full value out of the feed consumed. Moreover, the danger of any cow overeating can be eliminated by their use. They accomplish every purpose of the galvanized manger in spite of the fact that they cost less. While the cows are being fed, Star Individual Steel Manger Partitions stay in place. They are perfectly smooth; no seams, rivets, heads or bolts project; * so that it is impossible for the cow to catch hold of them and raise them. After feeding, when the concrete manger is to be cleaned, the partitions can be lifted and not only raised up out of the trough but tilted clear back out of the way. The steel of which these partitions are made, is thick and protected so that the chemical action of water and of the acids in silage has but little effect. Their construction is so simple that there is nothing to get out of order. But the best of it is they cost so little in comparison with galvanized mangers and yet you get the same practical advantages, the saving of feed and the preven- tion of accident (by cows trying to reach too far for feed), the regulation of feed to the ration each cow should have—at just about half the cost. To those who intend to use Star Individual Steel Manger Partitions, we furnish free a templet or wood form with complete instructions for making the concrete manger of proper shape. No instructions for the installation of the manger partitions is necessary. Anyone can do it. Finished in gray enamel, thoroughly baked on. No. 515 Star Individual Steel Man- ger Partitions, for use with any type of Star stalls, weight each, 14 pounds. STAR Equipped Barn, owned by H. J. Krebs Wilmington, Del. Page Fifty-seven Fie Se 0 U q S fv y hd ft P = he I 2 Z 5 I SHINOW MHLNIM DNINNG No1Londaow Fifty-eight Page STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Sanitary Water Bowl €¢ J WOULD not own a cow barn 24 hours without either having a set of water bowls already installed, or having my order on the way to Harvard for them,”’ said a promi- nent dairyman. Water bowls are admittedly the biggest money-making equipment that any dairyman can put in his barn. They not only increase his income but decrease his expenses. They stop the winter slump in milk production. They save valuable time and work. They save high-priced feed. They help keep cows in better condition. They help prevent spread of disease among the herd. They better the growth of young stock. But more important than anything else, they increase the production of milk so much that no dairyman is doing himself justice in try- ing to get along without them. - Increase the Income from Your Herd No dairyman needs to be shown that his cows should have plenty of water. Everyone knows that the more water a cow drinks the more milk she will yield. Her milk is about 87 per cent water. It is as reasonable to ex- pect her to go without water as to go without food. But many dairymen do not know how much MORE milk a cow will yield when she can drink not only all the water she wants, but exactly WHEN SHE WANTS IT. A cow will drink more water if she can have it as she wants it, especially in winter when the tempered water given her in the stall is more relished than the icy water from the tank in the unsheltered barnyard. Some cows won’t even drink warm water while fighting a blizzard in an open yard. It is estimated that a good dairy cow should drink from 14 to 18 gallons of water every day. High producing animals require much more. They simply have got to have it if they are to give their maximum production of milk. STAR Sanitary Water Bowls answer the problem. They keep a plentiful supply of water before the cows constantly. And like STAR Stalls and Stanchions, they have many exclusive features. Features that mean much to you in economy of installation, ease in keeping the bowls clean and sanitary, and having a better looking equipment when installed. STAR Water Bowls are strictly sanitary. They are open so that the purifying sunlight and air can enter the bowl. They are indivi- dual; there is no way in which water can run from one bowl into another—no danger of one bowl contaminating the water in another. Operate Under Any Pressure STAR Water Bowls are fitted with auto- matic valves which operate under any kind of pressure. They may be connected with a direct pressure system or a storage tank, which is usually placed in the loft above the stock. The water is admitted through the valve at the top of the bowl. A valve lever in the form of a “‘leaf’’ or ‘“‘paddle’’ 7 inches long is hinged at the top and hangs down into the bowl at an angle. When the cow presses upon the lever the water runs into the bowl. When the pressure on the lever is relaxed, a spring closes the valve automatically. This is a good stiff spring, strong enough to keep the valve closed tightly, but placed so that it yields readily when the cow’s nose presses down on the long lever in the bowl. Valve Easily Removed The principal working part of the valve is made of brass. The valve is put in with gra- phite, so it cannot corrode. There is no danger of its becoming clogged, because nothing but the pure, clean water direct from the supply pipe passes through it.- If it is necessary to renew the Fuller ball, or if for any other reason you wish to remove the valve, it can be easily taken out. Being at the top of the bowl, it is easy to get at. This valve at the top of the bow! interferes in no way with cleaning, and the valve lever which opens the valve also lifts up out of the way. (Continued on Page 61) Page [Fifty-nine > 4 HUNT+- HELM -FERRIS & COs INCREASED MILK FLOW CONSIDERABLE Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co. ; Gentlemen: ie ““My experience has been that the i: increased flow of milk from thirty cows in one of my barns paid the cost of one STAR Water Bowl every day, or in other words, each water bowl paid for itself in thirty days.” 1, 9th Jeg0PS3D} Davison, Michigan. STOPPED’ COWS’ FROM DRYING EARLY Twelve Corners, Wis., Dec. 18, 1918. Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co. “Have used your water bowls for two years and am very much pleased as I have always had trouble with cows drying early but not so since I have in the bowls and must say I never had ‘any trouble with the bowls.’ Yours truly, GUS. SCHROEDER, Black Creek, R.R. No. 2. GETTING MORE MILK Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co. Gentlemen: “My cattle look 20% bet- ter than they did when I had to turn them out in the yard. I had other bowls but took them out and put inSTAR. The milk I never weigh but I know there is a great increase.” B. G. FLOCK, Lisbon, New York. Page Sixty STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Sanitary Water Bowl (Continued from Page 59) This valve lever is made of malleable iron, and has smooth, round edges on which it is impossible for the cow to catch or cut her tongue. The bowl is shaped so her nose fits into it conveniently and the edge is rolled to protect her mouth. Connect Either Above or Below A patented feature of the STAR Water Bowl is that you can connect the supply pipe from either above or below. Both top and bottom of the valve chamber are drilled and threaded for the supply pipe. The pipe is in- serted at one end and a plug at the other. The supply pipe can run along above, or be laid below under the cement, or along the curb. Saves Labor and Pipe The fact that STAR Bowls can be piped into from below means a big saving where the main supply pipe runs below the bowls. It saves about a foot of pipe, and a “‘goose- neck”’ made of two elbows four extra joints, which would be necessary if it were possible to connect the supply pipe only at top of bowl. STAR Water Bowls are also furnished with attachments to fasten to wood. No extra charge is made for these. When ordering be sure to specify whether bowls are to be fastened to steel stalls or to wood. — The STAR Water Bowl can also be used for watering hogs. In installing, it is of course necessary to place the bowl low enough so that the hogs can drink conveniently. Suitable fastenings can be supplied for attaching the bowl to wood or with clamps for attaching it to steel posts or pens. Fig. 635 Shows a method of installing a 2 3 single STAR Water Bowl. For economy, the and two pipe nipples. It SaVES bowl is placed between two stalls,- so that also the work of connecting one bowl serves two cows. Fig. 636 shows STAR Water Bowls installed in pairs. When the mangers or manger parti- tions are raised they slip in between the bowls, and the bowls in no way interfere with their operation. Page Sixty-one > HUNT: HELM- FERRIS & CO- Star Bowls Are Easily and Quickly Detached HIS is an important point. It means much to you in saving time in cleaning and being able to keep the bowls clean all of the time. When you clean STAR Bowls you do not have a lot of complicated devices to contend with. Simply lift the bowl off and clean it. Note the illustrations below and on page 63. The STAR Bowl is excep- tionally easy to clean. The entire bowl is cast in one piece with no square corners or openings to catch impurities. It is oval in shape with a rolled edge, which allows the cow’s nose to fit into it com- fortably. It is finished with a heavy coat of STAR Special Gray Enamel. @&To remove the bowl, simply raise the catch below the bowl with the finger and lift the bowl from its position. The valve Weiwierr or “paddle” on STAR _ Bowls can be raised instantly to allow free ac- cess to the bowl without remov- ing it from its position. STAR Bowls are open which means allowing purifying air and sunlight to enter. A cow will drink more To replace the STAR Bowl, place the lugs in the ears water when she on each side of the valve chamber, and bring the bowl to a can see it all level position. the time. Page Sixty-two —_—a S TAR LINE “GETS 3 MORE CANS OF MILK’”’ Dear Sirs: I have recently installed a set of the STAR Sanitary Water Bowls in my stables, which I purchased from you, and to say that they are entirely satisfactory in their operation, results obtained and ease with which they can be placed in the barn, but feebly expresses my pleasure in their possession. I would not be without them. We are making at present about eleven cans of milk, whereas with the same number of cows before installing the BOWLS we had difficulty in producing eight cans, feeding practically the same. I take pleasure in recom- mending your barn equipment to any prospective pur- chaser. R. K. WOODWARD, Dec. 23, 1918. Sharon, Conn. “INCREASE PAYS FOR THE OUTFIT EVERY 35 DAYS’’ Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co., Harvard, Ill. Gentlemen: I am glad to report to you how satisfactory the water bowls are that I bought of you in 1917. I started using 8 of your automatic bowls on Nov. 20, 1917, after having installed them in my barn at a total cost of $85.11, including bowls, pipe fittings, tank and labor. bm I milked the same 15 cows in 1917 as I did in 1916 and as I had my milk record for 1916 to compare with 1917, I am in a position to know exactly what the results of plenty of good water are on the milk flow. My cows were in practically the same condition both years and the feed was as near alike as could be in the EQUIPMENT two different years, and the cows gave from 4 to 7 lbs. a day more in 1917 than they did in 1916, or an average of 8214 lbs. per day for the 15 cows. This figured at $3.00 per 100 lbs. would pay for the outfit every 35 days. So you see it is useless to ask if I would go back to the old system of watering cows. Respectfully yours, C. H. MANN, Nov. 5, 1918. Woodstock, Ill. “COULD NOT GET ALONG WITHOUT THEM”’ Answering yours of the 20th inst., will say that we do not see how we could get along without the water bowls in both our milking barn and our maternity barn. They have never given us any trouble, and in winter time especially, we feel they are one of the best assets in our barns. I cannot recommend them too highly. EDWIN S. KELLY, Of the Kelly-Springfield Tire Co. November 22, 1918. Springfield, Ohio. To remove the STAR Bowl, simply raise the catch (2) with finger and lift bowl from its position. To replace bowl, place lugs (5) between ears (6) on each side of valve chamber (3) and bring bowl into position. With STAR Bowls, the supply pipe may enter either from above (8) or below (9). cap fits either opening. The pipe Page Sixty-three HUNT: HELM - FERRIS &) coy Star Stalls Fit Anywhere made in one size, but the stalls themselves may be of any desired width. The width of the stall is determined by the length of the malleable arms which connect the frame or arch to the stall partitions. f — mune The illustrations on this page show the several styles of simple connections which make it possible to fit Star Steel Stalls to any conceivable arrangement as to size or location. a le arches or stanchion frames of Star Stalls are regularly In Figure 508 are shown the three regular sizes of arms for stalls No. 10 to 18, inclusive. These arms used with regular C) arches will make either three foot, three foot three inch or three foot six inch stalls. The illustration at the right shows the manner of attaching stalls to wooden posts located in or at the end of the stall row. When necessary to attach stalls to wooden posts, specify exact size of posts, distance apart on center, and whether these posts are located flush with or back of manger edge of cement curb. Fig. 623 Special Arm for Making Stalls No. 10 to 18 Any Width Desired. The above illustration shows the special arm by which Star stalls can be made any desired width. The two malleable parts fit perfectly into the ends of a short piece of one and five-eighths inch O. D. pipe and are connected by a five-eighths inch full thread bolt. The piece of pipe can be cut to the required length for any width stall. When ordering special arms, specify exact distance from center of arch upright to center of stall partition. | ; . : ey inet ee Fig. 625 Fig. 508 Malleable brackets fas- tened with lag screws as shown above are used to attach Star Stalls to wooden posts located in stall rows or to wooden partitions or wall at ends of rows. Above are shown the arms used with Star Stalls of regular widths. The short- est arms are used for three Fig. 624 foot stalls, the longest for three and one-half foot stalls Special Arm for Making No. 20 Stalls Any Width Desired and the medium length for : stalls three feet three inches The special arm shown in Fig. 624 is used in connection wide. with regular width stall arches to make No. 20 Stalls any width desired. When ordering special arms for No. 20 Stalls separately, specify exact distance from center of arch to center of steel column to which arm is to be attached, also state the outside diameter of column. Page Sixty-four * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT |. > ¢ Star Equipment Easily Moved MONG the important patented features added to Star Barn Equipment is the Star Cement Anchor. It can be used to secure stall par- titions or the uprights of Star Steel Pens, which otherwise would have to be permanently imbedded in the concrete. The advantage of using these anchors with Unit System Star Stalls will be instantly seen. The stall partitions can be quickly removed as well as the stall arches, leaving the entire barn floor clear of equip- ment, if desired. This patented anchor used with Star Barn Equipment makes it possible for the dairyman to remove any or all of his equipment at any time. This leaves the barn entirely free from all obstruc- tions should he desire to use it for any other purpose. Being constructed of the best grade of malle- able iron obtainable, the Star Anchor is practically everlasting as com- pared with steel. The actual details of this construction are shown in Fig. 640. Fig. 639 Star Cement Anchor It is made in two parts, connected by j,-inch bolts. The top of the lower part of the anchor is flush with the concrete floor. After the concrete is set, the two ,,-inch bolts are slipped into place. The foot of the stall partition or pen upright is inserted and securely held by the upper part of the anchor which fits over a pin ex- tending through the partition or upright. The bolts connecting the upper and lower part of the anchor can be instantly replaced if ever necessary. To remove a stall partition or section of pen, simply loosen the bolts which hold the two parts of the anchor together. Star Cement Anchors are shipped attached to the ends of the stall partitions or to the pen uprights as specified. This insures their being properly located in the concrete. Star Cement Anchor finished in gray enamel; weight, each, 2 pounds. y § i 2 H : a Fig. 640 Page Sixty-five * HUNT+- HELM - FERRIS & CO- Stall Partitions and Fittings Finish—Gray Enamel, Baked On No. 618 Star Stall Partition for cement floor and wood upright, weight each, 14 pounds. No. 619 Star Stall Partition for wood floor and wood upright, weight each, 15 pounds. Partition Clamps Beads No. 620 Star Split Flange Clamps for attaching stall par- eecas titions to Steel Supporting Posts Oe located back of the curb, either Star Split Flanges can be quickly dividing the partitions or located attached to stall partitions intended for at the rear end. cement floor, thereby adjusting them for Average weight, 214 lbs. attaching to wood floor. Weight each, 114 lbs. Fig. 620 Star Name Plate =NE JE WOODS ‘DE IRENE JE WOODS 'D No. 536 No. B200G The Star Name Plate is a malleable frame fitted with two pieces of celluloid between which the name or record card is placed. secant Name plates furnished in gray enamel finish. Weight each, 214 pounds. Fig. 536 Star Neck Chains No. 758 In many dairies, especially those producing certified milk, neck chains are used to keep each cow on her feet when in the stall. These chains hang between the stall uprights and prevent the cow from lying down after the - Fig. 758 udder is washed before milking. Star Neck Chain Page Sixty-six STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 739 Star Chain Alley Gate 0 fp } i SS oe Sa Sz Fig. 718—Star Chain Alley Gate Hung Up When Not in Use. Star Chain Alley Gate are so obvious upon inspection that it needs comparatively little comment. In the first place, by merely lengthening or shortening the chain, it can be made to fit any opening. Where it is impossible to secure absolutely accurate measurements or there is a possibility of slight changes later, the Star Chain Gate is the only practical one to use. It is fitted with a simple Automatic Lock. Its very simplicity is the best proof of durability and it can be adapted to practically any width of opening. When not in use, it is suspended from stall partitions on either side, entirely out of the way. The Star Chain Alley gate fills a long felt want in a highly efficient manner. Finished in gray enamel, thor- oughly baked on. When ordering specify distance from center to center of stall arch uprights, or distance from center of stall arch upright to wall. Weight of 3 ft. 6 in. gate, 8 lbs. ‘Tse merit and operation of the Fig. 739—Star Chain Alley Gate in Actual Use. Y bs Sh SS ES Fig. 718—Star Chain Alley Gate Out of the Way When Not Being Used. Fig. 738—The Star Chain Alley Gate Locks. Automatically. Page Sixty-seven > HUNT: HELM - FERRIS 2&8) cosy | No. 626 Star All-steel Columns A STAR All-steel Column will support more than a wooden post twice its size. These steel columns in the long run are cheaper than large, clumsy insanitary wooden supports. They offer less obstruction to light and ventilation. They are sanitary and easily cleaned. Star All-steel Columns are not mere shells in which to build concrete columns. Their strength is in the steel itself; no filling is needed. They can be filled with concrete if desired and the cost to fill them ‘‘on the job”’ will be less than the extra freight if they were filled with concrete before shipping. Star Stalls can be made to conform to any arrangement of steel columns supporting the loft. Columns of any length furnished in five sizes, as shown in the table below. Gites Safe Load in Tons Diameter (One-fourth of Ultimate Capacity) Weight Column per ft. Inches 7 ft. 8 ft. 9 ft. 10 ft. pounds Dene cen ae 4 3% 314 3M 3 52 5 454 4% 38 ead cs ced Se 934 914 834 8 51% te edt ee ee 14 1314 13 121% 7% Geta an an eee 1934 1914 1814 18 10 Outside Caps or Bases for Columns Diameter Column Size Weight Inches Inches pounds Dare sha) sie tee ee ee eke eee CMe Sac ees abe 21% Stee ee ee ee 5l46x 54x 4 se et ee ee ee 6: Sixes 614 Be ee eee Sot Soe xed 10 6. seco oe) ee ee ee 85 < HUNT- HELM - FERRIS & CO- Galvanized Lifting Manger The Galvanized Lifting Manger, illustrated, is very con- venient and practical for feeding purposes. The springs hold the manger in position when fully raised, or when as shown in the illustration. When raised the manger is entirely out of the way so that the feeding trough can beeasily cleaned. meesnhahell ASA AIOE RCTS DRDO TATE SEERA DT HI j | ti Page Seventy S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT R STEEL BULL PEN Automatic Hay Rack Saves Hay The STAR Automatic Hay Rack can be used in connection with all STAR Steel Pens. It prevents the waste of hay. This rack is locked open while being filled; when lock is released, strong springs press front and back to- gether and the hay is compressed against the back within easy reach of the animal. Only a mouthful at a time can be taken. This prevents waste. ree ALVD ADONVI AGNV AXHONVWI MOVE LYS HLIM Nd TING THALS AVL aE 0 U Q : F. re 5 a P 5 ce Z Z 2 Z S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 630 Star Steel Bull Pen UCH depends upon the health and vitali- ty of the sire of the dairy herd. His quarters should provide a place for mod- erate exercise, where he will be comfortable, absolutely safe, and at the same time within sight of the herd. STAR Steel Bull Pens meet just such requirements. The Pen shown on the opposite page, is the same as that illustrated on pages 70 and 71 with the exception that the bull stanchion is shown set back to permit a concrete manger being used. The advantages of having the stanchion set back are many. In the first place, no space is taken up in the feed aisle or walk in front of the pen. This arrangement makes it very conven- ient to place the water bowl outside rather than inside the pen, so that it is completely out of the way. The manger gate, in front of the stanchion, is hinged so that it can be opened readily, allow- ing free access to the manger for feeding and cleaning. The idea of using a manger gate in front of the concrete bull or cow pen manger is a big advantage over the old way of having a stationary panel built up which was always in the way and which made it impossible to convenient- ly clean the feed manger. The concrete manger bottom can be rounded so that there are no square corners and so that the manger may be conveniently kept in a clean, sanitary condition. Where one has plenty of alley room in front of the pen, the galvanized lifting manger, illustrated in con- nection with the bull pen shown on page 70, answers the purpose very nicely. The STAR steel bull pen is usually fitted with an ad- justable rigid stanchion. It is mace of U-bar steel of the same weight as that used in the Giant STAR stanchion shown on page 42. The wood lining which is fitted into the U-bar uprights means comfort to the bull and safety to those who work around him, because it increases the strength of the uprights and prevents the stanchion from springing or bending. The pen is 5 feet high. The top and bottom rails are of 1°¢ by 2°¢ inch O. D. rectangular steel tubing, laid flat. The uprights of 15¢ inch O. D. round steel pipe are 6 inches apart from center to center. Gate fittings include double arch, hinges and automatic safety lock. STAR Steel Bull Pen may be fitted with rigid wood lined adjustable steel stanchion and STAR Self-Cleaning Lifting Manger, additional weight, 100 Ibs., or with a STAR Automatic Hay Rack, size 36x36 inches, weight, 42 lbs. Entire pen finished in gray enamel. weight per foot, 30 pounds. Average When ordering or when writing for a quota- tion, send along a rough sketch showing the measurements, as this construction is built to order. Estimates will be gladly furnished. A STAR Bull Pen Affords Comfort to the Animal and Security to the Owner Page Seventy-three HUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO; vA | a] Pa 5 (e) oO a! eof) ea] H. n ™% <. a n Page Seventy-four S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 631 Star Steel Cow Pen T the time of sickness among domestic animals proper care is often the secret of recovery, and costs nothing but a little attention and the appli- cation of good common sense in the care of the animals. There is too much risk involved in allowing cows to pass through the calving period in the old style rigid stanchions. There is the risk of losing the calf, and of injury to the mother. The tender, sensitive mother needs more careful attention at this time than at any other. She needs quarters that are clean and roomy, and where she may be quiet, comfortable, easily fed, and have plenty of light and fresh air. So the need of a good box stall or cow pen is apparent. STAR Steel Cow Pen is the acme of cleanliness, convenience and sanitation. It can be easily disinfected and placed in perfectly sanitary condition. The open style of construction does away with dead air ‘‘pockets”’ in corners, between floors and walls. STAR Steel Cow Pen is simple in construction, strong and sanitary. The top and bottom rails are made of 11-inch square steel tubing. The corner posts are of 1°¢-in. O. D. steel pipe. The upright bars are made of 11-inch O. D. steel pipe and are placed 5 inches apart on centers and are inserted into top and bottom rails. Through every fourth upright a 14-inch tie-rod connects the top and bottom rails. The top and bottom rails are thus tied at inter- vals of 20 inches; so that this construction does not depend for its strength upon the fastenings at the ends of the panel. The top and bottom rails are both free of clamps and other dust catchers. The gate openings are 3 feet 3 inches wide. The gates are constructed like other parts of the pen except that the end uprights, in addition to being connected by the regular top rail and its heavy malleable couplings, are also connected by a continuous one-piece arch. This arch gives double strength and rigidity to the gate. The gates are fitted with automatic locks which can- not possibly be opened by accident. They are swung in arches which conform to the same style of construction as STAR steel stalls. The offset hinges permit the gate to swing back flat against the panel when open. This is a convenience, as the gate will never stick out into the alley or drive. STAR Cow Pen may be fitted with an adjustable stanchion. The uprights of this stanchion are made of U-bar steel, the same as is used in the Giant stanchion illustrated on page 42. The wood core or lining com- pletely fills the U-bar. This prevents the bars of the stanchion from springing out of shape, and is quite a marked improvement over the tubular stanchions usually furnished with pens. Cow pens can be had in panels or sections of any desired length. Each panel or section is assembled at the factory. The corner posts and the legs of the gate arch are all that need to be imbedded in cement, so that installation is simple and easy. STAR Steel Cow Pen, height 5 feet, finished in gray enamel, average weight per foot, 20 lbs. Gate fittings for STAR Steel Cow Pen include double arch, hinges and automatic safety lock. STAR Steel Cow Pen may be fitted with rigid wood lined adjustable steel stanchion and STAR Self-cleaning Lifting Manger, additional weight, 100 lbs., or with a STAR Automatic Hay Rack, size 36x36 inches, weight, 42 lbs. \ i } Yn Comfortable and Contented in a STAR Steel Cow Pen Page Seventy-five (spreny ps29q yyM peddmby) NAUd AIVO THALS AVLS oE9 “SIA 0 U Q : fh fe , 3 y-six Page Seventy STAR LINE EQUIPMENT ‘No. 632 Star Steel Calf Pen VERY careful breeder, dairyman and herds- man knows that the ability and pro- ductive value of the mature cow depends largely on the treatment and care the animal gets while young. Many calves are lost each year from causes which might easily be avoided. For calves to grow successfully they must be comfortably housed in clean, sanitary sur- roundings and have plenty of fresh air and sunshine. The Star Steel Calf Pen is strong, sanitary and of few parts. It offers the least possible obstruction to light and ventilation. The top and bottom rails are of 11-inch O. D. square steel tubing. The corner posts are of 1°s-inch steel pipe. The uprights and stanchions are of 11¢-inch O. D. steel pipe set 4 inches apart. The ends of the uprights are inserted into the top and bottom rails, dispensing entirely with the use of clamps and leaving the rails absolutely smooth. Each panel or section is assembled at the factory. The corner posts and the legs of the gate arch are all that need to be em- bedded in cement. The gate is hung on offset hinges which allow it to swing back flat against the pen when open. The gate is fitted with an extra heavy spring lock. It locks automatically and cannot possibly be opened by accident. The gate opening is 3 feet 3 inches wide. ~~ Stanchions are put into calf pens, as é desired. ik By means of a continuous locking bar they can all be — opened or closed at one time; or opened and closed separately, as desired. This bar and all connections are below the top rail. Feed guards of heavy galvanized steel are so arranged that they can be raised when the manger trough is to be cleaned. These feed guards prevent the calves forming the habit of chewing or sucking each other’s ears. Star Steel Calf Pen can be made in panels or sections of any desired length, finished in gray enamel. Gate fittings for Star Steel Calf Pen include double arch, hinges and automatic safety lock. Star Stee! Calf Pen may be fitted with stan- chions spaced either 15, 20 or 25 inches apart on center. Star Steel Calf Pen, height, 3 feet 9 inches from floor; finished in gray enamel; weight, per foot, 15 lbs. Star Feed Guards for Calf Pen, finished in gray enamel; weight, each, 20 lbs. STAR Equipped Calf Barn on Wheatfield Farms Owned by J. C. Dold, Buffalo, N. Y. Page Seventy-seven sie Cos S & f- HELM -FERRYI - a "Te HUN Soutp BRANCH RANCH COMPaNy W. E, Woop, PRESIDENT Sree FORD BUILDING LANDs, DETROIT, MICHIGAN CRAWFORD COUNTY, Mich DETROIT, Micy, July 22, 1918 ey of Pe [a7 ° H be 5S fe} be Hn | Wish to take this Sccasion to | ©xpresg my Pleasure at the Tesults Of the in | Stallaty f your star Stalls, Stanchions, Pen | Squipment,, 55 V_81x Barns of the South @nch Ranoh Com y> Roscemmon , Mi higan, It ig the beg quipment in ay pinion, that ey d POSSibly instalieg d Siving €Xcellent | Tesult ery Fespect, an Pleasure in 7 oC Onmend ing highly the Stallat; @quip- = Ment to © wh contemplates arn Stallation Special] or cattl Chiong bull OW and Calf Pen Ti Contemplate extensive additions to my Principal COW barn this fall ang will Certainly use your €quipment in same, Yours very truly, WEW:E yy Page Seventy-eight STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 813 Star Steel Young-Stock Pen vision has been made for the proper housing of the young stock. STAR Steel Young-Stock Pen was designed to take care of large calves, yearlings, or even full grown cows. This pen is built the same height as STAR Steel Cow Pen. The top and bottom rails are made of 11% inch square steel tubing into which the ends of the upright bars are inserted. The upright bars are made of 114 inch O. D. steel pipe, new and tested, and are spaced 5 inches apart on centers. One-half inch tie rods extending through the uprights bind the panels together as rigidly as though they were made of one piece. It has smooth top and bottom railing, free from clamps, and is easy to clean and to keep clean. N* barn is properly equipped unless pro- Stanchions are spaced 30 inches apart on - centers, unless otherwise specified. While these stanchions are intended primarily for young stock they are plenty strong and heavy enough for full grown cows. The uprights are made of 1,3; inch by 7% inch high carbon steel U-bars attached to the top and bottom railings by malleable clamps arranged to provide for an adjustment in neck space to accommodate any size animal. The STAR Steel Young-Stock Pen is built in panels as illustrated. As it is identical with STAR Steel Cow Pen described and illustrated on the preceding pages, it is furnished made to order and can be fitted with the same double arched gates. Each panel or section is assembled at the factory. Only the corner posts and legs of the gate arch are imbedded in concrete, so the installation is simple and easy. When ordering, or writing for quotation, send along a rough sketch showing the measure- ments, the location of the gates and specify the number of stanchions required as this construc- tion is built to order. The STAR Steel Young-Stock Pen is 5 feet high. Finished in gray enamel. Average weight per foot, 20 lbs. Fig. 813 STAR STEEL YOUNG STOCK PEN Page Seventy-nine » a HUNT- HELM - FERRIS & CO- * Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co., Berkeley, Cal., Harvard, Illinois. August 1, 1918. Gentlemen: Answering your letter of July 19th, we would say that the steel panel work installed in our Hog Cholera Plant has been found very satisfactory and has been an important factor in making it the best equipped plant in the world for this work. Yours very sincerely, THE CUTTER LABORATORY, G. M. Twining. Photographs on opposite page were taken in Hog Cholera Plant of Cutter Lab ories ada, § V0 | Fasc pate ¥ lncaiteancchdaacitindncaieces Poorer Fig. 747 Fig. 726 Page Eighty STAR STEEL HOG PEN S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 726 Star Steel Hog Pen ROMINENT authorities agree that the one way in which Hog Cholera germs can be eliminated is by keeping the hog house clean and admitting plenty of sunshine and fresh air. After this equipment is once installed, it will quick- ly return its cost. In the first place, of course, it en- ables the pens to be easily and quickly cleaned. Ow- ing to the fact that it offers no obstruction to the vision of the hogs it keeps them in a more contented state. Fumigation and disinfection are really efficient in STAR Steel Hog Pens whereas in wooden structures the character of the material is such as to hold the germs and combat the purpose of the precautionary measures. On the principle that the early hog is the most profitable, hog-raisers everywhere are now beginning to devote serious attention to the question of properly housing pigs for Winter farrowing so as to prepare them for early pasturage and market. Labor costs in erecting wooden pens are extremely high. Labor costs in erecting STAR Steel Pens are very low and the difference in installation costs is one of the big arguments in favor of STAR Steel Hog Pens. The Pens are handsomely finished in the usual STAR standard gray enamel and good for a lifetime of service. The STAR Steel Hog Pens used on the Ohio State Serum Farm, Reynoldsburg, Ohio; C. S. Branting- ham’s Modern Hog Farm (Mr. Brantingham is presi- dent of Emerson-Brantingham Implement Co., at Rockford, Ill.), and many other large money making farms prove the leadership of STAR pen construction. Extra Strong—Simple Construction The STAR Steel Hog Pen is strong, sanitary and has few parts. The top and bottom rails are of 1144 inch O. D. square steel tubing. The corner posts and gate arches are of 1°¢ inch O. D. steel pipe. The up- rights are 11< inch O. D. steel pipe, regularly set 4 inches apart on center. The ends of the uprights are inserted into the top and bottom rails, eliminating entirely the use of un- sightly and unsanitary clamps and leaving the rails as smooth as a banister. STAR Hog Pens, like Star Bull, Cow and Calf Pens, represent the most sanitary as well as the strongest pen construction yet offered for the reason that there are the fewest possible places for dirt and germs to collect and because the STAR construction provides for the interlinking of all parts in the most substantial manner possible. Views taken in Hog Cholera Plant of Cutter Laboratories, Berkeley, Cal. Page Eighty-one > HUNT+- HELM - FERRIS & CO; No. 726 Star Steel Hog Pen (Continued) Every panel or section is completely assembled at the factory. The corner posts and the legs of the gate arch are all that need to be imbedded in the concrete. Note Fig. 726 showing how the Hog Pen Panel directly in front of the galvanized steel trough is hinged from the top railing and is movable. This unique construction permits feeding without the annoyance of trying to keep the hogs away or spilling the feed. Also note the STAR Pig Stop which fills up the opening left when the movable front is thrown back over the trough. This prevents the small pigs from getting out while the trough is being filled. A wrought iron hook is furnished with each trough. By inserting this hook between the uprights in the front panel, this trough can be instantly raised and locked up automatically for cleaning. See Fig. 746, page 80. Double Arch Gate and Farrowing Rail The STAR Hog Pen Gate (see Fig. 747, page 80), like all STAR gates, is hung on offset hinges, which allow itto swing back flat against the pen when opened. Every gate is fitted with an extra heavy spring lock, which locks automatically. This lock is operated by a round knob and cannot possibly be opened by acci- dent. The arched construction of the gate itself absolutely insures it against sagging. The arch over the gate, which binds the panels together, insures perfect operation of the gate and aligns it accurately. The Farrowing Rail shown in Fig. 747 prevents the sow from lying too close to the cement curb or pen panel, and affords a means of protection as well as escape for the little pigs. This Rail, which extends around the pen, is hinged from the pen uprights and during farrowing time is lowered into position. When raised, it is locked auto- matically and held in place so that it occupies no pen room. STAR Hog Pens are made up in panels or sections of any desired length. When ordering or requesting quotations, send a rough sketch with measurements. STAR Steel Hog Pens, uprights 4 inches apart on center, finished in gray enamel. Average weight per foot, 20 lbs. Light, Ventilation and Cleanliness are three BIG features in STAR Hog Pens. Page Eighty-two S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 748 Star Steel Hog Troughs Fig. 748 STAR Hog Trough, Showing! Spacing \ Bars TAR Hog Troughs are substantially built S of 20-gauge steel. After completed they are thoroughly galvanized, which process solders all joints and gives a construction which is not only water tight, but also most durable. This construction is far superior to troughs made of galvanized iron with soldered joints. The cross-pieces add rigidity to the trough and prevent the hogs from getting into the trough while eating. Each trough is furnished complete with hinges and clamps for attaching to a four-inch concrete curb. Substantial floor rests are fitted at each end of the trough to support it when in position. The rounding shape of the bottom renders it sanitary and self-cleaning when raised. This construction permits of no square corners so that it can be flushed conveniently. STAR Hog Troughs furnished in the fol- lowing lengths: 4-ft. lengths, weight, each, 40 lbs. 6-ft. lengths, weight, each, 50 lbs. 8-ft. lengths, weight, each, 60’ lbs. Modern Hog Barn Owned by C. S. Brantingham, Rockford, Ill., Designed by Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co., and Equipped with STAR Steel Hog Pen Construction Page Eighty-three > HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & CO; AR STAR STEEL CUPOLA Page Eighty-four STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Steel Cupola O matter how well a ventilation system is N laid out or constructed its value is greatly reduced when the outtake flues are not properly capped. The cupola must have a drawing capacity equal to that of the flues and must be so designed and built as to prevent down-drafts in the hardest wind that blows. The STAR Steel Cupola not only helps to ventilate the building, but adds beauty to its architecture. Its design matches any style of building. It is constructed of extra heavy, rust-proof, galvanized steel. Never requires painting, as it is much better to leave galvanized steel in its natural finish. It is braced at every place where a strain might possibly occur. The braces and stays are strong and substantial and they are galvan- ized so they won’t give out or rust out. All braces, rods, bolts and nuts being gal- vanized, will stand long and continued exposure to all kinds of weather. In the manufacture of the STAR Cupola there is a liberal use of rivets, and wherever any little touch could be added that would contribute to the strength and stability of the cupola, it has been used. No detail which might add to its strength has been omitted. Size -/e No. A No. co No. + f - No. No. 100 Star 36 in. With all its strength the STAR Cupola is not heavy. It weighs about one-fifth as much as a wooden cupola of similar size. Lightning Rod Points STAR cupolas are, upon request, provided with lightning rod points. Be sure to specify this when ordering, as the copper tube and points have to be attached at the time the cupola is built. Where lightning rod is used, the cable is run along the peak of the roof, under the cupola, to a clamp which is attached to the bottom of the copper tube inside the cupola. This makes a good connection. An extra charge is made for lightning rod point and clamp. The STAR cupola is easy to install. Any workman capable of using a hammer and wrench can put it up so it will be as strong and secure against damage from wind or weather as any other part of the best built barn. All STAR Cupolas are furnished with a 24 inch gold leaf weather vane, ornamented with the figure of a cow, horse, hog, sheep, rooster or arrow. Specify choice when ordering. Sizes of Cupolas Ventilating Base Shipping Flue *Capacity Mounting Height Weight 4 Star 20 in. 10 Cows 36x36 in. 9 ft. 160 lbs. 3 Star 24in. 15 Cows 46x46 in. Ti) ft. 180 Ibs. Westars | 27a: 18 Cows 49x49 in. MP) ve 200 Ibs. 1 Star 30 in. 22 Cows 54x54 in. 13 ft. 220 Ibs. 32 Cows 64x64 in. . 1300 Ibs. *This is actual capacity—not exaggerated. t STAR Cupolas guarantee the efficiency of the ventilation system and add to the attractiveness of the building. Page Eighty-five HUNT HELM “FERRIS & CO-s Star Junior Steel Cupola where the regular STAR Steel Cupola would be too large for the purposes. It is made of | eee designed for hen houses, hog houses, milk houses and other small farm buildings heavy galvanized steel, properly braced and reinforced, and is furnished with a 24-inch gold- leaf weather vane, ornamented with the figure of a hog, sheep, rooster, horse, cow or arrow. Don’t expect the cupo- las to accomplish the best results unless your entire Ventilation System is properly planned and built. Do not attempt to lay out a ventilation system until you are familiar with the prin- ciples clearly and thor- oughly covered in the chapter on ventilation in the Barn Plan Section of this book. Remember also that our Barn Plan Depart- ment can give you the benefit of a very wide ex- perience in solving ven- tilation problems. Page Eighty-six STAR Junior Cupolas are made in three sizes, as follows: Ventilating Base Shipping Size Flue Moulding Height Weight No. 10 20 inch 30x30 inches 8 feet 70 pounds No. 11 18 inch 27x27 inches detect 60 pounds No. 12 16 inch 24x24 inches 6 feet 50 pounds Be sure to specify pitch of roof when ordering STAR Junior Cupolas; or state width of building and length of rafters. Star Silo Cupola The STAR Silo Cupola is intended to be used on silos, but it can also be made use of in connection with any other round building. In construction, it is like the Cupola illustrated above, except that the square base is omitted. It is also furnished with a gold-leaf weather vane. STAR Silo Cupolas are furnished in sizes as shown below: Ventilating Base Shipping Size Flue Moulding Height Weight No. 16 16 inch 30x30 inches 6 feet 40 pounds No. 18 18 inch 36x36 inches 61% feet 50 pounds No. 22 22 inch 42x42 inches 7 ~~ ~©feet 60 pounds ' ¥ STAR Junior Cupola, Just the Thing for Small Buildings Fig. 722 STAR Register Face, for Use Inside the Barn STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Registers Control the Supply of Fresh Air Fig. 741 Outside View STAR Register, Closed N STAR Registers we offer a decidedly im- proved method for regulating the supply of fresh air in connection with air intakes. Ordinary registers are not suitable to use at the outer opening of fresh air intakes because they offer no convenient way of closing off the fresh air when the barn becomes too cold, unless you go outside of the barn and close each regis- ter individually. Then, too, it is not practical to regulate the supply of air by closing the inside register for the reason that this leaves the fresh air intake full of cold air with oppor- tunities for condensation and the accumulation of frost on the inner wall and over the cattle, when the intake extends to the center of the barn. These objections have been absolutely overcome inthe STAR Registers. They are oper- ated by closing the outer opening of each fresh air intake by use of the Automatic Shut-off which is illustrated at the right hand side of this page. No matter how far you may be away from each intake, at a glance you can tell whether it is open or closed. The chains regulating each shut-off hang down, indicating this instantly. Rain and snow are deflected by the automatic shut-off and kept from lodging in the fresh air intake. The illustration at the left hand side of this page shows the simple arrangement by which the chain regulating the shut-off is held. Designed solely for barn use by men who thoroughly understand every detail of barn requirements, this apparatus fills a long felt need. Star Registers and Register Faces are finished in black japan,thoroughly baked on. Star Register Face, size twelve by fourteen inches, weight, each, five pounds. Star Register with Automatic Shut-off, size twelve by fourteen inches, weight each, nine pounds, Fig. 723 Section Showing STAR Register with Automatic Shut-off Page Fighty-seven +k HUNT: HELM- FERRIS & CO- . Star Window Guards Regulate Window Ventilation : LITTLE study of the two illustrations A of STAR Galvanized Window Guards will reveal one important feature which will make you choose them in prefer- ence to all others. These guards are fitted on the side with a bolt, which has projecting prongs. These prongs enable you to lock the window open as far as desired. Rae Fig. 721 STAR Window Guards Deflect the Fresh Air to the Ceiling If you want a little air, the bolt will hold the window in such a position that you get the desired amount. If you want a lot of air, the same thing holds true. In other words, window ventilation is absolutely under your control when you are equipped with STAR Window Guards. Star Window Guards are furnished gal- vanized, weight, per set, 5 lbs. Fig. 740 STAR Window Guards Hold each Window Open any Dis- tance Desired Page Eighty-eicht S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Fig. 724 No. 724 Star Steel Bull Staff SE a STAR Steel Bull Staff and be protected against accidents ie) when handling the bull. Every good feature found in any Bull Staff, together with exclusive STAR advantages, are found in our product. The STAR Bull Staff can be operated from two places. When hook- ing the staff into the bull ring, the snap can be opened from the hook end. When releasing the staff from the bull ring, the snap on the hook can be opened from the handle end. It gives perfect control over the bull in the same manner, only more efficiently, than a Curb Bit handles a horse. A pressure of the staff against the animal’s nose or a slight turning of it, keeps him well under control at all times, no matter where you are standing. The STAR Bull Staff is 5 ft. in length. The hook and handle are constructed of very best malleable iron, while the staff itself is made of 1-inch steel pipe and is absolutely and positively indestructible. Finished in gray enamel, thoroughly baked on. The weight is 10 lbs. eae Fig. 818 The STAR Bull Staff is operated as illustrated or by the chain extending through the staff from hook to handle Page Eighty-nine x HUONT- HELM- FERRIS & CO- No. 725 Star Sanitary Milk Stool HIS is one of the little things around the barn that comes in mighty handy. It is sturdy, and secure in its foot- ing, and so durable in construction that it should last practically forever. The Star Milk Stool has a wooden seat reinforced around the edges by an electrically welded steel rim, having smooth, rolled edges. This construction absolutely cannot warp. The Star Milk Stool combines the comfort of the wooden seat with a steel construction that is sanitary and easily kept clean. The Star Milk Stool is finished in gray enamel. Weight, each, 6 lbs. Fig. 725 Star Gray Enamel Here is an enamel that will protect metal from rust and barn conditions. It is exactly the same composition that we use on STAR Equipment and has been thoroughly tested out for several years under the most trying con- ditions possible with the result that it has been found to give /asting service. It is rust-resisting and withstands ammonia and gasses found in a dairy barn. It is elastic enough to take care of the expansion and contraction of the steel on which you use it without cracking or chipping. We can positively recommend this enamel as the most satisfactory finish for protecting metal surfaces of any character around the dairy barn. Furnished in one-half pint, pint, quart and gallon cans. Weight, per gallon, 12 Ibs. No. 637 Star Manger Drain An Absolute Necessity in every Sani- tary Barn. If the mangers of the dairy barn are made of cement, they should be equipped with Star Manger Drains. Every floor that is flushed with water, should be so built that the water is carried off through a Star Drain. The body is of cast iron. Ordinary drains have iron or brass caps that rust and corrode, causing ‘them to stick. The cap of the Star Drain is made of aluminum, a metal that doesn’t corrode or rust, and is machined to make a close fitting joint. The Star Manger Drain complete, 4 inches in diameter, weighs 5!% Ibs. Page Ninety STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 831 The Star Floor Scraper ERE is a big work saver in cleaning the H barn floor. Every barn owner wants one. It’s exactly what you want in your barn. It is made with a blade of heavy high-carbon steel firmly. attached to a iong, well balanced handle. The handle socket and braces are made of the best grade of malleable iron. The STAR Floor Scraper will last twice as long as the ordinary scraper. The steel blade is reversible. After one edge has become worn down, remove the blade, tip it over, attach it to the handle and you have a new scraper. You really have two scrapers in one. Handle is varnished; blade painted black. Weight, each, 9 lbs. Furnished either 15 or 24 inches wide. You will find the STAR Scraper especially convenient for cleaning off the approach to the barn door. A might handy tool in clearing away snow in winter time. Extra blades for STAR Scrapers can be fur- nished if desired. < \ For cleaning the ae floors of your barn, you will find nothing “\ so convenient as the STAR Floor Scraper. It is especially adapted to cleaning the gut- ters, too. It is also handy for cleaning sidewalks or streets or any place UW where a scraper is \ used. Made in two sizes, 15 and 24 inches in width. Page Ninety-one “FERRIS & COs x HUNT - HELEL™M Unit System STAR Stalls and Cork Brick in Use in the Dairy Barn at the Oneida Indian School, Oneida, Wisconsin Page Ninety-two STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Cork Brick Fig. 638 O the man who has the comfort of his cows a at heart, Cork Brick offers the ideal dairy barn floor. It is warm, easy on the feet, and perfectly sanitary. It combines the good qualities of both wood and cement. Cork Brick is made of particles of cork held together by refined asphalt, and moulded into bricks four inches by nine inches by two inches thick. They are waterproof and non-absorbent. Cork Brick wears remarkably well and is easy to install. The bricks are laid one-eighth of an inch apart and the cracks thus left are filled in with Portland cement. The floor problem is a serious one. Wood is fairly warm and easy on the feet but soon gets foul and rots out, and is not sanitary at any time. Standing or lying on the cold, hard surface of concrete is so injurious to the stock that it more than offsets the easy-to-keep-clean qualities of this material. Cork Brick is the modern solution. It offers all of the following advan- tages that are essential to a successful floor: (1) Sanitary— (4) Noiseless— (2) Warm to the (5) Never slippery— touch— (6) Durable in service— (3) Easy under (7) Extremely easy to foot— install— The number of years that Cork Brick has been in use and the hundreds of installations in all parts of the country proves beyond all ques- tion its practicability. Size of Cork Brick is nine inches by four inches by two inches. The bricks are laid flat and four will cover exactly one square foot of surface. Weight of Cork Brick is 214 pounds each. Nine thousand six hundred bricks make a minimum carload of 24,000 pounds. Small lots must be crated. Samples furnished on request. Page Ninty-three 0 v i ce : y y ( ty P nl a r fas Z : I STAR HORSE STALL Automatic Hay Rack , Sanitary Feed Manger and Steel Stall Guards Fitted with STAR Stall Front inety-four ge N Pa * S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Automatic Steel Hay Rack HE old way of feeding permitted great wastes of hay, and insanitary jcon- ditions where the hay was placed in an enclosed manger or thrown upon the floor. You will never realize the quantity you have heretofore wasted until you install Automatic Steel Hay Racks. An opening and closing device on this rack permits of its being instantly locked open so that it can be quickly filled. It is then released and the front closes automatically. An even tension is maintained which permits of the animal feeding right down to the last spear of the hay without a particle being wasted. Simplicity of construction is the keynote of all STAR Equipment and this is no exception when applied to the Automatic Hay Rack. It is so simple that itis never out of order and besides is extremely durable. There are no sharp corners to injure an animal, and once installed, it is a lifetime fixture. As a result of animals scattering hay around the stall when it is fed from floor or open manger, a waste of from three to five pounds of hay a day is a very con- servative estimate. If you will take a pencil and paper and figure out what this three to five pounds per day per animal totals up at the end of the year, your own figures will be the best possible argument we can advance in favor of im- mediate installation of the Automatic Steel Hay Rack. The saving in stall room and floor space is obvious and is a big item in many crowded barns. From a sanitary standpoint, the steel construction permits of easy and effective fumigation should it be desired. Further- more, it is self-cleaning and does away entirely with the eating of trampled, dirty, unfit feed. On the opposite page we have reproduced from an actual photograph, one stall in the mod- ern horse stable of C. S. Brant- ingham, of Rockford, Illinois. This stable was designed by us and equipped throughout with Automatic Hay Racks, Sani- tary Feed Mangers, Steel Stall Guards and Stall Posts. Our Architectural Depart- ment is always ready to help you solve your barn problems. Tin x Page Ninety-five a | ' cies, i Bus ES 5 Bow acaAanan EEREEeeEEE He sect td pm As TAR HORSE STALL Page Nine 5 : : ‘ : 3 Fitted with Open Back Automatic Hay Rack, Sanitary Feed Manger and Steel Stall Guards * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Automatic Steel Hay Rack (Continued) UTOMATIC HAY RACKS are designed to meet all requirements whether A the hay be fed from the front alleyway, from the rear of the stall, or from the loft. The complete stall illustrated on page 94, shows the ideal hay rack construc- tion to be used for front alleyway feeding. The illustration opposite brings out most forcibly the practicability of the Automatic Steel Hay Rack for feeding from the rear of the stall or from the loft. The main frame work is constructed of 1 in. x 1 in. high carbon steel angles. The corners are formed rounding and are re-inforced by steel plates. The frame being also braced by angle iron cross bars and upright rods, cannot possibly be drawn out of shape. This construction is neat in appearance and sanitary and has the strength and rigidity to withstand rough usage. Every rack is fitted with two special tortion coil springs, which form the hinges upon which the rack operates. These springs are 2 5-16 inches of 3-8 inch steel and are especially adapted for use with the Automatic Steel Hay Racks illustrated. Great care is taken in tempering these springs to secure the proper tension and to eliminate all possibility of breakage. Being tested before shipment, every spring is guaranteed against defect or breakage. The locking device used on these hay racks consists of two 114 inch steel side arms operating in links at each end of a continuous piece of cold rolled shafting attached to the cross bars of the frame. These links, which work the side arms in unison, operate in a com- plete half circle, allowing the rack to be locked open for filling when below a central point and completely closed when raised. As the hay is consumed by the animal, the front moves to a closed position, keeping the hay always within reach of the animal, and when entirely closed occupies a space of but three inches. The rods through which the animal feeds are spaced 6 inches apart on center. These rods extend through the angle iron cross bars and are electrically welded at the ends so that they cannot possibly become detached. The pages which follow explain clearly how to order the construction best suited to your requirements. x ige Ninety-seven Ninety ‘FERRIS & CO HUNT: HELM Star Stall Front Used with Automatic Hay Rack ae iim Fig. 749 STAR Stall Front with Automatic Hay Rack locked open, as it appears from front feeding alley HE Star Stall Front is designed for front alleyway feeding. It fills the entire opening or stall front, fitting in neatly between the front stall posts. This construction is designed to do away with all wooden parts, as the stall front itself supports the Automatic Hay Rack and fills the entire opening with the exception of the space through which the grain is fed from the front alley. The upright rods are spaced 6 inches apart on center, so that the horse can reach the hay easily; at the same time the automatic front constantly holds the hay under pressure, keeping it within easy reach and at the same time prevents its being pulled out in bunches and wasted. The front of the rack is locked open to be filled and then released so that it occupies, even when full of hay, very little alley room. The saving in hay alone, without considering any of the other good features of this rack, will pay the initial cost of installation in six months’ time. When ordering, it is only necessary to specify the exact space in between the wooden posts to which the Star Stall Front is to be attached. The Star Stall Front with Automatic Hay Rack combined, is assembled before shipment and is nicely finished in black japan. Weight, each, complete, 110 Ibs. eight STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Automatic Steel Hay Rack (Open Back Construction) Fig. 750 STAR Automatic Steel Hay Rack, Fitted with Open Back, 30 Inches High HE Automatic Hay Rack, with open back construction, as shown in above illustration, should it be specified when it is to be attached to the walls of the barn. The upright wiring in the back of the rack is omitted so that the hay will not accumulate between the wall and the back of the rack. This construction is desirable when the hay is to be fed from the rear of the stall or from the loft. The operation of the front of the rack through which the animal feeds is the same as that described on page 98. We show below a list which comprises the various sizes of racks which we furnish in black japan, with either the 30-inch open back construction, or with the upright wiring in the back, when so specified. Height Width Weight each No. 1 Standard 36 in. 42 in. 40 lbs. No. 2 Standard 36 in. 48 in. 45 lbs. No. 3 Special 36 in. 36 in. 37 lbs. No. 4 Special 42 in. 36 in. 41 lbs. No. 5 Special 30 in. 54 in. 44 lbs. No. 6 Special ; - Bfeyrtoy, IPA Wore 74 \bs. Page Ninety-nine : HONT- HELM - FERRIS & CO. Star Sanitary Feed Mangers Fig. 755 STAR Sanitary Feed Manger (Showing Position When Tilted) heavily reinforced. Being formed without rivets and galvanized after being made up, they are water T°: Sanitary Feed Mangers illustrated on this page are constructed of 18-gauge, refined, cold rolled steel, tight and indestructible. The shape of the manger itself, all corners being rounded, makes it self-cleaning. Every manger is pivoted in a heavy one and one-half inch steel frame so that it may be completely turned over before each feeding, in this way permitting absolute riddance of dirt, sour feed, or refuse, before fresh grain is placed in it. The frame in which this manger is set may be easily attached to walls of any material by heavy lags or bolts. The back of this frame and one end is secured to the stall, while an extra heavy brace supports the unfastened end. All Sanitary Feed Mangers are equipped with cross bars which prevent the waste of feed and which act as a check on too rapid eaters. Entirely apart from the sani- tary features of this feed manger, the fact that its use means a saving of from ten to fifteen per cent of the grain fed is a strong argument in favor of its installation. Furnished, galvanized, in the following sizes: Length Width Depth Weight each 1 (oe) Lee ee 20 in. 12 in. Voie 20 Ibs. INO: 2b. 20 in. 13 in. 9 in. 22 Ibs. INOS ee el in: 2m. 7 in. 14 lbs. Fig. 756 Fig. 757 STAR Sanitary Feed Manger (Showing Cross-bars STAR Sanitary Feed Manger Can be Quickly Which Prevent Waste of Feed) Cleaned Before Filling Page One Hundred STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Steel Stall Guards I HINT Star Wrought Steel Stall Guard, with Rounded End HE Star Wrought Steel Guard illustrated above allows free circulation of air, plenty of [ies and at the same time keeps the animals apart. With this construction, the hames or other parts of the harness are not apt to catch. The uprights of one-half inch round steel are set three and one-half inches apart on center in a one and one-quarter inch by one-half inch channel steel frame. A plate is placed upon the top rail to cover the channel and prevent accumulations. Star Wrought Steel Guards, height two feet, are furnished in black Japan in the following lengths: five, six, seven, eight and nine-foot. Average weight, per foot, six lbs. HN Fig. 743 Star Wrought Steel Stall Guard, with Square End The Star Stall Guard illustrated above is suitable for use in connection with either single or box stalls. These guards are furnished two feet high, in any length desired. The uprights are of one-half inch round steel and set three and one-half inches apart on center, in one and one-quarter inch by one-half inch channel steel frames. Specify exact length desired. Finished in black Japan. Average weight, per foot, six lbs. Page One Hundred One >. HUONT- HELM -FERRIS & CO... Star Stable Fittings Star Stall Posts TAR Stall Posts are constructed of four-inch, heavy wrought steel tubing to which are attached S heavy steel channels---size, two inches by one and three-quarter inches, three-sixteenths of an inch in thickness. These channels are attached to the Stall Posts by countersunk set screws in a substantial manner. The back of each channel is rounded to conform to the rounding shape of the stall post. This gives a neat and sanitary construction. The Figure 732 Star Stall Post is used where it is not necessary to support the loft above. This post is five feet six inches over all, not including ornamental ball. Sixteen inches of this post are in- tended to extend below the floor line to provide a firm and secure anchorage in the concrete. The four-foot channel receives the four nine-foot planks of two-inch dressed lumber which form the stall partition. These planks should be connected by dowel pins to keep them in line and to pre- vent warping. The Stall Post itself is nicely finished off with a suitable cast iron ornamental ball. - Where the stall posts extend to Fig. 729 ceiling we furnish regular four-inch STAR Harness Hooks supporting columns, as illustrated and described on page 68, with either four-foot or six-foot channels at- tached as shown in Fig. 733. These channels are the same size and are attached in the same manner as Fig. 730 those furnished in connection with STAR Harness Hook to_attach our Fig. 732 Star Stall Post. to 4-inch Stall Post All Stall Posts finished in gray enamel thoroughly baked on. Fig. 732 Star Stall Post, complete as illustrated, weight each fifty pounds; four-foot channels two inches by one and three-quarter inches by three-sixteenths of an inch, weight each thirteen pounds; six-foot chan- nels two inches by one and three- quarter inches by three-sixteenths of an inch, weight, each, twenty pounds. Star Harness Hooks Fig. 733 Fig. 732 Fig. 731 STAR Stall Posts Star Harness Hooks, as illus- STAR Corner Feed Manger trated in Fig. 729, are made of cast iron, extra heavy and serviceable, nicely finished in black Japan, three sizes as follows: thirteen-inch Star Harness Hooks, weight per doz. eighty-four pounds; ten-inch Star Harness Hooks, weight, per doz., sixty pounds; eight-inch Star Harness Hooks, weight, per doz., thirty-six pounds. The Fig. 730 Star Harness Hook is built to attach to four-inch Star Stall posts by means of the malleable clamp shown. This harness hook is furnished nicely finished in gray enamel to match Stall Post. Weight, each, four pounds. Star Corner Feed Manger The Star Corner Feed Manger, shown in Fig. 731, is made of cast iron—standard size is nine inches deep by seventeen inches by seventeen inches. The front edge is neatly rolled and flanged; furnished in one size only; finish black Japan; weight, each, thirty pounds. Page One Hundred Two STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 744 The Self-Acting Oats Cleaner N every twenty-five to thirty bushels of oats you will find one bushel of dirt and other foreign matter. The Self-Acting Oats Cleaner is positively guaranteed to remove one bushel of dirt and other foreign matter from every twenty-five to thirty bushels of oats that passes through it. The above guarantee finally answers all questions as to the efficiency of this Oats Cleaner. As to its durability, judge for yourself. The material is kiln-dried white wood ‘with two protective coats of varnish and the entire job built by hand. This method of oats cleaning has made the old way of running the oats down a single set of screens obsolete. In the Self-Acting Oats Cleaner there are eleven slanting screens, operating in pairs; a table elevated in the center is located below each pair of screens, so that the oats fall from screen to table, from table to screen, and from screen to table, thus dividing the oats and giving them a very rapid impetus as they pass from each set of screens. Below the operating valve which is in the top of the cleaner, is a large, coarse grate which throws off stones, sticks and other coarse accumulations. The dirt box in the base of the cleaner and a hand hole in the bottom makes it easy to clean. Specify whether right or left hand side discharge of oats (facing the cleaner) is desired, when ordering. If special finish to correspond with the stable is desired, specify when ordering. Self-acting Oats Cleaners are furnished in the following sizes: No. 1. 6 ft. 3 in. long, 8!4 x 15 in. Capacity 14 bu. per minute. Weight, each, 65 lbs. No. 2. 6 ft. 3 in. long, 11 x 16 in. Capacity, 1 bushel per minute. Weight, each, 80 lbs. No. 3. 6 ft. 3 in. long, 12 x 16 in. Capacity 2 bushels per minute. Weight, each, 82 lbs. Fig. 744 No. 745 Star Sanitary Watering Trough Fig. 745 HE Water Trough illustrated above is made of waterproof concrete, cast in one piece and equipped with waste connections and overflow. Practically everlasting and guaranteed for ten years. In three stock sizes, specials to order. SIZE “A” STAR SANITARY WATERING TROUGH—30 in. long, 28 in. wide, 16 in. deep; weight, 400 Ibs. SIZE “B” STAR SANITARY WATERING TROUGH—44 in. long, 28 in. wide, 16 in. deep; weight, 500 Ibs. SIZE “C” STAR SANITARY WATERING TROUGH—32 in. long, 28 in. wide, 26 in. deep; weight, 600 Ibs. Page One Hundred Three > 4 HUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO- >< Directions for Ordering Star Steel Stalls and Stanchions, Pens and Accessories RACTICALLY all we need to know to supply your needs is the style of stalls you have decided upon, how wide they are to be, 3 feet, 3 feet 3 inches, or 3 feet 6 inches, or any other desired width, and the number you want. However, in making up your orders, it is well to observe the following general rules and thereby avoid the possibility of unnecessary correspondence and delay. 1. Specify number of stalls wanted and tell how many rows there will be. An extra partition will be needed at the end of each row of stalls. 2. Specify the style of stall wanted, stating whether to be used with or without steel supporting columns. 3. If steel supporting columns are ordered with stalls, be sure to specify the length over all, including thickness of caps and bases, also the outside diameter of the columns wanted. If stalls are to be placed in line with, or between, either wooden or steel supporting columns, specify the exact distance between the col- umns from center to center and the exact size of the columns. 4. Specify width of stalls (3 feet; 3 feet 3 inches; 3 feet 6 inches.) 5. If stanchions are ordered separately specify whether these are to be hung single chain top and bottom, swivel top and bottom, or whether they are to be fastened with swivel at top and double chain at bottom. In ordering pens, the essential thing is to measure accurately the length of each section or panel and to specify the position of gates, stanchions, mangers and racks. Where the arrangement of the barn has already been decided upon, it is a simple matter to figure out according to the above what equipment is necessary. But if there are any special conditions to be met, or if any suggestions relative to the arrangement of the barn are desired, just write us, enclosing a rough sketch of the barn. Your sketch will be redrawn to scale and a blue print sent to you, in order that you may check up the blue print with the actual conditions, so that there can be no possible misunderstanding on our part in filling your order. Page One Hundred Four STAR LINE oe TT aS 4 SR Raa Pah 5 Photographs taken in one of the STAR Test Barns. Note how STAR Alignment Page One Hundred Five Device keeps every cow in line at the gutter. > am aee UNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO; * STAR Equipped Dairy Barn at the Famous Meadow Bro Page One Hundred! Six L. H. Turner, Pittsburgh, P >. 4 STAR LINE EQUIPMENT — n, Leavittsburg, Ohio, Where Certified Milk is Produced. er; R. H. Turner, Manager Page One Hundred Seven Aas sa SSAA ROS : “a8 laueeaneheassadinatecconeen ORR ANNETTE IR: > * = ‘3 apnea nena get anne Ss STAR Equipped Dairy Buildings, Wabeek Farms, Pont Page One Hundred Eight STAR LINE EQUIPMENT 4 = — ~ 7 i »~ a : me = ‘ . : gow Pens ai a ae i — as Selina) nigan. Owner, James Couzens, Mayor of Detroit, Michigan Page One Hundred Nine 0 lu q : ft re A i. . ra 5 " : Z 5 " _sureq ut }dex a19M SMOD ddUIS JUSUWAZUBIIe JAISUD}x9 JsOUI ay, “Idng ‘uMUIeEg "HT “JIA JO Sprom dU} Ut ‘St ‘Q0'000‘OST$ J2A0 BuTSOD ‘uesIyNI] ‘SOVUOg ‘Weg yeeqeM “Burping Aseq peddinby AVLS ay Page One Hundred Ten : ; 2, : e 0 ; ; f : 4 A : , ayeqg oysfurtysourg ay} Jo aug “sty ‘Ayepng “OD sisyjo1g Ayepng jo useg Aneq peddmby yWLs Hundred Eleven e One age P che HUNT +: HELM -FERRIS & CO? - Page STAR Equipment Barn, at Rhinebeck, N. Y., owned by Vincent Astor \ \ \ AK WH One Hundred Twelve STAR _ LINE EQUIPMENT STAR Equipped Pen Department, Barn of O. C. Barber, Barberton, Ohio, Equipped with 150 Individual STAR Pens Page One Hundred Thirteen STAR Equipped Barn o Page One Hundred Fourteen STAR LINE EQUIPMENT a ward V. Barnes, New Canaan, Conn. Page One Hundred Fifteen “FERRIS & CO- HELM > 4 HUNT Page One Hundred Sixteen S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT wopeerg Jo Ajustg Ploy SIleIS AVLS Me seen Page One Hundred Seventeen | a Witt it Nun Nw : \\ —= Page One Hundred Eighteen Nine age One Hundred Pp : Z i P ft J 0 a i : : te A [ 0 arn on Espanore Farm, at Lansing,‘ Michigan. oo ‘snqumjod reau ‘wie AT uonnysuy a}e1g oro uo ureg poddinby MV) s aR ie Me I tet IS oe Won 0 U Q : Y fe 5 a P J 3 ep : Z. , Ap STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Interior of one of the STAR Experimental Barns Page One Hundred Twenty-one ‘A N ‘UMojsisdoo5 ‘93e3sq yIe[D uo ureg Jusudmby” yy Ls venty susq 80H 1993S AVLS 43M paddinba Ajajajduiog = ‘erusoyeD ‘AajaxJOg ‘sal1OJeIOGeT 19}34ND IY} JO ‘p ‘ON asnoP BoP 19d AZ 3 One Hundred Twenty-three or a a ge ee Te STN errs tt r : Z , P 1 J 0 , ; t i ih q : , mn ences, eomennte! St) POLL os x SHUNT HEC FERRIS = coe cases Brookday, z , ery VERY CHOICE RIESIAN CATTLE HOLSTEIN F Jamary 5th, 1917+ ALTA, tht Forris & Co-s Hunt, Belz, Harvard, Ili. Gentlemen:- In looking over vario us barn equipments, I came across & s made by your firm which the owner nad {netalled half dozen stall essed with the outfit the t I came home jimself. 1 was 50 well impr a full equipment for my barn at Brookdale StocK Farme and ordered to say that iti a entirely satisfac- after a seasons use, Se- tory, end thet 1 am well plessed with it i8 patring it mildly. yveral who have seen this equipment have expressed themselves in ures therein contained rather than r of the many excellent feat ich they bad installed. favo some other make wh uocess the merit of your goods deserves Wishing you the 8 1 am yours very truly» Mo @ poeTeR, Boi THE © UTTER LABORATORY / ANTITO i oe { ROMERO Ee oomromar=D re BACTERIAL VACCE SFOGENOUs VACCINES. » BIOLOGICS x, SSS LOCIC® EXOLUMIVELY U. m GOVmENeEEeT noe NN 1OENeE BerRsete x LEB 12, 1918 Dt unt, Helm, Ferris & Co “> Harvard, lllinois Gentlemen: - 4nswerin, cour letter of Jul 19th we would iB your y Say that the steel panel work installed in our hog Olera as =) Ound va satisfac Chi Plant h been fi d ry far ry ti to and has been &n important factor in making it the best equipped P. lant in the world for this work, p. rk. You rs very sincerely, 7) =, _THE CUTTER LABORATORY Page One Hundred Twenty-four STAR LINE EQUIPMENT SEO. R, Love SUPEN INT EN Dewy Anke, O, »~8spectar. and gladly Yours Very truly SPOOR Superintendent, eisialslere tine aie JEP /eg mo “Sg.& OP rm Sbhe ri Grenegaeairate Ss CBO OOO He STAR Equipped Dairy Barn at Toledo State Hospital, Toledo, Ohio Page One Hundred Twenty-five i ee x HUNT- HELM- FERRIS & COs - - = oe = - “asad Dr y¢ ret it { @he v wee ‘ Tes Vouphton, c D.D. AITKEN. 4ke a fun ioe ae Ving Repth LCOLM i. GARDNER, Sven pexr ore Apvaxrcep R = wigs ‘ i TREAGY Wo A. MALT TE SON, Cnauanan or Eascutive Comorrren Yin. Ui: November 25, 1914. BRATTLEBOR Hunt, Helm & Ferris, Harvard, Ill. Centlemen: -- Your inquiry as to our experience with the Star Equipment in our dairy buildings, permit me to say that everything connected with the equipment is eminently satisfactory. Your representative here- The George W. Hubbard Hardware Company- has had general charge of the installation and the equipment has been installed in accordance with the blue prints and is giving perfect satisfaction. There is something about this pipe stall equipment that is very pleasing in the care of animals, as it does away entirely with all dead air near the floor that is sure to remain where you use wood parti- tions or anything that interferes with the circulation near the floor. I am about to install during the early spring, a calf barn equipment and expect to use the Star Tubular equipment. Very truly yours, Oe go Me, Ss % Page One Hundred Twenty-six STAR LINE EQUIPMENT RAYMOND L. PIKE. MANAGER HERBERT A. BROWN, SUFERINTENOENT “ PRODUCTION pW EAR RM our WATCHWORD “ = FREG/STERED y SE ae CATTLE BERKSHIRE SWINE GENEVA, O70. August 8, 1916, Hunt-Helm-Ferris & Co., Harvard, Ill. Gentlemen: - We are enclosing herewith several views of our new sixty cow barn that your architects planned for us, and we wish to take this opportunity to thank you for all your favors and also to tell you that we think the "Star" barn equipment is about the "best ever", As you know, about two years ago we purchased equipment for thirty cows when we were remodeling our old barn, and liked it well enough that when we were ready to place our order for the sixty cow equipment we considered no other. In addition to this will say that, as soon as we are financially able, we want to build a twelve box stall barn and it will be equipped with "Star" fixtures. If our "good word" can ever be of any help to you, do not hesi- tate to ask for it, for we feel very pleased with our treatment by your firm and want to pass our good luck to our brother breeders. Very truly yours, F VIEW FARM. ee ol ina and Manager. Page One Hundred Twenty-sev« 1 > a HUOUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO; _ IVit ® ee ET oe ; APOUCEL SPUOCK FAL the orm that multe the farmer bev: $ | fe \ "The Home of the Reed Breauties** Riigines more milk than all the rest; itl sr | ae H THEO. THORMODSON, Peep. | vr 7 ' " H jet D ‘ 3 RED route CATTLESS ; Ss \ : (D CHESTER Wh het > Ben >, telq F, Entire Herd 7 “Phone o arm. ¢ & rit . Mn ect, Ms yore 2 arre® A ht es, "Son Deg 7c thts vie a0 96 x ape x FRIESTAT aoe He sag, AEF Co post °° Stem, Pany pEHS oF ska, Brown Co, 2 4h own fans? 4 | 0B AR, Espanore Farm Nig BREEDERS OF HOLSTEIN-FRIESIAN CATTLE Lansing: Mach Ber. 10, oe we — Sore Eunt, Helm, Ferris & Co., ‘a oe Ee es Harvard, Ill. “A Nf a Gentlemen: wh = 11 a * L4H; ~ We are in receipt of your favor of Feb. 7th., and 4 & uy ron fe) &, Ra os thank you for your kind words about the Espanore booklet. It u, thy. tier Sg LAB) ‘ et we “Bp, fe Ue pve cu ve was our first attempt at advertising. Rep OF Rr, Ss w wr '? , we We will take this opportunity to say that we are 40x. PA tf aes very well pleased with cur Star Barn Equipment. Eefore build- SS SG 25 hs hey > ing our certified barn the writer visited many of the certified eS “oO milk plants and after looking thoroughly into the matter of a > QR . mf equipment decided on the Star. In the nine months this barn ee <9, has been in use, we have not had to buy'a single repair. We SZ think we are producing as pure a milk aa is produced in the Oo i country. Only twice has our count been over 500 bacteria per cc and never over 3,000. Several times it has beer down to 100 and once was without growth. The construction of the barn, the barn equipment, method of milking and care of milk, all contribute their share to the production of such milk. Yours very truly, Espanore Farm, By. hckz ley Bros, acapees OF A.J. C.€. JERSEY CATTLE Page One Hundred Twenty-eight S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT pioneet Stock Farm The Heme of the Red Beco , ees 4 =, THEO. THORMODSON, Prep Ro oRAvE: DAiRy Ons | { I am very moh pleased with the STAR line equipment. | : : 5 thy, 2 | : : Wishing you great Success, I an, Yours truly, sae & Vand aley SBros., parerers OF 3 A.3.C.C- JERSEY CATTLE NIT DAIRY FARM. WS Page One Hundred Twenty-nine OD s PL @) HELM FERRIS 'T e > 4 HUN ; Tt om ia ia GIN uy 7h reg a ae Far BASE Wen one Cour BARRINGTON, Ty January 14, 1918 Hunt-Helm-Ferrig & Company, Harvard, Tllinoig, Gentlemen, I can y that the €quipment after three years has Proved very B4tisfactoy in every manner ang has been the Sub ject Of a grea man Compliments i it Very truly yours, DK BAL 7 be is Ue abibanae a ty i One JHundred Thirty as ner x sty eee: Mecorercreraonrenreepetncen ¥ et ae ano how to Butlo Them ie HUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO HUNT+> HELM - FERRIS & CO. afternoon sun. The barn so arranged will be warmer. Also plenty of sunlight will help to produce proper sanitation. Consideration should also be given to the position of the other necessary buildings. The location of the silos, the hog house, the granary, the pump house, dairy and tool house, with respect to the barn is very important. All the farm buildings should be located conveniently with respect to each other, and having in mind their appearance as well. The appearance of the barn and adjacent buildings will add to or detract greatly from the value of the farm. A Dairyman is judged largely by his barn. The Size Be sure your barn is big enough. It is much more expensive to add to the barn than to make it large enough in the beginning. In determining the size, provide storage rocm to accommodate a bumper crop. Make it large enough to hold all the cattle your farm can profitably maintain. Experience has shown that the best barns are wide enough to accom- modate two rows of cattle running lengthwise- This type affords better ventilation and each row of cattle gets full benefit of the sunlight. Preference is generally given to a rectangular barn 36 feet wide. This allows for spacious feed alleys, stalls and gutters, and provides for a driveway through the barn, if desired. Stalls are regularly made in the follow- ing sizes: 3 ft.; 3 ft. 3 in., and 3 ft. 6 in. The 3 ft. 6 in. stall gives ample room for any size animal. This is the preferred size as it is important to give each cow plenty of room. While a one-story barn may be built as an ell or wing to the barn in which the fodder is kept, it is usually more economical to have the Dairy Barn two stories high, providing hay and feed room directly over the cattle. The basement is warmer where there is a loft overhead. The floor of the loft should be of STAR Equipped Barn, Owned by John Mason, Elgin, III. Page One Hundred Thirty-four S TAR LINE double thickness, with heavy paper between. This prevents dust from sifting through. The same purpose can also be accomplished by seal- ing below the joists. Another important advantage in a two- story barn is convenience in handling hay and Chutes can be constructed above feed-ways, greatly increasing convenience in feeding. The chutes are closed when not in use. in feeding. The grinding room and grain bins can also be located on the mow floor and the grain spouted to feed room below. Placed in the mow the bins are readily accessible for filling and feeding and do not utilize the more valuable ground floor space.’ most cases, saves the dairyman the expense of building a separate granary. The two-story barn, in The Design There are various ideas with reference to the design of the barn. A type which will meet requirements in one locality or state may not in any way be adapted to another locality or state due to varying climatic conditions possibly, or else due to vari- One farmer may have to consider his pocket book more than another. One farmer may be doing a different kind of dairying than another, or the materials obtainable in one locality may vary essentially from those obtain- able in another. ation in the purpose. Then, of course, the number of acres tilled and the corresponding amount of fodder raised, also the number of cattle to be housed and the corresponding extensiveness of the project, must all be taken into consideration. EQUIPMENT What is the most important thing about a barn? Everything! No detail should be neglected. But the place where the biggest waste is most likely to appear is in the arrangement of the floor. To-day a great deal more thought is given to the arrangement of the farm and dairy barn than was formerly considered necessary. The modern barn plan calls for an arrangement which will provide for the many devices intended to reduce labor and of the livestock. Walks, alleys and doors must be laid out in relation to the carrier system and the other farm buildings. improve living conditions Supposing a little change in the plan would save you fifty steps three times a day. That would figure to over ten miles a year. Ten miles isn’t much of a walk, but many barns have a dozen or even more ten mile walks built right into them. Think that over. careful thinking about the floor arrangement. Then do some STAR Equipped Barn, at Homeopathic State Hospital, Allentown, Pa. In this book, we have aimed to show a variety in design that will adapt itself to all the varying conditions enum- erated above. On the barn, Mr. Percy Fensternacher, a recognized authority in State of Pennsylvania, acted as purchasing agent for trustees. After carefully considering all lines, the order was placed with Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co. for full equipment, including STAR Harvester Hay Tools, and STAR Door Hangers. Page One Hundred Thirty-five * HONT- HELM- FERRIS & COs The Floor Plan OME advocate facing the cows in, S others advocate facing them out. Both methods of arrangement have supporters—men of judgment and prom- inence in the Dairy World. Usually a prospective builder has made his decision relative to this matter before other details have been considered. We’ve endeavored to present the arguments here with pro and con for the two arrangements. This is a sub- ject on which we’re neutral. We can see distinct advantages in both—com- pensations in one that are offset by compensations in the other. This leaves but little choice. Where Cows Face In This arrangement of the barn has a number of advantages. You can take the feed all down a center alley and dis- tribute it right and left as you go along. It centralizes the work of feeding. Then the herd is divided so you don’t have all the cows trying to crowd through one door at the same time. The out-take chutes for ventilation are located at the sides of the barn where they are out of the way, and do not occupy space which could well be used for other purposes. Sunlight strikes the gutters directly and they get the full value of its dis- infecting properties. It gives you light behind the cows when milking in the morning and at night. Another advantage of this arrange- ment is that some prefer to see all the herd from either end of the feed alley. FOUL AIR venT | : (FOUL AIR VENT : = STAR Litt eel = FOUL AIR VENT -GROU Page One Hundred Thirty-six KARRI iy Te IR TT rami IRIE GIiSyT & a t Pin a a @L@) >) PeeesIR He eas’ {it Be as BOOM? Wy = i 4 M KGER "BIvT ST} IGN's FOUL AIR VENT a EV AG es S TAR LINE Where Cows Face Out Advocates of facing the cows out, call attention to the fact that while it may be well to do your feeding from one alley, you nevertheless do three- fourths of the work behind the cows. Cleaning and milking take more time than feeding. They claim that the cows breathe better air when they face out than when they face in. That it’s more important to have the disinfecting action of the sunlight applied to the manger where the cow is fed than to the gutter. That you’ve got to build long in- take chutes for ventilation if your cows face in. That you’ve got to divide your herd to get it into the barn and if you EQUIPMENT get a cow on the wrong side of the barn, it causes confusion. Where cows face out the supporting posts for hay loft floor can be placed where they will in no way interfere with the arrangement of the stalls. Then the appearance of both herd and barn is better where cows face out. Cows are always sized up from behind. Where they face out, the whole herd is seen at one time. Furthermore, there never was a barn built, where the cows faced the center, that was wide enough to prevent the walls becoming spattered with manure. this. It keeps all the manure along one Facing the cows out prevents alley and the gasses and fumes are more easily disposed of when they are in one place. F EEDING MANGER DIVISIONS ENSILAGE “} ROOM rel ; INGRED “ qRE EE af mya THR Bowls lage a oa u) tale [TAR SIs, 4 a p44 LNs ie O43 Gar: G+3'6-+ 3-G 3:6'tt-5:0" A 2—DRAIN = GUTTER = com WATER Bow) T DIRIVEWAY ie [lai AEX SWINGING BOOM? ISTAR LITTER CARRIER TRACK __ GUTTER ieee a STEEL COLS— D*6+-3: 64-3: G- SE WAT tp B ORns EE MANGER Division ALLEY aes = —FRESH AIR = = INLETS~ GROUND - FLOOR: PLAN: Page One Hundred Thirty-seven HUNT: HELM “FERRIS & CO->, Construction Details The Foundation The foundation of a barn should be built with the same care as that of any other building. The bottom of the foundation wall should be at least six inches below the frost line. It should go down to hard pan to minimize set- tling of the building. The base or footing should be at least two feet wide for a two-story structure. It should be made of concrete, 10 or 12 in. thick. The Wall The foundation wall should be carried high enough so that the sills are protected from rotting. We recommend that the wall be run up as high as the bottom of the windows and that it, as well as the ground floor, should be made of concrete. For a simple, solid wall of concrete, forms are made of matched sheathing with the smooth side in. These are supported by 2 in. x 4 in. studs set 24 in. apart on center. A section of wall 3 or 4 ft. high can be made at one time, but the greatest care should be used to see that the forms ‘are absolutely plumb and thoroughly braced. Bolts about 7¢ in. x 16 in. should be inserted in the top of the wall at intervals of 6 ft. The threaded : ends should stick up about 6 in. above the wall. These are used to anchor the sills. The Windows Have plenty of windows and SASH STOP. 4" SASH 4x\3ie" SCREEN & thereby assure an abundance of ORM ST FoR Out: 8xi4" sunlight. A dark cow barn is unhealthful. Sunshine is life giving. It is Nature’s greatest disinfectant. In determining the number and size of windows to be used in the Dairy Barn, allow at least 4 square feet of glass for each cow. The windows should be evenly distributed and where they are exposed directly to the bleak north wind, storm sash should be used. The inside of the barn should be arranged so as to obstruct the light as little as possible. We recom- mend the use of single sash A Le Pel MIB" DARN windows, as they can be opened inwardly at the top and the air as it enters is diverted to WINDOW if ee Sie \Aliety \ m1 He STAR VENTILATING SHIELDS \ Page One Hundred Thirty-eight the ceiling, thereby preventing drafts. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT The Floor S stated before, we recommend the A use of concrete for stable floors. Wood floors are no longer used because they soon wear out and quickly become insanitary. There are two methods of construc- tion. In the old method, a concrete sub-base is first laid, about 5 in. thick, and this is covered with a finish coat about 1 in. thick. The other method is known as a one-course construction. The concrete is made richer in cement and wetter in consistency. To obtain a smooth finish, the coarse material is crowded down by means of a wooden float and the finer material is thus brought to the surface. The concrete is 6 in. thick and is = \WareR Suppry Pipe STAR SANITARY WaTER Bow__L A 7 UI mixed in the proportion of one part cement, two parts sand and three parts gravel. Enough water is added to make it of a quaky consistency so that when struck with a straight edge a small amount of water will appear on the surface. A floor laid according to this method will not wear slippery. To get the best results, freshly laid concrete should be protected from ex- tremes of temperature. A wet straw covering during the hot weather prevents a too rapid hardening, but it should not be put on until the surface of the work has set somewhat. In freezing weather, fresh concrete should be covered with straw just after LENGTH OF Cow Dep To Sur Cows REQUIREMENTS | Gurr ER ] | ie | Anaya Sian ota) STAR CURB CLAMP WEF Cork Brick Floor LITTER a ee PASE ae cae ALLEY Page One Hundred Thirty-nine HUNT: HELM + FERRIS & CO->s - 30-0 -————— 10° G' 9-0" 10" G' met ) STEEN (GOs = Vo CONCRETE PIERS 4 DARN ce oF WIDE: Cows FACING QUT 32-0! - {{'-O" + 10'- O ; 11- O" + Bip 11-6" i) |] °= CG bat r e 5 BARN 36 FT WIDE: COWS FACING OUT Page One Hundred Forty STAR LINE EQUIPMENT _ >< oa pas ! a | cs ES Se the = ee SZ oss QCONCRETE DIERS y= / J) DARN 30 FT WIDE:COws FACING IN {+ G Hi @p 11" G fo . = At » = yi acer ROR Pe abe: cent I, — Geary Miter Reet BR Deer eae =a VV=4 yj HES UW Vy hf — J Hi = Z TE Y Z = i= Tl We, pz SVE = DARN 34 FT WIDE:COWS FACING IN 36" O 7 2-50! Zio} li Page One Hundred Forty-one * Page One I ; HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & COs dy it begins to set and this covering should be left on for at least thirty-six hours. Some objection has been raised to concrete floors on account of their being too cold in severe weather for cows to stand or lie upon. This objection may be overcome by covering the stall floor with Cork Brick, set in the concrete, which provides a surface as impervious to water and as easy to keep clean as the concrete itself. Floor Level It is important to get the right floor level. The dirt should be levelled off, cutting it down where too high, and filling in where too low, wetting and tamping until a hard surface is obtained. It should be noted that the cleaning, or litter alley floor, both where the cows face in and out, is on a level with the top of the door sill, or 6 in. above grade. The established ground floor level will, therefore, be 6 in. below the door sill if the floor is 6 in. in thickness. Drainage Grades The litter and cleaning alleys should have a slight pitch toward the gutter. Where a high feed alley floor is used the floor should pitch toward the manger. There should also be a certain amount of slope in the length of manger and gutter. These pitches in most cases being slight, the variation in grade can be made in the level of the dirt floor or by varying the thickness of the concrete floor. {undred Forty-two After the levels have been estab- lished, the drain tile can be laid and the drains and traps set at correct heights. The main floor level having thus been determined, the levels of the gutter floor, stall bed, manger and feeding floor can be easily obtained, being in- dicated by the use of sticks or by mark- ing the walls. By referring to pages 140 and 141, showing sectional diagrams of dairy floors, the various arrangements, mea- surements, and levels may be noted. Curb The curb is the first part of the floor to be built. Make it 6 in. high above the cow platform, and 6 in. wide. If STAR Curb Clamps are not used, the stalls should be assembled, set up, and plumbed true and straight in the curb form before the curb is poured. Cow Bed After the manger, the cow bed or platform is put in. This should be about 4 ft. 6 in. long for Jerseys, Guernseys and Ayershires. A platform 4 ft. 8 in. to 4 ft. 10 in. is recommended for Holsteins and Dur- hams. Twenty inches back from the curb, an elevation of %4 in. should be put in to hold the bedding in place and pro- vide a foothold for the cow when rising. From this point, the cow bed should slope toward the gutter gradually 14 S TAR LINE in. to the foot. This provides for drainage and permits the cow to stand with front and hind feet on the same level. The surface of the cow bed should be brushed with a broom before drying, inorder to give the animals a safe footing. The level of the cow bed should be 3 in. above the level of the litter alley. Manger The manger is constructed next. There are two types of mangers, as shown by the illustrations on this page. Each type has its advantages. The manger at the right is brought up to the level of the feed alley—where there is plenty of room between the feed alley and the ceiling. A manger of this type is often desirable for the reason that it is convenient to push the fodder back into the manger. The manger shown at the left of the page is brought up higher than the feed alley. The advantage of this construction FORMS TMA R SONCRET; PIRED, coMZITONs, TROUGH INDICAT KEEP THIS LINE LEVEL A INCA Line? Widen T Ou Wie EQUIPMENT is principally that the alleyways through- out the barn are all on a level. There are no inclines to overcome. A Ss WIDE TED OSH Is We consider that both construc- tions are practical and these construc- tions represent the two most popular types of mangers now being built. Wooden forms, or templets, are fur- nished for forming either manger illus- trated. The manger should be 28 in. to 30 in. wide and should have a proper slope to drain. This width is needed so that the feed will not be scattered and wasted. When the cow eats, she takes a mouthful and extends her nose straight out in front. The distance from the stanchion to the end of the nose is from two to two and one-half feet. Therefore, manger wide enough to catch the scat- tered feed is neces- sary. a 7E TS WITH TOP OF CEMENT CURB The sloping con- crete manger keeps Pye the feed _ within reach at all times. Page One Hundred Forty-three This is an important point, for when cows reach too far they are liable to slip, thus causing big knees, various sprains and bruises. The surface of the manger should be finished with a steel trowel and made as smooth as possible. Gutter The gutter should be 8 in. to 10 in. deep on the side of the cow bed, and 16 in. to 20 in. wide. Constructed in this manner, the gutter is wide and deep enough to accommodate the manure and keep the cows clean. On the side of the alleyway, the gutter should be about 3 in. to 5 in. deep so the cow can easily back out of the stall. The bottom of the gutter should have a pitch of 14 in. from the stall side to the alley side so that the liquids will run to the back of the gutter. It should be trowel-finished in order that it may be easily cleaned. It should be sloped to a drain so that it can be flushed when necessary. Feed Alley and Cleaning Alley The balance of the floor is devoted to the feeding alleys and the cleaning alleys. The width of the feeding alley and the level above the ground floor will be determined by the type of manger used. The proper height of the feed alley floor, where the floor is brought to the level of the top of the manger, is shown by the illustration at the top of page 143. The bottom of the manger and cow Page One Hundred Forty-four * HUNT- HEL™M- FERRIS & CO. . ( bed are on a level. The feed’ alley is; therefore, equally high above both. The amount of room left is devoted to the cleaning alley, which should be brushed with a broom before the concrete has set in order to give it a rough finish. The importance of making the barn wide enough will be seen at once be- cause anything taken from the width comes out of the alleys and a narrow alley is an inconvenient place in which to work. The Drains Every part of the concrete floor, as well as mangers and gutters, should be provided with a means of drainage so that they can be flushed with water and thoroughly drained. Care should be taken, however, that the walks and alleys are nearly level so that there will be no danger of the cow slipping. Posts or Columns In planning the inside arrangement of the barn, one of the most important matters to consider is the arrangement of the posts or columns. These should be located in the curb between the stalls and in line with them where the cows face in, and they should be placed back of the stall partitions where the cows face out. Steel columns are preferable to wood posts because they occupy less space, are stronger and are more durable— also, because they offer less obstruction to the light and are not subject to decay. They are more sanitary. * S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT The Star Trussed Roof Barn timbers are scarce and consequently ex- HE plank frame construction has taken the place of the old style timber frame construction for the following reasons: 1. It is stronger. Jae Lt) is cheaper: Sa lieismeasicn sto) build: 4. It provides more loft room. The timber frame construction de- pends for its strength on careful work in making the joints and on the heft of material used. A timber frame is no stronger than its weakest tenon. The plank frame is heavily braced. It is made up of several trusses. These trusses are placed at intervals length- wise of the barn ranging from 10 to 14 ft. apart, depending on the height of the building. The plank frame is so trussed and knit together that the strength of every fiber is brought into use. Heavy pensive. In the plank frame construc- tion, nothing heavier than 2 in. planks are used. In erecting a plank frame barn, no scaffolding is required. When the first truss is completed, it serves as a pattern for the others which are made exactly like it. -It is an easy matter to erect the trusses, this being accomplished either with a small gang of men or a horse and tackle. The plank frame construction makes easy the putting away of the hay in the mow with the hay carrier as there are no-crossed beams or heavy supporting timbers in the way. Therefore, requires less help to put away the hay and it can be done in much less time—which is an important factor in hay making. This construction also provides for much more storage space in the loft. x Page One Hundred Forty-five kK HUNT HELM-FERRIS & CO => | —— se ed ES Il /// | = IN ST RO ie ‘ —- f VIEW | Sater paper ce STAR TRUSSED ROOF BARN PLANK FRAME CONSTRUCTION Page One Hundred Forty-six S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT 2x4: [EDGER g xe 2-210" PURLIN BLOCKED APART 24! RaFTER ENDS 2x6" GIRTS VERTICAL Siping 210 RIDGE BOARD ZS UPPER RAFTERS So ee The Typical Truss HE illustration on this page shows a STAR Plank Truss. This truss is continuous from foundation to ridge. The construc- tion is not broken at the mow level and it is therefore stronger and gives a better anchorage to the lower part of the barn frame. Stresses are carried directly to the foundation wall. The 2 in. x 8 in. studs are continuous from sill to plate. A three member truss chord ties the trusses together at the mow floor level. The purlin post built up of 2 in. x 10 in. planks is thoroughly braced, securely bolted and spiked to the truss chord at the mow floor level. The purlins consist of two 2 in. x 10 in., blocked apart and run the full length of barn. A 2 in. x 4 in. ledger is added forming a seat for the upper run of rafters. The truss principal extends from below the plate to the ridge. Two 2 in. x 6 in. struts run from purlin to truss principal. Purlin is braced to truss principal by 45 degree angle braces. The ridge is 2 in. x 10 in. A 2 in. x 8 in. collar beam ties the trusses together at the ridge and supports the hay track. The most convenient way is to cut lumber for all the trusses, so that all cuts will be uniform and then build and erect the trusses one at a time. The foot of the truss is blocked at the sill, and raised with block and tackle used in connection with a gin pole. After the first two trusses are raised the two upper plates, and the two lower plates are put in. Then the side framing, including the girts around the building, are installed (side framing shown in detail on page 150). When all the trusses are up and braced as shown by the details on the following pages, the two purlins are hoisted to position by block and tackle, and the ridge pole is added. The rafters, look-outs, and rafter ends are the finishing touches to the frame. 2KIZ JOISTS | = 2? TCH? TRUN 12 RISE WxA FR MOW FLOOR FLOOR LINE. Page One Hundred Forty-seven > HUNT- HELM- FERRIS & CO. x Detail of Construction at Foot of Truss HE illustration on this page shows in detail the construction at the foot of the truss, including the sill and the lower plate. AY ZXOy OMADS CONTINUOUS FROM | SILL To ToP PLATE — SS -2°X6" WINDOW CRIPPLES AncHor bout Le (GEE SUL Detail of iz Construction at Foot of Truss To 8. a al Z2'x10" PURLIN POST 2-2" 6" DLATE SPIKED 2) HeTWEEN MAIN STDs ‘DETAIL OF JOINTS >t FOOT SF TRUSS: This drawing shows particularly well the continuous studs running from sill to plate, instead of starting at the second floor. The strength of this con- struction is easily seen. The sill, built up of _ two 2 in. x 8 in., with joints broken and lapped _at the corners, is anchored to the foundation wall by bolts embedded in the concrete for that purpose. Upon this sill the trusses, as described on the preced- ing page, are raised.. The lower plate is made of two! 2) ine x Sins sandens spiked and placed between the continuous studs. It is supported by 2 in. x 8 in. cripple studs, which are spaced according tothe windows tobeused. Diagonal braces are placed as shown in the illustration to support the ends of the lower plate. On the lower plate the floor joists rest. The truss chord connecting one truss with the opposite truss is clearly indicated in the drawing. The purlin post is bolted to the truss chord. Details of Construction at Top Plate S illustrated on opposite page, a built-up plate constructed of two 2 in. x 8 in. rests upon the 2 in. x 8 in. continuous studs. This plate runs around the entire building. All corners are well lapped and joints bro- ken. The lower end of the 2 in. x 12 in. which forms the truss principal is bolted and spiked between the two 2 in. x 8 in. studs, directly beneath the plate. yne Hundred Forty-eight The truss principal is also bolted and spiked where it crosses between the two 2 in. x 10 in. which make up the purlin post. Horizontal braces and single pieces of 2 in. x 8 in. are spiked in place as shown in the illustration. The draw- ings showing the side framing and end framing on following pages clearly show any other details of wall construction. S TAR LINE * EQUIPMENT Detail of Construction at Purlin N the illustration below is shown a detail of the construction at the purlin. The purlin is made of two 2 in. x 10 in. held apart by blocks, or spacers, at intervals of about 3 ft. The purlin is supported by the purlin post which is cut to receive it, as shown in the illustration. A two member strut connects the purlin and purlin post with the truss principal. One end of a 2 in. ——— / x 6 in. diagonal brace is spiked to the purlin, 4 ft. from the bent. The other end is securely spiked to the truss princi- pal. On the other side of the truss another angle brace is spiked in like manner, as shown in the illustration. Note particularly how the various members are joined and knit together. There can be no sagging roof with this kind of construction. Detail at Ridge BLOCKING) _ 2-240" PURLIN BLOCKED APART Z-2'%8" STUDS — CONTINUOUS FROM SILL TO PLATE Detail of Truss at Top Plate Detail of Truss at Purlin x Page One Hundred Forty-nine * HUNT- HELM - FERRIS @&) ae HAY CARRIER TRACK Page One Hundre Hoop OveRHAY Door 246" SAS. VERGE SPLICE d Fifty = | Ne | ATE. : OOKOLTS Nik 2x10" Ringe. DOARD 2x 8" pees on ey itd ine ae ee es i L_ fi -HAYIICARRIIER TRIACK C'XOMUPPER| RAFTHRS 24}}oc- KED [|ApaRy, | AN az TT IN Ba Y N NY Zz 2°X 8" es PLATE PETy Ty iri: US FROM ii PLATE te PL Lebs eerie eal OS GABLE IND jet Dera _, CXO'CORNER ah ; i i 4 E2xSh WALL PLATE 3 "3/418! ANCHOR Bors “s GONGRET= FOUNDATION GRADE LINE eo | PART SIDE’ FRAMING: STAR LINE EQUIPMENT HAY DOOR OPENING lo" JAMB a i ie fel recur WIND BRACE 2X0 leecea WIND BRACE 2-2X8" STUDS CONTINUOUS FRomM SIL To PLATE t KS WAL ; = afkier ANCHOR Botts <— aC CONCRETE. peces le ~ FOUNDAT! ON "GRADE LINES | iad 18h Rae uae Boiss. ne FOOTING Course OmitteD UNDER 8% Op'g. PSS Sse = See SS ee SS SSS SSS SSS apa pa yeas sa tsss= Soe SSeS Sc Se SS SSS SSS = Th TYDICAL- END? FRAMI NG ¢ Page One Hundred Fifty-one > a HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & CO-- * eoa_ i A a a itty a in, nih =i Soe sist P28) ose] Og ee ek (=== = 0 — = 3s =| = — == — = ee } apres a a =| 2 Si INTERIOR VIEW STAR BRACED RAFTER BARN PLANK FRAME CONSTRUCTION Page One Hundred Fifty-two * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Braced Rafter Barn E submit on the opposite page \ \ another type of barn construc- tion—the STAR Plank Frame Braced Rafter Barn—a popular type of construction for the short, low struc- ture, not exceeding 36 ft. in width. An advantage of this type of con- struction is that short lengths of lumber are alone needed. The lumber can be secured from the smallest dealer’s stock, as no timber going into this frame is over 12 in. wide, and 16 ft. in length. A mechanic is not required to frame this barn, as there are few difficult joints to make—a feature that will be appreciated by the farmer who is his own carpenter. This barn has been widely advertised as requiring less lumber than a truss roof barn. Built of equal capacity and substantially framed, it has, however, been definitely proven by estimates fur- nished by two lumber concerns that it contains more board feet of lumber than a truss barn. In the use of this construction, no posts are required in the hay mow to support the peak of the roof as the roof is self-supporting. For this reason, the largest amount of storage space is pro- vided in the mow and there are no ob- structions to hinder in the unloading of hay by means of Hay Carriers and Tracks. The Star Gothic Roof Barn There is still another type of con- struction, known as the Gothic type, which is used to considerable extent and which has several points of advantage. We do not show any details of this style of construction, but do show on pages 169 and 182, exteriors made after this type. This barn is particularly admired It easy to build and comparatively inex- The Gothic rafter from 1 in. lumber, built up to the re- for its attractive appearance. is pensive. is made quired thickness: by nailing together several pieces of 1 in x 4 in or 1 in x 6 in. material. The curve is marked out on the loft floor, along which blocks are nailed and to these blocks, the first member of the rafter is bent and nailed and the rafter built to the size required by adding 1 in. material, which is bent to the curve and nailed. All the rafters are made in one form. This type provides an unobstructed hay mow and a roof that is well drained and strong, as is implied by its arched construction. Page One Hundred x Fifty-three * HONT- HELM - FERRIS & CO- . ¢ Ventilation ARN ventilation is a necessity. It is just as essential that stock should be supplied with an adequate amount of fresh air every 24 hours as it is that they should be supplied with food and water —it is even more necessary, as pure air is not only essential but vital. We are too apt to reverse the order because of being under the. necessity of providing the food and water at whatever expense, whereas pure air is an ingredient that automatically comes into the building and we get the impression that all we have to do is to open a door or a window or a sufficient number of them and it will be supplied without any especial effort on our part. The very reason that this erroneous idea prevails explains why, in the majority of cases, so little thought is given by the man who builds a barn to the important subject of ventilation. In some cases, farmers do give thought to the subject and try to work out a system of ventilation of their own with the usual result that it proves unsatisfactory. Now, almost any system of ventilation is better than no system, but there is no reason why the best should not be had when it can be obtained at as little cost as something far inferior. The matter of barn ventilation is not complicated or difficult to understand. There are only three factors that enter into it—the area- tors or cupolas, the fresh air intakes or flues and the foul air out-takes or flues. When these three are installed in the right relationship to each other and of the proper size, then the correct system of ventilation is bound to result, which means that a constant supply of pure, fresh air will be taken into the barn and the foul air, laden with impurities and mois- ture, will be removed from the barn and not only will the stock be supplied with an abundance of pure air, but the barn itself and its contents, other than stock, will be kept in a dry, clean and healthful condition. The dairyman is most interested in getting the largest amount of milk yield possible. It goes without saying that in order to do this, Page One Hundred Fifty-four K STAR LINE E UIPMENT Ventilation—Continued he must have a healthy herd. It is equally apparent that in order to have a healthy herd, an abundance of pure air must be supplied as well as an abundance of pure food. They are set down here in the order of their importance, since as stated, pure air is more vital than pure food and, in quantity, requires to be furnished in doubly the amount. Suppose you own a herd of 40 Holstein cows. You would not think of giving these cows from one-quarter to one-half as much feed and water as would be required to keep them either healthy or productive. The thought would be absurd. But if you fail to provide a system of venti- lation which will give these same animals the proper amount of pure air, then you have failed to the same degree as though you had deprived them of adequate feed and water. True, without the proper pure air supply, they might not die, at least for a long time, but these same cattle would continue to live for a considerable length of time only half fed and half watered. Cattle may be starved by depriving them of a proper supply of pure air just as they would be starved by a lack of food or water. The only difference is that it is readily detected if the herd is starving because of a lack of food, where it is not so easily determined that they are starved by a lack of pure air. You have doubtless noticed a rough, scrawny herd turned out to pasture in the spring, thin, lifeless and with the appearance of having been poorly kept. The natural thought would be that this condition was due to insufficient food and water but a careful analysis will more frequently prove a lack of sanitation, insufficient sunlight and little or no ventilation. Note the improved appearance of the same herd 30 days later. Too often this change is attributed to the green pasture afforded the herd and not often enough to the fact that out-of-doors the herd has the opportunity to obtain in quantities the pure air of which it had been deprived during the winter in a poorly ventilated barn. x Page One Hundred Fifty-five | | UNT +>: HELM -FERRIS & COs. Why Pure Air Is Required F a constant change of air is needful, then the flow should be sufficient and continuous at all times. This cannot take place unless the proper system is provided. To illustrate more forcibly how imperative is the need of pure air, let us state that the lining membrane of the lungs of an ordinary cow, if it could be stretched out in a continuous sheet, would have an area of 1;500 square feet. This area is equal to that of the sides and ceiling of a room 11 ft. square and the same height. In order that the blood may have an oppor- tunity of absorbing the oxygen brought into the lungs, this membrane contains a network of tiny blood vessels or capillaries. The red corpuscles in the blood exchange the carbon dioxide waste, or as it is sometimes called, carbonic acid gas, for oxygen. It will, there- fore, be seen that the air inhaled undergoes a radical change. When exhaled, its tempera- ture is inereased and it is laden with moisture given off by the lungs, and the carbonic acid gas has replaced the bulk of the oxygen which it contained, We have briefly described what takes place during one respiration. Multiply this by the number of respirations per minute and the number of cows in the barn, and you will have some idea of the necessity of replacing with pure air the moisture-laden air and poisonous gases given off, Plenty of statistics could be shown to prove that the amount of oxygen taken out of the air exhaled makes it absolutely unfit to be again inhaled until it has been mixed with a fresh supply of pure air. once If the outside air Amount of Air Breathed Daily by Different Animals Lbs, Ciunit Horse Phy f) 3,401 Cow 224 2,804 Pig 89 1,103 Sheep 58 726 Hen 2 29 Another Need for Ventilation Aside from the bringing in of pure air to replace the oxygen being used up, a ventilation system is essential for removing the moisture thrown off by the cattle. It is estimated that approximately ten pounds of moisture, in the form of an invisible vapor, is given off by each animal per day. With a herd of forty cows this would mean four hundred pounds of moisture every twenty- four hours that must be disposed of. This vapor, if allowed to remain, will condense into moisture on the walls and ceiling of the barn. One of the best evidences of a poor venti- lation system is the frost which forms on the inside of the stable, caused principally by the fact that the moisture exhaled is not being carried off. This moisture tends to decay the building and helps to contribute to the cold, damp, insanitary condition. In addition to the moisture given off by the animal, it must be remembered that the incoming air is also moisture-laden. To prevent condensation, it means that there must be an adequate and continuous movement ofair. To give you some idea of the problem to be contended with, we show below another table which states the required number of feet of air per hour and per head, which must pass through the stable, to prevent condensation of moisture when it enters the stable 75% saturated and leaves it saturated at the stable temperature. When the stable temperature is: is 75% saturated at 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° the temperature of The volume of air per head and per hour must be: Cie ite Cutt: Curt Cutt. CWesrts 0° 1,982 1,253 832 554 402 10° 2,334 1,385 887 569 415 ys 2,620 1,489 931 614 424 20° 3,140 1,634 996 638 434 SO> 6,228 2,201 1,165 715 466 40" 4,208 1,566 842 520 50° 1,782 1,126 655 Hlundred Tiftyeats STAR LINE E UIPMENT And it must be remembered that the foul air, ammonia and gasses which arise from the manure, if not carried off, would in themselves, contaminate the air in the barn to such an extent that it would be unfit to breathe, even if it contained the necessary amount of oxygen. Authorities agree that the air in stables should not contain more than 3.3% of air once breathed. This means ventilation system, the air in the stable is that with an _ ideal maintained, as nearly as possible, equal in purity to that outside. The Kinds of Ventilation There are primarily two kinds of ventilation forced and natural. Forced ventilation is only necessary in office buildings, factories, theatres and such places where an artificial suction is the only means by which the impure air can be removed. This system for dairy barns would not only be expensive, but unnecessary. The theory as worked out by Professor King, formerly of the University of Wisconsin, is the basis today, either in its original form, or with such modifications as later experiments have proven advisable, for all natural ventila- tion systems. We have dwelt at length on the subject of why to ventilate, without entering into a technical explanation or submitting statistics. As applied to a dairy herd it is merely a matter of dollars and cents. The less pure air given to the animal, the more water and feed required. To properly fatten cattle or to keep them in a healthful condition without an ade- quate supply of pure air is next to impossible. Proper food, plenty of water and, above all, adequate ventilation, are the essentials which keep the production of the dairy herd at its maximum. The Real Problem of Ventilation The real problem of ventilation is not WHY to ventilate, but HOW to ventilate. The intake and outtake flues as well as the cupola itself, must have sufficient capacity. The ideal arrangement is to have the fresh air released in front of the cattle and the foul air taken out near the floor back of the cattle. While it is true that warm air rises, and as warm air is exhaled, one might get the im- pression that the impure air would be near the ceiling. The fact is that respired air cooled to a temperature between 70 and 30 degrees is heavier than pure air of the same temperature. This, together with the fact that the foul air and gases rise from the gutters, will explain the reason for having the outtakes extend almost to the floor. This system permits the fresh, pure air which is released in front of the cows and at the ceiling, to become moderated before reach- ing them, and at the same time there is a tendency to constantly force the foul air back of the cattle. To obtain the best results, both intakes and outtakes should be double thickness insulated with paper between, making an airtight con- struction. All hay chutes should be kept closed so that the air both coming in and leaving the barn will follow the channels intended. On the pages which follow, we have illus- trated and described at length ventilation systems for the various conditions to be met. While the foul air outtakes are important they are no more important than the cupola into which the foul air flows. STAR Steel Cupolas were designed with a knowledge of the conditions to be met. The wind blowing through the opening creates a suction or up-draught. This design prevents a down-draught which would defeat the object for which the entire system was designed. STAR Steel Cupolas are described on pages 84 to 86. illustrated and Page One Hundred Fifty-seven | FSH EE FER GALV. STEEL CUPOLA FOUL AIR OUTLET HAY STORAGE VENTILATED BY CUPOLA Fout Aig Duct: TWO THICKNESSES OF D4M WITH BUILDING PAPER BETWEEN STAR REGISTER STAR REGISTER FRESH AIR Lh FRESH AIR INTAKE —=]i — INTAKE ft STAR OYSTEM OF VENTIEATION Cows FACING IN Page One Hundred Fifty-eight > STAR LINE EQUIPMENT * Ventilation System for Dairy Barn Where Cows Face In HE illustration opposite shows a cross section of a dairy barn arranged to accommodate two rows of cattle facing each other. With this arrangement, the best way to ventilate the dairy barn is to have the large out-take flues, or foul air shafts, arranged as indicated. These out-take flues should be built so that they extend straight up to the roof line and follow it to the cupola or ven- tilator. They should be spaced so that no point of the barn will be more than 30 feet distant, as practical tests have shown that this is the greatest distance where these flues can be depended upon to draw efficiently. Out-take flues should start from 12 to 18 in. from the floor so that the damp, heavy, foul air, moisture and gasses will be drawn out rather than the warmer air. This gives the fresh air entering the barn an opportunity of becoming moderated through contact with the warmer air, nearer the ceiling, before it reaches the cattle. The illustration brings out clearly the fact that the fresh air should enter the intakes from three to four feet lower than the point where it flows into the barn. This arrangement guarantees the flow of air into the barn rather than a tendency for the warm air to leave through the fresh air intakes. The intakes should be evenly dis- tributed around the building to force general distribution of the fresh air as it enters the barn so that all of the animals may share alike in its benefits. Note from the illustration that the fresh air intakes must be extended to the center of the barn so that the fresh air is released in front of the cattle and so that the pressure has a tendency to force the foul air and gasses back toward the foul air out-takes. Size and Number of Intakes The fresh air intakes should be a trifle over one-half square foot in area. Arrange for two for every five cows. To be exact, figure thirty-two square inches of intakes for each cow and forty square inches for each _ horse. These intakes should be distributed about the barn not more than ten to twelve feet apart to get the best results. Keep in mind that the combined area of the intakes should exceed the combined area of the outlets by from fivesstOl ten aper scent. —Linsm aves: a pressure from the outside slightly greater than the capacity of the outlets, which tends to increase the velocity of the up-draft. Details of the construction of both intakes and outlets are given on pages which follow. Page One Hundred Fifty-nine > _HUONT- HELM - FERRIS & coy GALY, SIEIEIL, CUPOLA FOUL AIR OUTLET HAY STORAGE VENTILATED BY CUPOLA f Fou. Aim Duct: fH TWO THICKNESSES OF i Dé M WITH BUILDING SS === f FAC —FRESH AIR OUTLET ~ DOOR IN uct CLOSED DOOR IN DUCT FRESH AIR AN OPEN INTAKE \\ 4 Zz ft. STAR OYSFEM OF VENTILATION Cows FACING OuT Page One Hundred Sixty * S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Ventilation System for Dairy Barn Where Cows Face Out N the opposite page is shown an illustration of a cross section of a dairy barn, arranged to accom- modate two rows of cattle facing out. With this arrangement, the best way to ventilate the dairy barn is to have the large out-take flues or foul air shafts arranged as indicated. These out-take flues should be built so they extend as nearly straight up to the roof line as possible in order to keep friction or resistance at the lowest point. These out-take flues should be spaced, if pos- sible, so no point of the barn will be more than 30 feet distant. Practical tests have shown that this is the greatest distance at which these flues can be depended upon to draw efficiently. You will note that these out-takes are located either in line with the cattle or back of them, if possible, so that at no time does the foul air have to travel in front of the cattle to make its escape. The out-takes should start from twelve to eighteen inches from the floor so the damp, heavy, foul air, moisture and gasses will be drawn out rather than warm air. This gives the fresh air entering the barn an opportunity of becoming moderated through contact with the warm air nearer the ceiling before it reaches the cattle. The illustration brings out clearly the fact that the fresh air should enter the intake E from three to four feet lower than from the point where it flows into the barn F. This arrange- ment guarantees the flow of fresh air into the barn rather than a tendency for the warm air to leave through the intakes. The intakes should be evenly dis- tributed around the building to force general distribution of the fresh air as it enters the barn so that all the animals share alike in its benefits. Note from the illustration that the intakes E release the fresh air in front of the cattle and at the ceiling F so that the pressure has a tendency to force the foul air and gasses back toward the foul air out-takes. Size and Number of Intakes The fresh air intakes should be a trifle over one-half square foot in area. Arrange for two for every five cows. To be exact, figure thirty-two square inches of intakes for each cow and forty square inches for each horse. These intakes should be distributed about the barn not more than ten to twelve feet apart to get the best results. Keep in mind that the combined area of the intakes should exceed the combined area of the out-takes by from five to ten per cent. This gives a pressure from the outside slightly greater than the capacity of the out- takes, which tends to increase the ve- locity of the up-draft. Details of construction of both in- takes and outlets are given on the pages which follow. Page One Hundrec x 1 Sixty-one Pry SHY Al Iu fp | OO. ie wi —— SS SS ——$=>= ———— HUT isu Hono It HELM -FERRIS & COs Construction of Intake Flues for Barns Where Cows Face in N dairy barns where the cows face in, it is well to arrange the joists running crosswise "so that the fresh air inlets may be constructed at very little expense by sealing over between two joists. Where the joists run lengthwise, it is necessary to construct fresh air intakes which hang below the joists. The construction of the intake flue shown in the illustration is similar to that shown on the opposite page, except that it is extended to the center of the barn so that the fresh air may be released at the ceiling and in front of the cattle. The fresh air duct should be made of D. & M. Boards, double thickness, with either one-half inch air space between or insulated with building paper. This is necessary to prevent condensation on the barn ceiling and walls in line with these fresh air ducts. When the warm air in the barn strikes these fresh air ducts, which are, of course, colder, condensation takes place unless the proper insulation is provided. The outside openings should have STAR Registers fitted with automatic shut-offs which can be operated from the inside of the barn. The openings in the ceiling should be fitted with STAR Register Faces. Note particularly the deflectors which divide the fresh air ducts so that the air is released into the barn where otherwise the tendency would be to travel the length of the entire duct. Also note that the inlet where the fresh air is taken in is located from three to four lower than where the air is released. This is done to insure suction into the barn rather than a tendency for the warm air to In other words, the warm air is trapped, preventing a too sudden cooling of the barn. feet leave. ‘resh Air Inlet STAR LINE EQUIPMENT ————— Construction of Intake Flues for Barns Where Cows Face Out HE construction of the intake flue or fresh air duct where the cows face out is com- paratively simple. A box comstructed of 1 in. x 6 in. D. & M. boards, built in between _ the studding answers the purpose nicely. To avoid condensation on the inner wall in line with the fresh air intake, double thickness boards should be used with a one-half inch air space between, or with building paper for insulation. The outer opening of the flue or duct should be a little larger than the flue itself. It should be covered with a STAR Register fitted with an automatic shut-off so that the volume of fresh air taken in can either be regulated or shut off if necessary. The inner opening should be the same size as the outer opening. It should be covered with a STAR Register face. You will note that where the cattle face out, the fresh air is released at a point from three to four feet higher than where it enters the inlet and as near the ceiling as possible, directly in front of the cattle. Ventilation can be increased by having the windows fitted with STAR Window Guards. When the windows are opened, they drop back into the guards which in turn deflect the air to the ceiling, allowing it to become moderated before reaching the cattle. Details of window construction are given on page 138. Note that ~” the window illustrated is so designed that for summer ventilation it can be raised from below | or entirely removed. Where the masonry wall extends to the mow floor, it is at times advisable to locate the windows in pairs with a mullion between. This mullion should be large enough to serve as the fresh air intake. This makes a very desirable arrangement to take care of this condition be- cause the fresh air inlet is located in between each pair of windows and does not have to be built into the masonry. Page One Hundred Sixty-three HUNT: HELM “FERRIS & COs Construction of Out-take Flues WN the out-take flue depends, to a great extent, the success or fail- ure of the ventilation system. This flue preferably should be square But | oR Lp; LO ) Pa Pen’ Mow’ is Z \\ x dG le Joist F TWO |THICKNESS ADJUSTER UIL iR_ /Duc FOUL F D&M WITH BUILDING] PAPER alae ae One Hundred Sixty-four or round in cross section. It must be constantly kept in mind that the straighter the flue, the less friction. The cross sectional area should be main- tained the entire length of the flue. For example: if the flue, at the start, were the proper size and were decreased in size going through the mow, the capacity would be correspondingly decreased. This flue should be constructed of matched boards, double thick- ness and insulated with paper. It is essential that this construction should be as near air tight as pos- sible. If care is not taken on this point, then the efficiency will be correspondingly decreased. It is advisable to locate these foul air out-takes so that no point of barn will be more than thirty feet distant. This is the greatest distance where the out-take flue can be depended upon to draw efficiently. It is well to locate a sliding door near the ceiling practically the same size as the opening below, so that during the summer months when the barn becomes too warm or too damp, the warm, damp air can be released quickly. Of equal importance to the out- take is the cap or ventilator on the roof. STAR Steel Cupolas are x STAR LINE EQUIPMENT ww Construction of Out-take Flues (Continued) scientifically designed and are more efficient than wooden cupolas. Not only that, they are lighter and their con- struction guards against a down draft. It is important that a cupola should extend at least three feet above the ridge of the barn or any surrounding barns if the best results are. obtained. The principle is just the same as that of a chimney and if the require- ments of an efficient chimney are kept constantly in mind it will aid greatly in constructing these out-take flues. The preceding pages have covered in as brief and concise a manner as possible, the fundamental principles of ventilation. These principles are those on which recognized authorities agree and on which all successful ventilating systems are based. From the explanations given and the illustrations shown, a_ practical system of ventilation can be figured out to suit any ordinary requirements. There may be special cases, not covered in the suggestions outlined. But THERE IS ALWAYS A WAY TO VENTILATE, and to take care of such cases we shall be glad to have you call upon our BARN PLAN DEPART- MENT for advice and co-operation. This department has made a thorough study of ventilation from a_ practical standpoint and is prepared to assist you in every way possible in figuring out problems of ventilation as well as barn equipment. Size of Out-take Flues Due to the variance in humidity, tem- perature, height of duct and velocity of wind, it is difficult to outline a cut-and- dried formula for figuring the size of out- take flues which will apply under different climatic conditions, etc. However, most authorities will agree that a safe rule to follow is to allow thirty-two square inches of area for each cow and forty square inches of area for each horse. For example: in a barn stabling ten cows and two horses, the combined area of the out-take flues should equal about four hundred square inches. words, inside measurements, would be ample. In other a flue twenty inches square, Where conditions arise making sharp angles or bends necessary, the area of the flue should be increased to offset the loss of efficiency due to friction. When the flue has to be flattened somewhat, so that its shape is neither round nor square, the area should be relatively greater. This rule is as practical a basis on which to figure as any that has yet been established. Page One Hundred Sixty-five * HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & CO- >< Have Your Barn Built on Paper First Pag One E are equipped to produce and \ \ supply plans for Modern Dairy Barns and other farm buildings. At the head of this department are ex- perienced men who for years have been designing barns for leading dairymen throughout the country. They are ex- perienced in the field of barn construc- tion and engineering. This department furnishes: ic eebloonellans: 2. Complete Working Plans. 3. Complete Specifications. We furnish, without charge, com- plete floor plans. These plans are blue printed, drawn to exact scale and cover our recommendation in each individual case according to the conditions and requirements. On these floor plans, we show accurately the location of each door and window, also the arrangement of all chutes, feed and litter alleys, etc. stalls, pens, bins, ventilating We also furnish at a nominal charge, complete blue printed working plans in addition to floor plans. These working plans show drawings of all elevations, cross-sections showing construction of foundation walls, floors, side walls and height of ceilings and cross sections of framing, showing size and lengths of rafters, joists, studding, braces and all Hundred Sixty-six other lumber used and how same is joined together. Also all detailed drawings are pro- vided showing construction of windows, doors, cornices, ventilating flues—both intake and out-take—hay chutes, etc. Complete specifications are also fur- nished with each set of plans where desired. We submit herewith a number of practical Dairy and All-Purpose Barns intended to cover the ordinary range of Choose the design of Send to us requirements. barn that best suits you. for the floor plans or complete plans and specifications. Floor plans are free. The nominal charge made for complete plans and specifications will be refunded upon the purchase of STAR Equipment. Or, if you wish us to furnish complete special plans for a barn of unusual character or design, we will do so at a cost commensurate with the work in- volved. In any event, you can bring your building problems to this department with the assurance that you will get the most expert authoritative advice, and that the plans submitted will be scientifically correct and in accordance with the best principles of modern barn construction. S TAR LINE 36 ft. wide, 126 ft. long, and approximately 44 ft. from grade to ridge. It has a feed room accommodation at the end, 36 ft. wide and 20 ft. long. The driveway to mow floor simplifies the unloading of hay and straw. Grain bins located above the mixing room can be filled directly from wagon and grain can then be spouted to the mixing room on ground floor. Hay mow capacity is 217 tons. The ground floor is planned to accommodate 40 cows, 4 calf pens, a cow pen, and a bull pen. The cows face in, with a broad feed alley down the Star Dairy Barn No. 1 EQUIPMENT The exterior walls of ground floor are covered with horizontal drop siding and vertical siding is used above mow floor. This is a beautiful as well as a practical, trussed roof, as illustrated on page 146. modern milk factory. It is well lighted, well ventilated, has ample storage capacity, and a business end in which the largest amount of work can be handled with a minimum of effort. It is a type of barn that can be built and STAR Equipped complete at reasonable cost. center. Ground floor height is 8 ft. 6 in. The entire ground floor and foundation walls are of concrete. Foundation walls extend to the level of window sills. The con- struction is a plank frame with a ress} [11 delolw 1 sia 1 1 7 7 u Ts —— = 3.6 Page One Hundred Sixty-seven HUNT +: HELM -FERRIS & CO-* Star General Purpose Barn No. 36 ft. wide, 72 ft. long and 38 ft. high from grade to ridge. The cattle shelter and imple- ment shed is built at the silo end, 24 x 40 ft. This barn is of the braced rafter type of construction, as shown on page 152. It is a well constructed building with no posts in mow (meen Ohana aoe *CATTLE / SHELTER SHED: GE? SHED ES 3 | : 6 | PARI 4 YARD! 2 “IMPLEMENT? STO Cofcrete ae EEG CieaNing | ALLEY _ 7 Soot Liter ant ee Ti WATER, PPTs (PY sTpLyS | | HAgNess| HOIRSE] STALLS STORES Cone =e J Tanger to interfere with the unloading of hay. The floor and foundation up to the window sills are of concrete. The frame walls are sided with horizontal drop siding, making a very neat appearing structure. Hay mowcapacityis 100tons. It is planned to accommodate 18 cows, and 9 horses, including two box stalls. The stock face out, which gives an 8 ft. driveway in the center for manure spreader. In the horse stable a harness room has been provided in which harness can be hung and various supplies kept. A concrete floor in the cattle barn extends 4 ft. beyond the building—a feature which the farmer will appreciate. The implement shed has been well designed for the convenient handling of farm implements. This barn and annex form a very complete and convenient farm group. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star General Purpose Barn No. 3 36 ft. wide, 62 ft. long and 38 ft. from grade to ridge, with a shed addition, 36 ft. wide and 13 ft. long. In this plan provision is made for the stabling of horses across one end. There are three horse stalls and a box stall. The cow barn is partitioned off from horse barn, and accommodates 20 cows. Cows face out. The oats bin and hay chute are conven- iently planned. The small bin is filled directly from the larger bins located on the mow floor. Hay is elevated from the outside. Access to mow is by a stairs in horse barn. Hay mow capacity is 86 tons. Ceiling height is 8 ft. 6 in. in clear. The entire lower floor and foundation walls are of concrete. Foundation wall extends to the level of window sills. This is a plank frame, Gothic roofed barn with vertical drop siding. It is especially well planned, lighted and ventilated. Bins and silo are so located that feeding can be done quickly and with a minimum of effort. The construction of this barn is simple, and requires no expensive labor to build. The mow is large and unobstructed, and the graceful curve of the roof affords the best possible drainage. This is an unusually beautiful barn, yet less board feet of lumber are required to build it than any other type of construction. 62-0" in =| NCOVERED LITTER CARRIER TRACK || SHED | CLEANING wt = Fa ! “TO; STAR ONCRETE FEED far’] WINTER ¢ SILO CLEANING ALLEY GROUND’ FLOOR? PLAN’ Page One Hundred Sixty-nine *& HUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO- Page On Star General Farm Barn No. 4 36 ft. wide, 98 ft. long and 42 ft. from grade to ridge. The interior arrangement of the cow barn provides for 28 cows, facing in, and two calf pens accommodating 12 calves. Feed bins are built next to the silo with larger bins overhead. The horse barn contains 3 single and two double horse stalls, and a box stall. A feed room with overhead bins is located in the horse barn. The concrete foundation wall extends up to the mow floor level. Barn has a concrete approach for the convenient handling of grain and hay, directly on the mow floor. The barn Tr Ss aT ROTTEN Hundred Seventy above the concrete wall is of a STAR plank frame, trussed roof construction, similar to the barn shown on page 146. The frame walls are covered with vertical drop siding. Hay mow capacity, 145 tons. Special attention has been given to the plan- ning of lighting and ventilation in this barn. It has all the advantages, but none of the objectionable features of the dark, damp, old fashioned bank barn. This is the kind of barn that answers the requirements of thousands of American farmers. As you can see from the floor plan, it is de- signed to save the greatest pos- sible amount of labor. The feed- ing alley runs out from the feed room, thus shortening the dis- tance between cows and feed and saving thousands of steps throughout the year. Complete STAR Equipment makes the work in the barn a real pleasure. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star General Purpose Barn No. 5 36 ft. wide, 100 ft. long and 38 ft. from grade to ridge. The feed room and silo are built on one side. This arrangement permits the farmer to increase his barn in its length as required. Grain bins are located on mow floor. The width of doors to ensilage room gives access to wagon load of roughage which can then be distributed down the feed alleys. The ground floor of cow barn is planned to accommodate 24 cows, a calf pen and a cow pen. The wide feed mixing floor separates the horse barn from the cow barn. 8 horses are stabled in 6 single stalls and 2 box stalls. The stock face out and a wide center driveway will permit the driving through with a manure spreader, if desired. The barn is of a plank framed, braced rafter construc- tion. The exterior walls are covered with horizontal drop siding. Hay is elevated from the outside and the mow is lighted and ventilated by dormer windows. Hay mow capacity is 144 tons of hay. This general farm barn has been especially designed to meet the needs of the farmer on a 200 to 250 acre farm, and who desires a good substantial building at a minimum outlay of capital. 400'- O° Paze One Hundred Seventy-one * HUONT- HELM -FERRIS & CO. Star Dairy Barn No. 6 34 ft. wide, 110 ft. long and approximately 30 ft. from grade to ridge. It is a barn that should appeal to the think- ing farmer, the wide awake dairyman who knows that a comfortable, sanitary building is the only kind of barn he can afford to put his money into. A herd of 36 milch cows comfortably stabled in STAR Steel Stalls; two calf pens accom- modating 12 calves, a cow pen and a bull pen, makes this an ideal and practical floor arrange- ment. The cows face out, with a driveway through center of barn. There are four large hoppered bins readily accessible for feeding and filling. Hay is taken in at the end and the unobstructed mow will hold plenty of hay and roughage to feed the herd. Hay mow capacity, 100 tons. The ground floor height is 8 ft. 6 in. in the clear. The foundation wall is of concrete and extends 6 in. above the grade. The exterior walls are [car Mangers {Way} built of hollow tile to the plate and stuccoed. The roof is the braced rafter type, illustrated *GROUND’ FLOOR? PLAN? e Hundred Seventy-two on page 152. Star Dairy Barn No. 7 36 ft. wide, 98 ft. long and 39 ft. from grade to ridge. There are two large silos attached to a shelter shed, 36 ft. wide and 21 ft. long. The grain bins are located above and grain is spouted to ground floor. This is a distinctive building that will add tone to any farm. It is not a novelty, but a barn combining all the good features of a rectangular barn, and the beauty, strength and economy of a round roof. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT through with a manure spreader, if desired. The foundation wall and first floor are of concrete. The foundation wall extends 2 ft. above grade. The ground floor height is 8 ft. 6 in. All framing lumber is of 2 in. material. Drop siding is used on the outside of walls. The beautiful Gothic roof, entirely free from sup- porting timbers, makes a hay mow where hay can be handled with a minimum amount of labor. Hay mow capacity is 139 tons. It has stall accommodations for 30 cows. The pen barn is sepa- rated from the milking barn by a tight partition, and contains two calf pens, two cow pens, a mater- nity pen, and a bull pen. The stock face out and a wide, center driveway will permit the driving Page One Hundred Seventy-three HUNT: HELM -+- FERRIS & COs Star Dairy Barn No. 8 36 ft. wide, 82 ft.long. Theinterior arrange- 2 ft. above the grade. Ceiling height is 8 ft. ment provides for the stanchioning of 28 cows, 6 in. in clear. The outside walls are covered headed in. Two pens accommodating 14 calves, with horizontal drop siding. a cow pen, and a well located feed room complete The dairyman who desires to have his feed the plan. and hay stored in a separate building will like The entire lower floor and foundation walls this barn. It is planned according to the best are of concrete. The foundation wall extends practices of dairying, and is equipped with all modern labor-saving devices. It ——————— i ot VERT A NENT Duct LEANING LITTER CARRIER TRACK? is well lighted, and well venti- lated. It is smooth and sanitary on the inside, and _ especially pleasing in appearance. 14, STAR, COW STALLS FSTANGHIQNS CONCRETE MANGER tree: 1) SE This barn, completely equipped with STAR Equip- ment, could be made a highly productive milk factory. CONCRETE Litter Carrier TRACK “litter C ie CLEANING JURE Ver ucT j Vent Duct - GROUND- FLOOR- DLAN- Page One Hundred Seventy-four S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Dairy Barn No. 9 36 ft. wide, 70 ft. long and has a feed room annex 20 ft. wide and 20 ft. long. Grain bins are located on second floor of feed room and grain is spouted to hoppers below. There are two rows of cows, facing in, with cross alleys at the ends of stall TOWS. It is especially well lighted, and sash are so arranged that they can be readily removed and blinds or screens attached. Owing to climatic conditions, this barn has no ventilation system. The windows and louvers in Monitor are de- pended upon for a thorough circulation of air. The entire ground floor and i the foundation walls extending to the level of the window a 5 ow sills, are of concrete. The Es 1712 STAR * CONCRETE *STAL STANCHIONS WAGERS FEED $ ENSILAGE. building above foundation wall __ __FEED CaRRiER TRACK ees re) is rigidly framed and trussed. FEEDING ALLEY vlan GRAIN BINS ABOVE: The exterior walls are covered “ CONCRETE MANGERS | #15 aroun fete Homers = ee Af with drop siding. I StaRelc ethife ke Traichidnd [ |38 This Monitor roofed dairy Ss TEETER CARRIER TRACK ___ CLEANING ALLEY. barn is adapted to Southern, or Californian conditions only. GROUND’ FLOOR? PLAN Page One Hundred Seventy-five > 4 HOUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO- Page One 34 ft. wide, 56 ft. long and 36 ft. from grade to ridge. There are stalls for 20 dairy cows, facing in. One end of barn is partitioned off and divided into a calf pen, a cow pen, bull pen and feed room. The silo is well located in relation to the feed room. A stairs in Hundred Seventy-six Star Dairy Barn No. 10 feed room gives access to the mow. Hay is elevated from the outside. The grain bins on mow floor can be filled by a bucket elevator located in the driveway. The floors are of concrete. The ceiling height is 8 ft. 6 in. in clear. The foundation walls are of concrete extending up to the level of window sills. The braced rafter, trussed frame barn, il- lustrated on page 152, is the type of construc- tion used. All framing lumber is of 2 in. material, well braced, and thoroughly bolted. The mow floor is supported by STAR Steel Posts. The exterior walls are covered with hori- zontal drop siding. Hay mow capacity 80 tons. This barn is modern from every viewpoint. It allows an abundance of sunshine to flood the gutters, and disinfect them daily. It is well ventilated and is easily kept in sanitary condition. The STAR Litter Carrier and Boom shown in the illustration show how to make short work of the litter problem. S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT 36 ft. wide, 56 ft. long and 43 ft. high from grade to ridge. This barn is planned to accommodate 16 cows, facing in, acow penandacalfpen. The mixing room is located right next to the silo and grain bins. With a STAR Overhead Carrier system, the cattle can be fed con- veniently and quickly. The foundations and floors are of concrete. The ceiling is 8 ft. 6 in. high. The barn above foundation is a plank frame, trussed roof barn of the same construc- tion as the building shown on page 146. The mow is especially high, and will take care of a bumper crop. Its capacity is 88 tons. This is a roomy and convenient barn, well ventilated, with wide feed and grain alleys and with cross alleys well located. The combination of horizontal siding below hay mow floor, and the vertical siding above, broken by a well designed belt course, gives this barn both a pleasing and substantial appearance. Star Dairy Barn No. 11 56-0" cFour Ai Duet | CLEANING AULEY OT UTTER CARRIER THRE 67 STAR cay pip S CONCRETE MANGER TRACK RUN To Dumr O Feeo Cargier Track oO 7 TEEDING ALLEY bP) CONCRETE MANGER OSS akhalcdulsduls & Cure CR ‘GROUND + FLOOR’ VLAN: Page One Hundred Seventy-seven Star Dairy Barn No. 12 HUNT: HELM 38:0 — ae TO S1L0~+4 Page One Hundred Seventy-eight “FERRIS & COs 36 ft. wide, 38 ft. long and 34 ft. from grade to ridge. It is a practical, simple and economical barn, well lighted and well ventilated and is especially suited to the needs of dairymen having a medium sized herd. It provides quarters for 14 dairy cows and a cow pen. The cows face out, which is a very convenient arrange- ment in a barn of this size. The stairs to the mow is located in the feed room. Feed bins are located on mow floor and feed is spouted to ground floor level. Hay is taken into barn through a large gable door. The hay mow is unobstructed by any supporting timbers. Capac- ity of hay mow is 40 tons. The ceiling is 8 ft. 6 in. high. The foundation is of concrete and extends 2 ft. above grade. The barn is of a STAR Plank frame, braced rafter type. The mow floor is supported by STAR Steel Posts. Outside walls are covered with drop siding. A barn like this can be made a pleasant place to work in with a complete STAR Equipment. S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Dairy Barn No. 13 32 ft. wide, 36 ft. long and 32 ft. high. Its plan is similar to the barn shown on the opposite page. There are 12 cow stalls, facing out, and a large calf pen accommodating 5 calves. One corner of the barn is devoted to a feed room with a silo attached. A stairway to the mow runs up from the passageway right next to the feed room. Under the stairway there is a closet for utensils. Hay mow capacity is 36 tons. The ceiling height is 8 ft. 6 in. in clear. The ground floor and foundation are of concrete. The foundation wall extends 2 ft. above grade. This barn is a STAR plank frame, braced rafter barn, the same as illustrated on page 152. It is a small, compact dairy barn, embodying all the essential features of the bigger plant. You can make this barn a very profitable one with STAR Equipment. | CONCRETE FEED GROUND» FLOOR» *PLAN? Page One Hundred Seventy-nine » HONT- HELM -FERRIS & CO- | = 28 ft. wide, 30 ft. long and approximately 29 ft. Star Dairy Barn No. 14 high from grade to ridge. i 30-0: ; There are stalls for a herd of 7 cows. Also a cow fi pen and a calf pen. Access to the hay mow is by a stairs conveniently located near the feed room. Feed can be stored in bags or spouted from an overhead bin. Ground floor height is 8 ft. 6 in. in clear. Ground floor and foundation walls are of concrete. The foun- dation wall extends 2 ft. above grade. Pa (4 4 wt The construction is of the plank frame, braced - vg rafter type shown on page 152. The exterior walls © IF z are covered with horizontal drop siding. The barn is © =| = well lighted and ventilated by a STAR Automatic Tp Vv = System of ventilation. The studs, sills, plates and rafters | are of 2 in. x 6in. material. Joists are of 2 in. x 8 in. sup- ported by two built-up girders. STAR Steel Supporting | Columns are specified. Hay mow capacity, 20 tons. | This well proportioned barn can be completely BES equipped with STAR equipment at an unusually low cost. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Combination Horse 36 ft. wide, 70 ft. long and 38 ft. high from grade to ridge. There are six single, four double and two large box stalls. Horses facein. Underneath the driveway to the mow is a root cellar with a trap door to the driveway. Grain bins located in the mow can be readily filled from wagon, and the grain spouted to small bins in the mixing room. The milking machine room is well located in re- and Dairy Barn No. 15 tilated. The mows are well lighted by well propor- tioned dormer windows. Enough’ hay, straw, grain and roughage can be stored to fully meet the feeding requirements of the stock. Combined mow capacity is 170 tons of hay. ! This modern farm group is so constructed and designed that it is a factory capable of lation to the Dairy Barn: The dairy barn is 36 ft. wide, 86 ft. long and 30 ft. high from grade to ridge and is planned to accommodate 30 cows. It also contains two calf pens, a cow pen and a bull pen. Cows face in. The horse barn is a plank frame, trussed roof barn with horizontal drop siding. The dairy barn is a plank frame, braced rafter barn with hori- zontal drop siding. _ RppROAcH The entire lower floor and founda- tion walls are of concrete. The foun- dation wall extends to the level of the window sill. Both the horse barn and dairy barn are well lighted and ven- being run ona business basis, in which both waste of material and labor have been reduced to a minimum. Vent. AtLey “TARRIER TRACK 5) BARN “YARD! i ~ COERNING | a ey Ne Puy puis ea i cl | § F at & aS FEEDING Ere F i \ Auer f GROUND » FLOOR~ PLAN Page One Hundred Ejighty-one Star General Purpose Barn No. 38 ft. wide, 140 ft. long and 42 ft. from grade to ridge. The feed room annex at the silo end is 38 ft. wide, 17 ft. long and 34 ft. high. The barn has stalls for 50 dairy cows, facing out, two calf pens, a bull pen, and a general purpose room, well planned, at the barn yard side of the barn. There is a tight partition between the horse and cow barn. The horse barn will accommodate eight horses, in single stalls. Hay is elevated from the driveway which is open to the roof. Bins are built above the Feed Mixing room, and grain is spouted to the 1e Hundred Eighty-two — LEELA ae ‘Rebel Veen fk rT PRE ik sl ig zB aes ee ee eee * HUNT- HELM - FERRIS & CO- po 16 ground floor. The hay capacity is 245 tons. The ground floor and foundation walls are of concrete. The ceiling height is 8 ft. 6 in. in the clear. This barn is a STAR plank frame, trussed roofed barn, of the type illustrated on page 146. The long rooflines are broken by dormer windows which scale in well with the main barn. In this modern farm barn waste motion, waste material, and waste labor have been eliminated. Things move in a straight line and in one direc- tion—there are few corners to turn and no steps to retrace. The finishing touch to a barn like this would be to make it STAR Equipped throughout. This means not only STAR Stalls and Stanchions, but also STAR Steel Pens, STAR Water Bowls, STAR Litter and Feed Carriers, STAR Door Hangers, Hay Tools |} etc. A STAR Equipped Barn is a work-saving building. S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT ‘ei Star General Farm Bara No. 17 38 ft. wide, 70 ft. long and approximately 37 ft. from grade to ridge. A small ensilage room is built adjacent to the silo. The cow barn is partitioned off from the horse and pen barn. There are stall accommodations for 20 milch cows, 4 single horse stalls, a cow pen and a calf pen. The stockface out. An enclosed stairway to mow is planned in relation to the driveway above. A spreader can be driven through the barn. Bedding and roughage can be brought into the barn through the same driveway. The foundation walls are built of local field stone. The ceiling height is 8 ft. 6 in. in the clear. This type of gable barn is a favorite in certain sections of Pennsyl- vania, Ohio and Indiana. It has all the good features of the old timber framed barn, but is modern in con- struction. The frame is built of plank and the roof is supported by trusses. Hay mow capacity is 85 tons of loose hay. Page One Hundred Ejighty-three > HUNT+- HELM - FERRIS & COs Star General Purpose Barn No. 18 34 ft. wide, 70 ft. long and 36 ft. high from grade to ridge. There is a wide driveway on the silo end from which hay can be unloaded into the mow. Driveway is separated from the rest of the barn by a tight partition, which prevents the dust from getting into the barn proper. The barn contains accommodations for 12 GROUND» FLOOR: PLAN | CLEANING _ DTTER CARRIER Track 34-08 DRIVEWAY Page One Hundred Eighty-four cows, a cow pen and a pen for 5 calves. Pro- visions are made for 4 horses, including a box stall and a grain bin. The stock face out. Hay mow capacity is 76 tons. The barn is of a plank frame, trussed con- struction, as shown on page 146. The foundation extends 3 ft. 6 in. above grade, and is of concrete. The frame walls above founda- tion are sided with vertical siding. The feed and cleaning alleys are wide and the cross alley is well located. The vertical siding above the high foundation gives this barn a pleasing and substantial appearance. Here is a roomy and convenient barn. It is well lighted and well ventilated and is out- fitted complete with STAR Equipment, which means making it a building in which the greatest amount of work can be accomplished with the least effort. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star General Purpose Barn No. 19 34 ft. wide, 44 ft. long and 37 ft. high from grade to ridge. Four horses are stabled across one end, separated from the cow barn by a tight partition. The cows face in, and there are stall accommodations for 10 animals, a calf pen and a cow pen. Grain bins placed in one corner are well located for the feeding of stock. The hay chute is centrally located. Access to mow is by an enclosed stairs in feed room. The hay mow capacity is 50 tons of loose hay. Ceiling height is 8 ft. 6 in. in clear. The ground | floor and foundation is of concrete. The foundation f yee: wall extends two feet above grade. The construc- r tion is a plank frame with a braced rafter roof. The exterior walls are covered with horizontal drop siding. This general purpose barn is designed to meet the needs and requirements of farmers owning about 80 to 120 acre farms. It is compact in arrangement, especially well lighted and ventilated. It is a type of barn that will form the nucleus of a good set of SS farm buildings that will prove a credit to the farm areata and community. l er | om cwure- FEEDING ALLEY BAY) 34-O* SY * GROUND ¢ FLOOR» PLAN: Page One Hundred Eighty-five HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & CcO- Star General Purpose Barn No. 20 30 ft. wide, 36 ft. long and approximately 29 ft. high from grade to ridge. There are stalls for 5 cows, a cow pen and a calf pen. Three horses are stabled across one end. Access to hay mow is by a stairs conveniently located in the feed room, Feed can be stored in bags, or spouted from an overhead bin. Hay mow capacity is 34 tons of hay. Ground floor height is 8 ft. 6 in. in clear. Ground floor and foundation walls are of concrete and extend 2 ft. above grade. The construction is of the plank frame, braced rafter type, {| Moo shown on page 152, The exterior walls are covered with horizontal . a drop siding. The barn is well lighted and ventilated by a STAR (0 f fF | | \ ( L Mow bs System of ventilation, The studs, sills, plates, and rafters are of 2 in, material. Joists are supported by two built-up girders. STAR Steel Supporting eal | CLOANING | Crver ‘3 Columns are specified. ER Th « een ara : . See Diet ’ E There are a number of small farms where a barn of this type . rr a will furnish all the accommodations needed—a farm where the QIWOUN LOOK! FLAN owner does all the work and wishes to keep but few cows and horses. — _ STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star All-Purpose Barn No. 21 60 ft. wide, 76 ft. long and 37 ft. from grade to ridge. This barn is especially designed for the keeping of the dual purpose herd. A barn of this size and shape will take care of the average farmer’s needs. Almost a car load of beef cattle are sheltered along one side, partitioned off from the horse barn. Horse barn accom- modates two team stalls, two single stalls, and two box stalls. Ten dairy cows, acalf pen and a cow pen are housed in the opposite side. Hay is stored in the center of the barn, and over the stock, two grain bins, and a silo complete the plan. Hay mow capacity is 150 tons. The entire barn is floored with concrete, except the hay barn. The foundation wall is of the same material and extends 2 ft. above grade. The barn is a plank frame structure, and is well braced and trussed. The outside walls are covered with vertical drop siding. This barn is convenient, practical and econ- omical for the farmer. Everything is centralized here to save labor and make winter feeding easy and profitable. Silage can be easily distributed down the feed alley, hay and other roughage stored in the mow, can be handily fed into the manger, or hay racks, located along the side of the mow. FeeDNG ALLEY Tapper meng Ff Page One Hundred Eighty-seven *-FERRIS & COs > HUNT- HELM Star Horse Barn No. 22 “gindieicwe, < 40 ft. wide, 72 ft. long and approximately 40 ft. from grade to ridge. This plan shows a practical farm barn especially designed to stable horses. It contains 15 single horse stalls and two large box stalls. Two corn cribs are built across one end and extend up into the hay mow. Two bins can be conveniently filled from the driveway. A spreader can be driven through the barn and manure hauled directly to the field, if desired. Hay is elevated to mow through large gable doors and access to mow is by a stairs adjacent to the feed bin. A harness cabinet built in passage will store two or three good sets of harness. Hay mow capacity is 138 tons of hay. The ceiling height is 9 ft. in the clear. The floor and founda- tion is of concrete. Foundation wall extends 2 ft. above grade. The barn is of a plank frame, trussed roof construction. The outside walls are covered with vertical drop siding. The building serves its purpose best when especially adapted to the purpose intended. A horse barn should be different than any other building on the farm. The health and comfort of the horses should be a first consideration, but the convenience in feeding and attending to their wants should not be forgotten. Page One Hundred Eighty-eight STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Farm Dairy House No. 23 HE progressive, wide awake dairyman realizes that in order to produce milk or cream of the best quality, the dairy house must be so constructed and equipped that the products can be cared for in the most convenient and satisfactory manner. product is to be disposed of, the location of the barn, well, etc., be known. However, a few general principles can be followed in the building of any dairy house. Although the dairy house should be near enough to the barn to be convenient, it should not be directly connected. When selecting the location for the house proper, drainage should be first considered. Any building medium may be selected depending upon the investment the owner wishes to make. Plastered interior walls are preferable to wood walls. The building should be parti- tioned off, and the rooms should be well lighted and ventilated. A solid and impervious floor of concrete is essential. All floors should be well drained. Lastly an abundance of clean, cold, run- ning water is necessary. The dairy house shown above is amply large to take care of the product of a herd of 30 to 60 cows. The same general plan and layout may be followed for a larger plant by increasing the overall dimensions of the building to accommodate the larger machinery and storage space required. t RECEIVING $ SHIPPING PLATFORM i To correctly design the dairy house it is essential that the size of the herd, how the 30'-O* Sj CCAN ac 23-6" « Inc Vauvevess: Borrce Fier i SEPARATOR > Ont aD m i ACLARIFI Wash + Room IB-G AK 4-0" Can Races 2 Receiving MILK «Room af : J PaASTEURIZ aR [4 HT [COOLER = ae me [Dmive Smart en 24-O* PLATFORM * FLOOR’ PLAN / Page One Hundred Eighty-nine HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & CO-e Star Modern Hog House No. 24 VERY successful farmer and hog raiser in kK; the country is familiar with this type of house. The house is 26 ft. wide and 81 ft. 4 in. long. The height of this type of house is always governed by the latitude in which it is to be built. The illustration shows a house designed for latitude 42 degrees north. There are 16 STAR Steel Hog Pens. Four bins, a scale, and cooking space are located in one end. If desired, this space can be utilized for four more pens. Size of pens are 8 feet x 9 feet. Small doors in side walls give the pigs access to the outside pens. The foundations and floors are of concrete. The side and end walls are of hollow tile. The Page One Hundred Ninety roof is exceptionally well framed and is covered with shingles and composition roofing. The ridge of the house should always run east and west, to get a southern exposure. Sunshine— good, warm, clean, wholesome sunshine, is an absolute essential for hog growing success. It means better health and faster growth. The windows in the house are of a size and so located that the new born pig, farrowed in February or March, will receive a maximum amount of wholesome sunshine. A decided advantage of this type is that the hot, per- pendicular rays of the summer sun will not pene- trate the interior of this house. Swine are as sus- ceptible to heat as they are to cold, and no -| other type of house possesses the advan- tage mentioned above. Constant repairs and continuous de- preciation is eliminated in this modern hog house. With prices assured and unlimited markets the farmer is war- ranted in disregarding the seeming higher first cost of a permanent tile construction. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT AMA ghee i Pieee® ¥ Star Combined Corn Crib, Granary and Hog House No. 25 HE combination corn crib, granary and The Hog House hog house illustrated above, forms a most A house ideal, practical and economical farm 46 group. The farmer going into pork production will readily appreciate its many merits and labor saving advantages. . sions of the house are 24 ft. x 60 ft., and it con The Corn Crib and Granary tains 19 STAR Steel Hog Pens, and a feed The building is 26 ft. wide and 28 ft. long. room. Pens are 6 ft. x 8 ft. Ceiling height The corn cribs are 8 ft. wide and 18 ft. high to is 7 ft. in clear, and hay and roughage can be the square. A trench runs lengthwise through stored overhead. Floor and foundations are of the cribs, forming a convenient runway for the concrete. The plank frame is covered with drag of the corn sheller. Grain bins are located drop siding. A simple, practical, convenient above the 10 ft. driveway, and grain can be pork-producing plant. spouted to a wagon below. Grain is elevated by a portable elevator. The capacity of corn crib is 2,649 LE: til ig fk hynny 1 Laas of this type should be built with ridge running North and South, so that the sun’s rays will strike all the pens. The corn crib located at the north end will shelter the house from the prevailing winds. The dimen a he bu. of ear corn, and the bins hold hans approximately 1,500 bushels of EFL small grain. ‘ | This is a modern crib and . ras | | “ granary, designed to carry maxi- in i Pes a mum loads. The entire lower i floor is of concrete. The plank ! ' 7 | frame is well braced and covered ] - 66° Oo" “| with standard cribbing. » GROUND-f’ LOOR’ P LAN- Page One Hundred Ninety-one HUNT: HELM -+-FERRIS & CO Star Hay Barn No. 26 HIS Hay Barn is not a temporary shed, al he but a permanent and substantial struc- ture which will add greatly to the value of any farm. The over-all dimensions of the barn are 30 ft. by 84 ft., and the height from grade to ridge is approximately 36 ft. It has a capacity of 130 tons of hay. The roof is carried by a well designed truss. The walls are thoroughly braced and trussed. The frame can be covered with vertical drop siding, or barn boards with wood or steel bat- tens. The super-structure of the building is carried on concrete piers. The barn has no concrete floor, but this feature can be added if desired. The large driveway doors at the side and gable end permit the entrance of a load of Page One Hundred Ninety-two hay. The grade doors are conveniently arranged for the baling of hay. Where increased storage of forage crops is desired, this barn will prove a paying investment. Always Specify Star ‘‘Harvester’’ Hay Tools No matter what kind or style of hay or grain storage barn you may build, you can get STAR Hay Tools for it and make it a better and more profitable building. STAR“ Harvester” Hay Tools have won the highest endorsement from thousands of American farmers wherever hay or grain is stored. They are built with the strength that insures long, satisfactory service and are designed to give you all the latest labor-saving conveniences that years of study and experience could produce. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Farm Poultry House No. 27 HIGH, well drained, sloping area with a southern exposure is the ideal place to locate the permanent poultry house, if the best results are to be expected from laying hens during any season of the year. The building should be situated with a view towards saving time and labor in caring for the birds. Direct sunlight should reach every part of the house. Ventilation is so important that it determines, to a large extent, the design _40*+0"_ 20-0" 88 1 TIT —_[ROOSTS | mM [ —Jeoaro iif T_T WINDOW 7 MUSLIN *FLOOR - PLAN® Wisi ScREEN of the house. Poultrymen agree that some form of the open front, such as shutters, muslin curtains, or wire netting, supplies the best system of ventilation. To obtain the best results, the house should be so constructed that it can be made perfectly tight except part of the south side, which always should be left open to admit fresh air. It should be rat and vermin proof. The outside dimensions of the hen house shown above, are 20 ft. x 40 ft. The concrete foundation wall is 8 in. wide and 20 in. deep. The shed roof type of construction is used, with 9 ft. studs in the front and 4 ft. 6 in. studs in the rear. The outside walls are covered with drop siding. The muslin curtains and sash are hinged, and can be left up. The dropping board, perches, and nests are arranged on the back wall. The perches can be hooked up when cleaning. A large, dry, mash hopper is built into the middle partition. There is an elevated platform underneath the muslin front providing room for water, grit, and shell hoppers. Each unit of 20 ft. has a capacity of 100 hens, and as many units can be built as desired. Page One Hundred Ninety-three HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & CO-s. on RF Vi» : |= gueepene OF GUERNSEY ae via ai ak Visitors Always Welcome WALDORF FARMS 0. F KINNEY, Tree KINWOOD REALTY CORPORATION, Owners Breeders of Pure Bred Stock Guernsey Cattle Berkshire Hogs S. C, White Leghorn Poultry NORTH CHATHAM, COLUMBIA COUNTY, N, Y. On the Albany Southern R, R Waldorf Station Office: Waldorf Building Albany, N. ie WO. ae ae allshalrey Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co., Harvard, Tl. Gent lemen; In answer to yours of recent date we are indeed glad to endorse the use of the Star \Jater Bowl. We have been using them for over eighteen months and would not care to return to the old system of allowing water to run through the manger. They have not only increased the flow of milk but we believe are very beneficial to the health of the cows, allowing them to have fresh water when needed and not contaminated by any other animal. Yours truly, OF K/A WALDORF FARMS. ie ia Page One tlundred Ninety-four x HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & CO sas Special Features About Star Carriers and eres any litter carrier is a good investment. It’s a labor-saving de- vice that is needed in every barn. But, there’s a difference in litter carriers just as there’s a difference in other barn equipment. A litter carrier should give long service. Even tho it saves its cost every few months, there is no reason why a litter carrier should not give many years of good hard service. STAR Litter Carriers are built to last. They are simple, which means less likelihood of getting out of order. They are extra a strong, which means withstanding long, severe service. They are built with every sensible feature for convenience of operation. They are in a variety of types to suit the } purchaser’s needs. And they are backed with years of experience and the broadest, . ‘ iron-clad guarantee. Just remember this one point. We have never heard of any farmer who would take a STAR Carrier out of his barn for the price he paid for it. Three Kinds of Star Carriers Regardless of the arrangement of the barn i you can get aSTAR Carrier adapted to its needs. +! No barn arrangement is so complicated but that i a STAR Carrier can be made to work in it suc- rt i cessfully. ; { To meet every need, three distinct. lines of STAR Carriers have been designed, and are fully illustrated and described in this catalog. Page One Hundred Ninety-six STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Nhy Farmers Prefer Them 1. Those to operate on STAR Double Angle Steel Track both in the barn and outside, using either swinging booms or stationary track in the yard. (See page 198.) 2. Those to operate on STAR Double Oval Steel Track in the barn and Rod Track in the yard. (See pages 216 and 218.) 3. Those to operate on STAR Rod Track both in the barn and inthe yard. (See pages 216 and 224.) SIMPLE, SERVICEABLE, SECURE— STAR Carriers are simple, practical and durable. Each individual part of the Carrier is built for _ service and will stand the weight or strain placed upon it in use. QUICK HOIST—The tub is raised by an endless chain running over the main drive wheel operating the shaft. The lifting power afforded by the drive wheel, and the double purchase effect secured by the chain running under the pulleys at each end of the bail, makes it easy to raise. This device works rapidly, raising the tub in one-third the time ordinarily required. RAPID LOWERING—The tub may be instantly lowered by pulling the trip chain, which releases the ratchet, allowing it to descend freely to any point desired. You do not have to work to lower the tub; it drops of its own weight, controlled by the friction brake which works on the ratchet. THE STAR CHANNEL BAIL—The chan- nel bail serves two purposes—it protects the tripping mechanism so that it cannot get out of order, and gives great strength and rigidity to the tub. The carrier tub is held rigidly by latches in the bail, these latches locking both ends of the tub. A chain running in the groove of the bail connects each latch with the double eye tripping lever on top of the bail. The tub can be un- latched only by pressure on this lever. Both latches lock and unlock simultaneously, allowing the tub to.dump either way. Page One Hundred Ninety-seven * HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & COoO- Reproduced from Actual Photograph of the No. 333 Star Litter Carrier Full Roller Bearing for STAR Double Angle Steel Track a HINK of getting three carriers in one!” ee is exactly what you can get with this outfit. The conveyor of this No. 333 STAR Litter Carrier are interchangeable with the STAR Feed Carrier Body and the STAR milk can carrier rack, as illustrated on pages 200, 201 and 202. This means an economy of equipment, and much greater convenience in doing -barn work. Changing from one carrier to the Page One Hundred Ninety-eight other means simply unhooking the tub or rack. This is something new in litter carrier equipments. You will want it in your barn. And once you have it, you will never want to get along without it. The conveyor operates on STAR Double Angle Steel Track in the barn in connection with either swinging boom outside or stationary track supported by posts. a S TAR LINE No. 333 Star EQUIPMENT Litter Carrier (Continued) SPECIFICATIONS DOUBLE ANGLE STEEL TRACK — described on page 206. LAG SCREW HANGERS for Double Angle Steel Track—described on page 206. SWIVEL TRACKER WHEELS — affording a double bearing on the track; diameter 414 inches. Each Tracker Wheel operates on 12 extra long, cold rolled steel bearings surrounding a shouldered axle pin of special hardened steel. MALLEABLE SUPPORTING BRACKETS — con- nected to the trucks by heavy cold rolled swivel heads. HORIZONTAL SHAFT —on which the wrap chains wind. This shaft revolves in the supporting brackets which afford a four-point suspension, and turns on 76 cold rolled, hardened bearings contained in the supporting brackets. FOUR-POINT SUSPENSION — The tub is sus- pended by wrap chains from four points on the shaft which gives not only a double purchase on the load but also eliminates end motion. The wrap chains are made of close link Machine Chain and will wind closely and neatly around the horizontal shaft without kinking or breaking. HAND CHAIN — The tub is raised by an endless chain operating over the main drive wheel secured to the end of the shaft. When the tub is raised to the shaft it becomes rigid so that there is no swinging motion. RATCHET AND BRAKE — The tub is lowered by pulling the trip chain which releases the ratchet, allowing the tub to descend freely to any point desired. Additional pressure on the trip chain acts as a brake, giving the operator control of the speed in descending. CHANNEL BAIL —Holds tub perfectly rigid, protects the tripping mechanism and adds strength to the tub. Fitted with loops for holding hooks and pulleys for interchanging with feed and milk can carriers. BAIL LATCHES — The tub is held rigidly upright by latches locking both ends. A chain running in the groove of the bail connects both latches with the tripping lever and operates them in unison. TRIPPING LEVER — The latches hold the tub at each end and are released by pulling on the trip chain attached to the tripping lever. CHAIN GUIDE — Malleable iron—keeps the hand chain in line with the main drive wheel and prevents it from jumping off. TUB — Constructed of heavy galvanized steel. Ends are of one piece with flanges formed on the edges, to which the body sheet is riveted and soldered, making it water-tight. The ends are reinforced with heavy galvanized plates; top edges of the tub are reinforced with galvanized angle irons both along the ends and sides; the corners are securely riveted, as is every joint in the construction of the tub. These tubs are indestructible; will not get out of shape, and are self-cleaning when dumped on account of the rounding bottom which permits of no corners in which litter can collect; the shape of the tub makes it possible to carry a larger load than with square or other shaped tub. WEIGHTS AND SIZES OF TUBS Tubs furnished in four sizes, as follows, outside dimensions: No. Width Length Depth Weight Capacity i 41 in. 14 in. 91 lbs. 6 bu. 41 in 17 in. 93 Ibs. 8 bu. 41 in 19 in. 95 lbs. 10 bu. 41 in 24 in. 130 lbs. 12 bu. SWINGING BOOMS — described and illustrated on pages 204 and 205. SWITCHES, CURVES AND OTHER ACCES- SORIES are found on pages 206 to 211, inclusive. No. 333 STAR Litter Carrier, weight, not including tub, 50 pounds, finished in gray enamel. Page One Hundred Ninety-nine i: HUNT- HELM - FERRIS & CO- Reproduced from Actual Photograph of the No. 334 Star Feed Carrier Full Roller Bearing, for Use on STAR Double Angle Steel Track A NECESSITY—Time has proven that a Feed Carrier is a necessity in any dairy or stock barn where more than six head of cattle are kept. STAR Feed Carriers and STAR Feed Trucks have, for a number of years, been a proven success in thousands of dairy barns. SAVES STEPS—Feeding silage and ground grain is a long, tedious chore if the old-fashioned, Page Two Hundred back-breaking basket method is used. A care- ful estimate in a 40-cow stable shows that you will walk from 50 to 70 miles farther in six months’ time feeding silage twice a day with a basket than whileusing a STAR Feed Car or Feed Truck. Saving steps is saving labor, and saving labor is saving money and helps solve the hired help problem on the farm! STAR LINE OVERHEAD TRACK—A Feed Carrier operating on a track suspended from the ceiling is not hindered by different floor levels or by obstructions in the feed alley. It is especially convenient where Feed is to be carried any distance as the outside track can be extended so that the_feed is easily delivered to feeding racks or troughs. AN INVESTMENT—A STAR Feed Carrier will pay for itself in six months’ time by actual time saving. From that time on it represents an investment that pays dividends every day EQUIPMENT in the year. It not only saves time and labor but it makes possible the systematic feeding of a balanced ration, so necessary in the pro- duction of a maximum yield of milk. The Feed Tub is easily raised and lowered by its own weight. It can be held at any desired height while feeding. Any boy large enough to do feeding can operate a STAR Feed Carrier easily and successfully. Tub is instantly detachable as shown below in Fig. 843, and may be replaced with litter tub shown in Fig. 333 on page 198. SPECIFICATIONS OPERATION — The Hoist and Trucks of the No. 334,STAR Feed Carrier are identically the same as those used on the No. 333 STAR Litter Carrier of which detailed description and specifications are given on page 198. CHANNEL STEEL BAILS—of 11% x 17-inch channel steel. The high bails are made oval so as not to interfere in any way with the filling of the tub or the feeding. They are securely bolted to the tub and extend almost to the bottom, reinforcing the sides. Fitted with loops for holding hooks and pulleys to interchange with litter and milk can carriers. GALVANIZED ENDS AND BOTTOM — give a smooth surface from which to shovel. This heavy galvanized steel is securely bound and reinforced at sides and bottom. FEED TUB — Sides are of best selected wood, well seasoned and kiln- dried, clear and free from knots. The shape permits shoveling from either end and is therefore practicable to be used by two men, one working from either end Size of tub—68 inches long, 26 inches wide, 24 inches deep. Capacity—Approximately 16 bushels. FINISH—All Steel and malle- able iron parts finished in gray enamel, baked on. Woodwork after being carefully sandpapered, is given a lead and oil coat, after which it is finished with a final waterproof coat of special varnish-enamel. Weight of Carrier complete with tub, 125 pounds. INSPECTION — All STAR Feed Carriers and Feed Trucks are subjected to five inspections before they finally leave the shipping room. SWITCHES, CURVES, TRACK and other acces- sories are described and illustrated on pages 206 to 211, inclusive. The No. 334 STAR Feed Carrier illustrated opposite is shown in connection with STAR Double Angle Steel Track. It is also furnished for use on STAR Double Oval Steel Track when so specified. Fig. 843 Feed Tub being removed to permit use of Litter Carrier Tub Page Two Hundred One ~ SS a Pome Wee erry x HOUONT- HELM -FERRIS & CO * Reproduced from Actual Photograph of the No. 413 Star Milk Can Carrier Full Roller Bearing, for use on Star Double Angle Steel Track HIS illustration shows our new and improved raising and lower- ing STAR Milk Can Carrier. Many attempts have been made to construct a Milk Can Carrier that would perform the maximum amount of work with the minimum amount of labor. We believe, therefore, that the STAR MILK CAN CARRIER will at once commend itself to every dairyman. OPERATION: This carrier oper- ates exactly like the No. 333 STAR Litter Carrier described and illustrated on pages 198 and 199; has the same con- veyor and raising and lowering device. To this conveyor may be hooked the —— —_—— — S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 413 Star Milk Can Carrier (Continued) litter tub shown in Fig. 333 on page 198, or the feed tub shown in Fig. 334 on page 200. Instead of suspending a tub from the winding chains, the sheaves through which the winding chains operate are hooked to both ends of a steel bar. Steel straps are suspended from the main bar with hook ends which engage the milk can handles. These steel straps are spaced the proper distance apart to admit the use of a strainer without having to detach the cans from the time they are taken empty from the milk house to the time they are returned filled. As the cans can be lowered to within an inch of the floor, it is unnecessary to bring them into con- tact with the barn floor, assuring a perfectly sanitary condition. When the carrier is run into the milk house, the cans may be lowered into the cooling tank by merely pulling down on the trip chain, releasing the ratchet on the drive wheel. The speed in descending can be regulated by the hand chain. This carrier is a distinct improve- ment over the platform type with which it is not only necessary to lift the cans on and off the platform, but there is always a chance of their slipping off when going around a curve. Those who daily have to lift and carry the filled cans from the barn to the milk house, put them into the cooling tank and then lift them out again, will appreciate at a glance the saving in time and doing away with a lot of hard work made possible by the installation of a STAR Milk Can Carrier. SPECIFICATIONS MAIN BAR—51 inches long of 114 x 114 inch T-rail steel to which the malleable sheave frames are hooked and from which the three pairs of steel can hooks are suspended. CAN HOOKS—engaging the handles of milk cans, of #3; x 1!4-inch steel, securely attached to the main bar. SWITCHES, CURVES, TRACK and other accessories are found on pages 206 to 211, inclusive. FINISH—Gray enamel, baked on. No. 413 STAR Milk Can Carrier, 3 cans, weight complete, 70 lbs. If single can carrier is desired, No. 419. specify Either the three can or single can carriers are furnished for use with either STAR Double Angle Steel Track, STAR Double Oval Steel Track, or Rod Track, when so specified. Page Two Hundred Three * HUNT- HELM- FERRIS & COs Reproduced from Photographs of Star Swinging Booms in Actual Use STAR LINE EQUIPMENT The Star Swinging Boom HE STAR Swinging Boom represents the most satisfactory method of supporting track outside of the barn. It leaves the yard entirely clear, there being no supporting posts to interfere with the use of the yard or to cause injuries to cattle or horses; no lumber to rot out or break. The STAR Swinging Boom makes possible a dumping area eight or ten times greater than with a post supported track. When not in use, the boom may be swung around against the barn. This feature is especially desirable where the hay is taken in at the end of the barn, as the boom is not in the way. The track inside of the barn and that suspended from the boom is connected by the Sliding Removable Section shown in Figure 438. The length of the boom depends upon the height of the barn. The distance from boom to the clevis, from which the guy rods are suspended, should be at least 3 to 5 feet greater than one-third of the total length. If a 30-foot boom is desired, the guy rods should be attached 13 to 15 feet or more above the boom itself. The boom is attached to the barn by means of our patented hinge shown in Fig. 438, which straddles the door rail. Pivoted in this hinge is the boom itself of suitable length and supported by guy rods secured to the barn by clevis and plate directly above boom hinge. SPECIFICATIONS MALLEABLE BOOM HINGE — straddles door rail, a 7% x 51-inch pin forms the pivot and connects the part of the hinge secured to the boom with the part attached to the barn. BOOM — constructed of heavy 2 x 2-inch galvanized high carbon steel angles, from which track is suspended by malleable clamps and track hangers. This construc- tion is much stronger and more lasting than booms of ordinary gas pipe. BOOM HANGERS — of suitable length to suspend the track approximately 6 inches below the boom. If for any reason it is necessary to place the boom hinge above the door rail, longer hangers are necessary. When ordering longer boom hangers, specify the number of inches ‘longer than regular.” SLIDING REMOVABLE SECTION — This pat- ented feature is one of the strongest arguments in favor of a STAR Boom. It is built of malleable iron. This section telescopes as the boom turns around in a half circle. It allows the carrier to leave the barn even when the boom is standing at an angle, without friction or binding. The Sliding section may be removed from the pivots at one end or at both when the sliding doors are to be closed. If double sliding doors are used, these doors may be notched to fit closely around the sliding removable section so that it is never necessary to remove it. STAR DOUBLE ANGLE STEEL TRACK page 206. — See LENGTHS — Booms are furnished regularly in the following lengths: 15 ft., 20 ft., 30 ft., 35 ft., and 40 ft. Furnished complete with track hangers, guy rods, truss rods, side arms, etc. The side arms and truss rods are not necessary with the 15-ft. and 20-ft. lengths. When ordering, specify distance from the point where hinge of boom will rest, to the point where the guy rods fasten to the barn. STAR Swinging Boom, complete, including Sliding Removable Section, hinge, track, hangers and all acces- sories, average weight, 71/ pounds per foot. Page Two Hundred Five a ee EE E—E—E—_ ——————————————Ee * HUNtT- HELM - FERRIS & CO Page Star Double Angle Steel Track SPECIFICATIONS STAR DOUBLE ANGLE STEEL TRACK, as the name suggests, is built of two pieces of %-inch high carbon steel angles, sep- arated by malleable spools and securely riveted. This construction will test out stronger than anything used for a similar purpose—with hangers spaced 12 inches apart it has been used successfully to carry loads averaging 1,000 pounds to the foot. The two angles not only afford a double tread for the tracker wheels but are joined so rigidly that the track lines up perfectly and remains so. Compare this - perfect alignment of any installation where Double Angle Steel Track is used with ; the ‘‘snake’s crawl'’ appearance of ordinary one-piece tracks. Figure the saving in installation—the saving in keeping aligned and lastly the appearance and then decide the track to use in your barn, Star Double Angle Steel Track is finished in japan—weight per foot, 2 pounds. Furnished in 6 and 12-ft. lengths. STOP BLOCK FOR "END OF TRACK, Fig. 363 (not illustrated), weight each, 14 lb. LAG SCREW HANGER—accomplishes two things well—makes the track perfectly rigid, doing away with swinging motion and keeps it level always, no matter how uneven the joists. The diameter of this hangeris 7-16 inch. It is threaded 34 inches. Note the square shoulder just above the track on which a wrench can be used at any time to keep the track level A track can carry no more than the hanger supporting it. With the lag screw hanger, the weight is always directly below. The advantage of this method of suspending track over that of using track hangers fitted into the side of the track will be apparent if you will raise any given a weight with the arm straight down and then Fig. 414.—Lag attempt to raise the same weight while holding Screw Hanger the arm at a right angle. When installing, use a chalk line to line up the hangers—screw them into the joists, remove the burrs and washers, then attach the track—you don't have to bother with the track until the hangers are in place. SIZES—The 10!4-inch lag screw hangers allow the track to hang approximately 6 inches below joists or wood supports in the yard. Specify this size where wood timbers are used to support track out- side or where there are no beams to clear inside of the barn. These hangers are usually spaced 24 inches apart but construc tion of track permits spacing them to suit the arrangement of joists. When deter- mining the number of hangers, allow four for each curve. The stock sizes of Lag Screw Hangers follow. Where longer hangers are needed on account of extra high ceilings, simply specify the distance from joists to track and the proper length will be supplied. Fig. 87.—Ridge Fig. Pole Hanger 26.—Joist Bracket Fig. 339. Hook Hanger Ilundred Six A Fig. 444 Fig. 414, 1014-in. Lag Screw Hangers, weight per doz., 5 lbs. Fig. 414, 1514-in. Lag Screw Hangers, weight per doz., 71% lbs. clears 6 in. beams. Fig. 414, 1714sin. Lag Screw Hangers, weight per doz., 9 lbs., clears 8-in. beams. Fig. 414, 1914-in. Lag Screw Hangers, weight per doz., 10 lbs., clears 10-in, beams. Fig. 414, 2114-in. Lag Screw Hangers, weight per doz., 11 lbs., clears 12-in. beams. MALLEABLE TRACK SPLICE—included in each shipment without extra charge. Joins and holds sections of track rigidly so an even strength is maintained Accessories for Double Angle Steel Track Where Lag Screw Hangers are not used, then Fig. 339 Eye Hangers should be specified. They can be used with either Joist Brackets, Fig. 126, or Ridge Pole Hangers, Fig. 87, or in connection with double eye hangers, Fig. 377, and Screw Eyes, Fig. 376, where the track must hang a greater distance below joists than usual. Ordinarily figure one Fig. 339 Hanger with either Joist Bracket or Ridge Pole Hanger for every two feet of track and four of each for each curve. Construction of track and curves permits hangers to be spaced to suit joists—the 6%4-in. length should be specified for use with wood supports in yard or where there are no beams to clear in the barn. The stock sizes of Fig. 339 Hangers are shown below: Fig. 339, Eye Hangers, 6%4-in., weight per doz., 5 lbs. Fig. 339, Ey beams. » Hangers, 11%4-in., weight per doz., 7 |bs., clears 6-in. Fig. 339, Eye Hangers, 13%4-in., weight per doz., 9 lbs., clears 8-in beams. Fig. 339, Eye Hangers, 15%4-in., weight per doz., 10 lbs., clears 10-in. beams. Fig. 126, Joist Brackets for use with Fig. 389 Hangers, weight per dozen, 3% lbs. Fig. 87, Ridge Pole Hangers for use with Fig. 339 Hangers, weight per doz., 5% lbs. Fig. 376, Screw Eyes for use with Fig. 339 Hangers, weight per doz., 4% lbs. Fig. 377, Double Eye Hangers for use with Fig. 339 Hangers, 15 in., weight per doz., 10 Ibs. Fig. 377, Double Eye Hangers for use with Fig. 339 Hangers, 20 in., weight per doz., 12 lbs. —_— Fig. 376. Fig. 377.—Double Eye Hanger Screw-eye STAR LINE E UIPMENT Star Two-way and Three-way Switches For Use in Connection with Star Double Angle Steel Track OPERATION A simple downward pull on either hand chain will cause the hinged section to travel either to right or left, register and lock automatically in perfeet alignment, and just the instant that the hinged section is re leased from its position the safety lock drops down and guards the open end of either straight track or curve no watchman could be as faith ful or efficient. Specify Two-way Switch when branching off either to right or left of main track. Allow 29 inches between the two ends of the main track, then bolt the switch in place. Specify Three-way Switch when branching off to both right and left of main track. Allow 29 inches between the two ends of the main track, then bolt switch in place. Two-way Switch, weight each, 26 pounds. Three-way Switch, weight each, 29 pounds. Finish Black Japan. When ordering curves for use with Switches, specify whether for Two-way or Three-way Switches. Curves illus- trated and described on page 208. CONSTRUCTION HE STAR Overhead Switches, illustrated on this page, have been perfected to a point far in advance of anything similar offered, regardless of price. We can offer you no better argument for installing a STAR Overhead system of track for any purpose than the per fected which we have been furnishing a number of years. These switches are an assurance against all switch annoyances strong and efficient of order, nothing to break, and what's more, the carrier cannot run off when the switch is open, The automatic safety locks take care of that, switches they are simple, nothing to get out STAR Switches are constructed entirely of the best malleable iron, except the hinged section and the backbone, which are of the same strong construction a8 STAR Double Angle Steel Track itself. They are rigidly attached to the track and The back bone and malleable legs on the frame are joined curve ends by malleable splices, as rigidly as though they were cast in one piece, yet this backbone is adjustable in order that the switch itself can be lined up with the track and curves which it connects, Fig, 319 Vaue Two Wundred Seven x HUNT+- HELM -FERRIS & CO-- ce ee 7 TAR Double Angle Steel Track can be made to work satisfactorily in any barn regardless of the number of turns or how complicated the arrangement. The curves are of the same construction as Star Double Angle Steel Track, illustrated on page 206, except that before joining the angles, they are formed separately to an accurate radius in special dies for that purpose. Allow 4 Lag Screw Hangers (see page 206) for each curve. All curves finished in black japan to match track and switches. Removable Section of Track The illustration below shows the Star Re- movable Section to be taken out when the door is closed. This short section is fitted with malleable ends which release the safety locks when the section is in place. The safety locks are most important as they automatically drop down to prevent the carrier from running off the open ends of track when the removable section is taken out. | = es Wall Bracket For Wood Ridge Pole Fig. 361 Where Wood Ridge Pole is used outside of the barn to support the track, this can be attached to the barn by wall bracket, Fig. 361. This wall bracket of malleable iron is made to give the necessary support to the end of the Wood Ridge Pole and to provide clear- ance for the door rail and sliding doors. Wall Bracket, Fig. 361, for Wood Ridge Pole, weight, 6 Ibs. Page Two Hundred Eight DOMMIMe 4 Curves For Use With Star SL . Double Angle Steel Track and Switches In Fig. 346, A shows position of safety lock, when Star Removable section is removed, pre- venting carrier from leaving track. B shows position of safety lock when Star Removable section is in place, permitting carrier to pass. This Removable Section is also used to ad- vantage where two tracks cross at right angles as a space of 18 inches can be left in both tracks at the point of intersection and the Removable Section is interchangeable with either track. By reinforcing the Star Removable Section and making it longer, it can be taken out when swinging doors are closed. When specifying reinforced removable sections for swinging doors, state the length wanted. This length should be at least six inches more than the width of the door to allow plenty of clearance. Star Removable Sections for Sliding Doors or Cross Overs where tracks intersect, regular length 18 inches, weight, 6 lbs. Star Reinforced Removable Sections for Swinging Doors, any length up to 5 feet 6 inches. approximate weight, 71/2 lbs. per foot. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Support for Star Double Angle Steel Track Outside of Barn HE above illustration shows our unique All-steel support for STAR Double Angle Steel Track in the yard where a swinging boom or wood ridge pole is not desired. This steel support is similar to the STAR Swinging boom construction, illustrated on pages 204 and 205. It is made of two 2-inch high carbon galvanized steel angles rigidly joined by hanger supporting clamps. This construction is very strong and durable as well as neat in appearance. STAR Steel Columns, shown on the following page, are used to support These columns should as described and this steel construction. be placed ten or twelve feet apart and securely set in concrete. STAR Steel Support for Double Angle Steel Track complete, including track, hangers and attachments—everything except supporting columns, average weight per foot, 6 pounds. Page Two Hundred Nine HUNT -HELM -FERRIS & COs. Star Steel Columns and Brackets For Supporting STAR Double Angle Steel Track N FIGURE 781 we illustrate a Steel Column 4 inches in diameter, with triangular bracket from which the Steel Support illustrated and described on the preceding page or Wood Ridge Pole, Fig. 782, can be neatly and permanently suspended. In figuring the height of the columns, allow at least two feet for an anchorage below ground level. Each column should be firmly set in concrete abutment. . The triangular bracket allows for the proper clearance of the carrier. This bracket is made of 1°¢-inch O. D. pipe and attached to the upright column by malleable clamps. Steel Columns—Diameter, 4 inches; height to order; weight, per foot, 5 pounds. Ornamental Ball for Steel Column, weight, each, 6 pounds. Triangular bracket, complete as illustrated, weight, each, 20 pounds. When ordering, specify whether for Steel Support or Wood Ridge Pole. Finish: Gray enamel. Fig. 783 shows a special horizontal bracket for carrying the Steel Support illustrated on the previous page when installed along side of barn. This does away with posts or other obstructions and leaves the space along side of barn entirely | clear. A malleable split flange is used to attach bracket to the side of barn. Horizontal Bracket for Steel support complete as illustrated, weight each, 12 pounds. Finish: Gray enamel. Fig. 781 Fig. 784 illustrates a simple and economical method of suspending the Wood Ridge Pole supporting Double Angle Steel Track along side of barn. The track should be attached to 2 x 8 or 2 x 10 timbers which can be held away from the barn a distance of 4 feet 6 inches by wood pieces spaced 6 to 8 feet apart. Strap irons attached by Lag Screws support the entire wood construction. This illustration offers a practical solution of the problem of installing Double Angle Steel Track suspended from Wood Ridge Pole along side of barn. Fig. 783 Page Two Hundred Ten STAR LINE EQUIPMENT How to Order Carriers and Accessories for Star Double Angle Steel Track CARRIER Select the carrier and if for Litter, specify the size of tub—either No. 2, 4, 6 or 8. TRACK —Take inside measurements first as though the track were to be installed with square turns. Add the number of feet required for out in the yard and then deduct 8 feet of track for each curve used without switch and 4 feet of track for each curve for use with switch. (If a Swinging Boom is desired, do not figure any track, hangers or accessories for use outside of barn, as everything necessary will be furnished with the boom.) Track is shipped in 6 and 12-foot sections. HANGERS — Fig. 414 Lag Screw Hangers are universally used. Figure one for every joist if 2 feet apart, one for every other joist if spaced 16 inches apart. Always figure 1014- inch hangers for track suspended from Wood Ridge Pole in the yard and for inside of barn if there are no beams to clear. If carrier passes under the beams on which the joists rest, then measure the size of the beams and by referring to page 206 you can determine the length of hangers needed for use inside of the barn. Track should be installed level where possible. To determine length of hangers for different heights of ceiling, first determine length of hangers needed for suspending track under the lowest ceiling, and the hangers required for the higher ceiling will be as much longer as one ceiling is higher than the other. SWINGING BOOM — If Swinging Boom is desired, specify length, 15, 20, 30, 35 or 40 feet, and the distance above hinge that the guy rods will be attached to the barn. The boom includes everything necessary for use outside of barn, also the sliding removable section (see page 205). If the boom hinge instead of straddling the door rail, which would be impossible with a single sliding door, is to be attached to the barn above the door rail, then specify length boom hangers that will be required. Simply specify how many inches longer than regular these boom hangers are to be. Regular length boom hangers allow the track to hang 6 inches below the boom. Swinging booms are also used frequently to suspend track over driveway, so that when swung out of the way, the driveway is clear. When ordering booms for driveways, specify the exact length and also specify one cast iron boom bracket to support the end of the boom opposite from the hinge to hold it in place. REMOVABLE SECTION — Specify one Removable Section for each sliding door through which track passes (see page 208), except when swinging boom is ordered, in which case the sliding removable section is furnished in con- nection with the boom. Also specify removable section for each place where two tracks intersect at right angles. REINFORCED REMOVABLE SECTION —Specify one Reinforced Removable section for each swinging door out of which track extends, being sure to state length. Length should be at least 6 inches longer than width of door. SWITCHES — Specify two-way switch for each place where track branches off to either right or left of the main line. Specify three- way switch for use where track branches off to both right and left of main line. CURVES — Specify one regular 90-degree curve for each right angle turn where switch is not to be used. Specify one curve for use with two-way switch for each two-way switch used. Specify two curves for use with three- way switch for each three-way switch used. END STOP — Fig. 363. Specify one for each end of track to keep car from running off the track. WALL BRACKET — Specify one to use in connecting Wood Ridge Pole to barn (see page 208). DETACHABLE SECTION — If a section of wood support in the yard or across driveway is made removable to allow passageway for teams, specify a Detachable Section of track the same length as the wood ridge pole made removable. This detachable section is attached to and can be taken out with the section of wood ridge pole. Page Two Hundred Eleven HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & COs Reproduced from Actual Photograph of the No. 443 Star Feed Truck HE STAR Floor Feeding Truck is a necessity in every barn where an overhead feed carrier is not used. It is lower in cost than a suspended carrier since track hangers and switches are not required. It can be operated to any place in the barn, run directly under the feed or silo chutes—can be used not only for carrying feed, but also bedding, baled shavings or any other material to be delivered to any part of the barn. It is easily operated over a concrete or wood floor and can be turned in its own length. Read the description on opposite page. Easy Running Short Turning Here‘is a feed truck that is very easy to handle. It is built low down, easy to fill and feed from, STAR Equipped Barn, Owned by Myron Stratton Home Farm, Colorado Springs, Col. Page Two Hundred Twelve and rides on wheels properly spaceaas to balance the load. It is built, reinforced and finished so that it will not warp, crack or go to pieces under the hardest usage. No point for strength and durability has been overlooked. The heavy hardwood frame bolted together, extends the full length of the bottom, with an extra full length center-piece reinforcing the steel bottom of the tub. The hardwood frame to which the trucks are secured is built entirely sepa- rate from the tub and is in no way de- pendent upon the tub for support. This is a truck that will last for many years of hard service. The care exercised in its construction is the reason why you will find it in use in thousands of the finest barns in this country. No expense has been spared to build a truck that is stronger, more lasting and neater in appearance than any similar truck offered. * S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS TUB bottom of one piece, heavy gal- vanized steel securely fastened to the sides of selected wood, well seasoned, kiln-dried, clear and free from knots, sap and check. Reinforced at sides, bottom and ends with galvanized steel corner plates. Truck is fitted with hand-holds at ends. upon which tub rests of best “anu Selecteds 2 x <4 inch hard maple, kiln-dried, three pieces extending lengthwise of truck with bolted cross pieces at ends. Frame built entirely separate from tub, and not dependent upon tub for strength. MAIN WHEELS Gray iron, we inches in diameter; 2 inch face; machined bearings turning on cold rolled axle, 1 inch in diameter. “pete HUNT. HELM. FeRnis & Co. MF aS FRONT SWIVEL WHEEL #7 @ ¥ inches in diameter; 1!4 inch face, with cold rolled steel shaft; swiveled to permit truck to be turned in its own length. All wheels spaced for easy moving of heavy loads. Wheels and iron work gray FINISH enamel, baked on. Wood work given prime coat of lead and oil after which it is given a final brush coat of special varnish-enamel. Color, gray. SIZESAND Regular size (for feed WEIGHTS alleys, 36 inches wide or wider) 68 inches long, 26 inches wide, 24 inches deep. Capacity, 16 bushels. Weight, 190 lbs. Larger size (for feed alleys 40 inches wide or wider), 71 inches long, 30 inches wide, 30 inches deep. Capacity, 25 bushels. Weight, 225 lbs. TRUCK HARVAMD ILE Page Two Hundrec * 1 Thirteen > 4 HUNT: HELM- FERRIS & CO; No. 836 STAR “All Purpose”’ Barn Truck (Patent Applied for) Fig. 836 ERE is a Barn Truck that can be used for carrying bulk feed, ensilage, cans of milk, barrels H of water or swill, bagged grain and for other trucking purposes common in doing the regular chores around the barn. It is an ‘‘ALL-PURPOSE” Barn Truck for practically the same price as an ordinary Feed Truck. Fig. 836 shows the truck with feed box in position complete with tongue. Where bulk feed is being carried, it is generally more handy to push the truck rather than pull it. The tongue is equipped with a special constructed hinge, so that it can be detached or attached to the truck almost instantly without removing a bolt——simply raise up the front end and remove or replace the tongue as desired. When tongue is in position it is as secure as if bolted. ~~ The Castor Wheel is so constructed that it will swing under truck, which > makes it possible to turn the truck in its own length. ' 4 Fig. 838 shows the feed box being removed by one man. All that is ) ; necessary is to lift up the front end of box to about the position shown in i illustration, and it will automatically release from the truck proper. Then stand the box up on end against side of barn or partition; the box is replaced by lowering it, so that steel projections on the truck bed fit into the two slots cut in the steel plate attached to bottom of the Feed Box; then continue to lower it until in regular position when the steel pin forming part of castor wheel will fit into steel eye attached to front of box, holding it securely. When the Feed Box of the STAR ‘All-Purpose’? Truck is removed it can be used for any number of purposes such as carrying milk cans, barrels, bags of grain, etc. yas , - — Fig. 837 shows the truck loaded with eX ——— five 8-gallon cans of milk. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT It can also be used as a hand truck, as shown in Fig. 839 by removing the castor wheel and tongue. This can be done instantly be releasing the spring pin which permits the wheel, etc., to slip out of position when front of truck is raised. The castor wheel can be replaced by just the opposite operation. SPECIFICATIONS BOX Bottom of one piece, heavy galvanized steel, securely fastened to the sides of selected wood, well seasoned, kiln-dried, clear and free from knots, sap and check. Reinforced at sides, bottom and ends with galvanized steel corner plates. Box is fitted with hand-holds at ends. FRAME OR BED~--Frame or bed upon which box rests of 1!% in. x 7% in. steel channel to which floor, made of 2 in. x 7% in. lumber, spaced °% in. apart, is securely attached. Fig. 838 TONGUE—Of hard, kiln-dried, maple, 36 in. x 1%4 in. x 1%4 in., equipped with special hinge for instantly detaching or attaching tongue to swivel truck. MAIN WHEELS—Gray iron, 12 inches, in diameter; 2 in. face, machined bearings turning on cold rolled steel axle, 1 in. in diameter. FRONT SWIVEL WHEEL— Gray iron, 6 in. in diameter; 1!% in. face, swivel fork and all other fittings of best grade malleable iron; equipped with automatic spring pin permitting wheel to be re- moved or replaced; easily released and positive hold; swiveled to permit truck to be turned in its own length. All wheels spaced for easy moving of heavy loads. FINISH—Wheels and iron work, gray enamel, baked on. Wood work given prime coat of lead and oil after which it is given a final brush coat of special varnish-enamel. Color, gray. SIZES AND WEIGHTS~— Box 68 in. long, 26 in. wide, 24 in. deep. Capacity, 16 bushels. Frame and bed, 36 in. x 28 in. Distance from outside to outside of main wheels, 34%, in. Weight, complete with box and tongue, 160 lbs. Weight, less box, 90 lbs. Fig. 839 Page Two Hundred Fifteen > HUNT: HELM- FERRIS & CO: Page Two s Reproduced from Actual Photograph of No. 592 Star Litter Carrier Full Roller Bearing ‘A Combination for STAR Double Oval Steel Track Inside and Rod Track Gutaie Can also be used on Rod Track both inside and outside ECOMMENDED where the returning R feature afforded by the Rod Track and the inside adaptability of the Steel Track is desired. The Double Oval Steel Track in the barn is always level so that there is no tendency for the carrier to move while being loaded. The carrier is given a push at the barn door and re- turns automatically. This carrier can be suc- cessfully installed in any barn no matter how complicated the arrangement, and regardless of the curves and switches required. The popu- larity of this type of Litter Carrier is accounted for by the fact that it combines so many desir- able features of the steel track equipment with those of the rod track outfits. Hundred Sixteen The important connection between the STAR Double Oval Steel Track inside the barn and the Rod Track outside is made with the patented Giant Suspension Bracket which is used at the doorway. This bracket, forms the connection between the two tracks. It allows a direct run from the STAR Double Oval Track to the Rod Track. This patented connection between the inside and outside track is a superior STAR feature which gives you the big advantage of being able to give the carrier a start while it is still inside the barn and depend upon it passing to the outside track with safety. SPECIFICATIONS STAR DOUBLE OVAL STEEL TRACK — des- cribed on page 220. STAR DOUBLE OVAL STEEL TRACK HANG- ERS — described on page 220. SWIVEL TRACKER WHEELS —7 inches in diameter, have a lathe-turned tread. Each tracker wheel operates on 12 extra long, cold rolled steel bearings, sur- rounding a shouldered steel axle pin. TRIPPING DEVICE ~— is so constructed that as soon as it hits the Trip Block the tub automatically releases the Double Latches and unlocks the tub at the bail. See Fig. 599. This device locks and unlocks the tub at both ends in unison. RETURNING BUMPER — Insures the return of the carrier to the barn after dumping. TUB —is made of heavy galvanized steel. Measures 25 x 41 inches and is 14 inches deep. The ends are of one piece with flanges formed on the edges, to which the body sheet is riveted and soldered, making it water-tight. The ends are reinforced with heavy galvanized plates; the top edges of the tub are reinforced with galvanized angle irons, both along the ends and sides; the corners are securely riveted, as is every joint in the construction of the tub. These tubs are inde- structible; will not get out of shape; when dumped, are self-cleaning on account of the rounding bottom which permits of no corners in which litter can collect. The shape of the tub makes it possible to carry a large load. SPRING KEEPERS—which are automatically thrown up into place as the carrier leaves the Double Oval Steel Track for the Rod Track. See Fig. 600. These keepers absolutely prevent the carrier from jumping the track, and also rigidly lock the wheels in line with the track and prevent their binding. As the carrier returns from the Rod Track to the Double Oval, these keepers are automatically thrown down to permit the operation of the carrier on the Steel Track, and to allow the tracker wheels to pass the track hangers. At the same time that the keepers are thrown down, the swivel trucks are un- locked so that the carrier will readily pass the curves and switches. GIANT SUSPENSION BRACKET — supports the Ridg-Rod Connecting Track Coupling. See pages 221 and 222 for complete description. TRIP BLOCK — is 9 inches long, is constructed of very best malleable iron and can be fastened to the Rod Track at any desired point. ROD TRACK —for use outside of barn. Made of special drawn wire in two sizes, 0000 and 000000. KEEPER RELEASE — a simple, unbreakable de- vice which throws the keepers up as the carrier leaves the Steel Track for the Rod, preventing the tracker wheels from jumping the Rod Track and locking them in line. When the carrier returns to the Steel Track this device throws the keepers down so that the tracker wheels can pass the hangers and swivel on the curves. SWITCHES, CURVES AND OTHER ACCES- SORIES for STAR Double Oval Steel Track may be found on pages 220 to 222. SWITCHES, CURVES AND OTHER ACCES- SORIES for Rod Track may be found on pages 226 to 228. No. 592 Litter Carrier — weight complete, 150 pounds. Finished in gray enamel. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Fig. 600—Shows position of Spring Keepers and Suspension Bracket Fig. 599—Tripping Device Page Two Hundred Seventeen > a HUNT - HELM “FERRIS & COs ¥ x S Reproduced from Actual Photograph of the No. 693 Star Litter Carrier Full Roller Bearing, for STAR Double Oval Steel Track Inside and Rod Track Outside This Carrier Can Be Used on Rod Track Both Inside and Outside HIS carrier was designed for operation on STAR Double Oval Steel Track inside the barn and Rod Track outside. With the exception that it is not equipped with the quick raising and lowering device, it is practically identical with the No. 592 STAR Litter Carrier illustrated and described on the Page Two Hundred Eighteen preceding pages, in both operation and results obtained. This carrier is fitted with an adjust- able bail so that the tub can be raised or lowered, when desired, a total distance of about 12 inches. It is recommended and guaranteed to do the work satisfactorily and with a minimum amount of labor. S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 693 Star Litter Carrier (Continued) SPECIFICATIONS STAR DOUBLE OVAL STEEL TRACK— detailed description on page 220. STAR DOUBLE OVAL STEEL TRACK HANGERS—which slide along the groove in the Double Oval Track, may be placed at any desired point. Detailed description may be found on page 220. TRACKER WHEELS—of gray iron, 7 inches in diameter. These wheels have a lathe-turned tread. Each revolves on 12 cold rolled steel bearings so that the carrier runs smoothly and easily. SPRING KEEPERS—attached to the swivel trucks. These are automatically thrown into place when the carrier leaves the Double Oval Track and runs onto the Rod. These keepers absolutely prevent the carrier from jumping the track, and also rigidly lock the wheels in line with the track and prevent their binding. When the carrier leaves the Rod Track for the Double Oval, these keepers are automatically thrown down by a device permit- ting the tracker wheels to pass the hangers. The wheels are unlocked at the same time so that the swivel trucks of the carrier will operate readily on the Curves and Switches. TRIPPING LEVER—made of malleable This lever is connected with chains which release the latches, which lock the tub at both ends of the bail. When this lever strikes the trip block attached to the rod track in the yard, the latches are released instantly and the tub is allowed to turn over before the carrier returns automatically to the barn. Note that when this tripping lever is thrown down at the trip block it remains down so as not to retard the returns sob the) carrier. — It? is returned to its natural upright position by a down pull on iron. the small knob attached for that purpose. THE CHANNEL STEEL BAIL—for rais- ing and lowering of the tub by means of a simple adjustment, a total distance in all of 12 inches. BAIL LATCHES—tThe tub is held rigidly upright by latches locking both ends. A chain running in the groove of the bail connects both latches with the tripping lever and operates them in unison. MALLEABLE BRACES—securely riveted to the arch of the bail, forming a very solid construction. LITTER CARRIER TUB—is made of heavy galvanized steel, heavily reinforced at both ends. Measures 26 x 41 inches and is 14 inches deep, and is so shaped that it is self-cleaning when dumped. GIANT SUSPENSION BRACKET —de- tailed description will be found on pages 221 and 222. SUPPORTS FOR WHEEL FRAME—which are riveted to both bail and bail braces, forming a rigid truss. No. 693 STAR LITTER CARRIER—weight complete, 110 pounds. Finished in gray enamel. STAR Carrier with STAR Track Running to Spreader Shed at STAR Equipped Barn, owned by Wm. Waller, Jr., Barrington, Ill. Page Two Hundred Nineteen > a HOUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO; | No. 593 Star;Double Oval Steel Track TAR DOUBLE OVAL STEEL TRACK, a section of which is shown in Fig. 593, is used in con- nection with RIDG-ROD CAR- RIERS. Each section of track is formed of one piece of 16-gauge steel. The edges are rolled, leaving a slot which runs the full length of the piece. By rolling both edges, double rigidity is secured, the track having sufficient thickness as well as depth, so that it cannot sag nor buckle. Fig.7593 THE SPLICE—Made of an extra long piece of steel which fits inside the track and bolts to each section, making a perfect joint. We guarantee the track to be as strong at the splice as at any other point. Splices furnished free with all orders for track. STAR DOUBLE OVAL STEEL TRACK HANGERS, illustrated in Fig. 593, are made of 14 x 14-inch steel. The 9-inch hanger is adjustable in length from 71% to 9 inches and covers all ordinary requirements. Longer hangers, as listed below, are furnished when necessary. The track can be raised or lowered after it is put up, and carefully leveled. Lag screws 2!%4 x *¢-inches are used to fasten the hangers to the joists. STAR Double Oval Steel Track Hangers furnished in following lengths: Length Weight per dozen Clears 9 inches 14 lbs. 15 os 20) 6-in. beam 17 % 7S}. 8-in. beam 19 ie aX) 10-in. beam 21 “ DOE 12-in. beam Switches for Star Double Oval Steel Track Switches for STAR Double Oval Steel Track are made of best grade malleable iron. The hinged section is quickly and easily operated by a down pull on either of the hand holds attached to the operating chain. When the switch is open, malleable iron safety locks automatically drop down, preventing the carrier from running off the open end. Both TWO AND THREE-WAY SWITCHES are furnished either right or left hand. No. 598 TWO-WAY SWITCH for STAR Double Oval Track, either Right or Left hand Weight, each, 30 pounds. No. 597 THREE-WAY SWITCH for STAR Double Oval Track, either Right of Left Hand. Weight, each, 35 pounds. When ordering, refer to page 223. * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT * No. 596 Curve for Star Double Oval Steel Track IGURE 596 illustrates Curve for STAR Double Oval Steel Track, which is made of high carbon, round edge steel, size 14 x 114 inches. This curve may be bent to any angle. It takes the place of eight feet of track. The ends of the curve are bolted into the ends of the regular STAR double oval track, making a rigid connection at each point. The weight of the STAR Double Oval Steel Track Curve, complete, is 15 lbs. Hangers are packed separately. Giant Suspension Bracket Fig. 595 illustrates the Giant Suspension Bracket which is used to support the connection between double oval steel track in the barn and rod track outside. See Fig. 600 on Page 217. The illustration here shows rod track secured to suspension bracket with coupling about to be placed in position. One end of this coupling fits snugly over the rod track. It is provided with an attachment which holds the rod track securely in place. The other end of the coupling fits into the end of the Double Oval Track and is bolted in place same as a splice, thus making a perfect and rigid joint. If the sill to which the Giant Suspension Bracket is bolted is not perfectly level, the track aes connection can be leveled by the ad- SN justment allowed in bolting it to the bracket. The coupling is so constructed that the keepers on the carrier are thrown down automatically as the carrier enters the barn. See Fig. 600 on Page 217. Page Two Hundred Twenty-one il Giant Suspension Bracket (Continued) The keepers being thrown down, permit the carrier trucks to pass the hangers which support the Double Oval Track and also allow them to swivel at curves. As the carrier leaves the barn, the keepers are thrown up into place so that the wheels cannot jump the rod track. The wheels are locked into line with the rod at the same time. This keeps them from binding, and reduces friction to a minimum. The construction of the Giant Suspension Bracket and Coupling provides for a straight and smooth run from inside of barn to dump. There is no offset at barn door where rod and Double Oval track join. This is an exclusive patented feature with Star construction and solves the problem of a smooth connection at the door, which makes it possible to gather headway with Fig. 594 the loaded carrier before it is given the final Right Hand Giant Suspension Bracket shove to the dump. Giant Suspension Brackets are made either right or left hand. Right or left hand brackets are necessary because the frames supporting the tracker wheels on the carriers must, under all conditions, operate on the side of the track opposite to the side into which the track hangers attach. The right hand bracket is placed on the right hand side of the track looking out of barn. See Figure 594. The left hand bracket is placed on the left hand side of track looking out of barn. See Figure 702. Either right or left hand suspension brack- ets will answer where switches are not used. If switches are used, it is always best to include a rough pencil sketch with the order to indicate the general direction that the track takes inside of the barn, in which case the proper suspension bracket and also the proper switch will be included in the shipment. Giant Suspension Bracket, either right or left hand, weight, each, 14 lbs. Fig. 702 Left Hand Giant Suspension Bracket Page Two Hundred Twenty-two STAR LINE EQUIPMENT How to Order Carriers and Accessories for Star Double Oval Steel Track CARRIER — Select by referring to pages 216 to 219. TRACK—DOUBLE OVAL STEEL TRACK — To determine the amount of Double Oval Steel Track for use inside of barn, take measurements as though the track were to be installed with square turns, then deduct 8 feet of track for each curve not used in connection with a switch and 4 feet of track for each curve used with a switch. Double Oval Steel Track is furnished in 10-foot lengths only. By means of a hack saw shorter lengths can be cut as desired. TRACK HANGERS — STAR Double Oval Steel Track Hangers, Fig. 599, are used to support the track inside the barn. These hangers should be spaced from 18 inches to 2 feet apart, according to the spacing of the joists. Nine inch hangers are sufficiently long except where it is necessary for the carrier to clear the beams supporting the joists. By referring to page 220 you can determine the length hanger necessary to clear any size beam. GIANT SUSPENSION BRACKETS—A _ Giant Suspension Bracket, either right or left hand, is necessary at each point where the carrier runs from the Double Oval Steel Track, used inside of the barn, to the Rod Track, used outside. Either a right or left hand suspen- sion bracket will answer where switches are not used. Right hand suspension brackets are placed on the right hand and left hand suspension brackets are placed on the left hand side of the track looking out of the barn. Where switches are used, it is always best to include a rough pencil sketch with the order to indicate the general direction the track takes inside the barn so that proper suspension bracket will be included in the shipment. SWITCHES — Switches for Double Oval Track, either 2 or 3 way, are furnished either right or left hand. Specify 2 way switch where the track branches off to either right or left of the main line. Specify 3 way switch where track branches off to both right and left of the main line. Right hand switches, either 2 or 3 way, are used with right hand suspension brackets when the hinged end of the switch is nearest the suspension bracket. Right hand switch, either 2 or 3 way, is required when the hinged end of the switch is furthest away from a left hand suspension bracket. Left hand switch, either 2 or 3-way, is used with a left hand sus- pension bracket when the hinged end of the switch is nearest the suspension bracket. Left hand switch, either 2 or 3-way, is used where a right hand suspension bracket is used and where the hinged end of the switch is furthest away from the suspension bracket. When ordering switches, it is always better to send a rough pencil sketch to indicate the general direction the track takes inside the barn, in which case the proper switches, also the proper suspension brackets, will be included in the shipment. CURVES — Specify curve for Double Oval Steel Track at each point where the main track angles off. Also specify a curve for each 2-way switch and 2 curves for each 3-way switch used. These curves are shipped straight so they can be bent either to right or left and to any angle required. END STOP — Specify one end stop, Figure 590, to keep carrier from running off end of Double Oval Track. REMOVABLE SECTION —A removable section is a short piece of track arranged so that it can be lifted out, allowing a sliding door to be closed. While we do not illustrate a removable section for use with Double Oval Track, it can be furnished, if desired. ROD TRACK—When ordering Rod Track for use out of doors, be sure to add at least 10 to 15 feet to the length required to provide for a suitable anchorage inside of the barn. The 0000 Rod Track is the size commonly used. TENSION BOLT — Specify two 30-inch tension bolts for each stretch of Rod Track—one to be used at anchor post in the yard, the other to secure the Rod Track in the barn. AUTOMATIC STOP AND RETURNER — Specify one for each carrier. See Figure 446, page 226. ANCHOR ROD —Order one anchor rod for each stretch of Rod Track. We recommend the Anchor Rod and Turnbuckle, Fig. 353, page 227, as being the most ~— practical. FARMER DAK ~— Page Two Hundred Twenty-three HUNT + HELM * FERRIS & COs. Reproduced from Actual Photograph of the No. 405 Star Litter Carrier Full Roller Bearing, for Rod Track Inside and Outside of the Barn HIS Carrier combines all the desirable and essential features necessary for a_ perfect Rod Track construction and operation and perfectly built. By putting up the rod at the proper angle, the Conveyor. It is simple in In operation this carrier is automatic. carrier, when loaded, can be made to run out the simply giving it a vigorous shove. When dumped, the empty carrier returns to the barn automatieally. and dump at desired point by The tub of the carrier is dumped by means of » Tlundred Twenty-four a trip block which can be placed at any desired point on the rod. The tub dumps either way; locks at both ends and thus holds absolutely This tub has three adjustments and can be lowered or raised to the desired height. The tracker wheels are fitted with Spring Keepers, which lock them in perfect alignment with the rigid. rod, thus reducing friction to a minimum. These keepers also prevent the tracker wheels from leaving the rod. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS ROD TRACK — of special drawn wire. The 0000 size is adapted to meet the requirements of Litter Carrier outfits. TRACKER WHEEL FRAME — constructed of best grade malleable iron, heavily ribbed, supporting a cold rolled axle pin upon which the tracker wheel turns. See Fig. 421. TRACKER WHEELS — gray iron, 7 inches in diameter; lathe-turned tread of sufficient width, insuring perfect freedom from friction against the rod. The hub of each wheel is also lathe-turned, and revolves on 12 extra long, cold rolled steel bearings, surrounding a shouldered axle pin of special rolled steel. See Fig. 424. SPRING KEEPERS — which prevent carrier from jumping the rod. These keepers automatically lock the tracker wheels in perfect alignment with the rod, thus preventing friction. They are automatically re- leased when the tracker wheels strike the curve so as to permit the wheels to swivel. LATCH TRIP — when the latch trip strikes the trip block the latches at either end of the tub are auto- matically released, allowing the tub to turn over. BAIL—channel steel bail protects the trip chains and forms a rigid support for the tub at all times. TUB LATCHES — one at either end of the tub. These latches automatically hold the tub in an upright position and keep it from sagging out of shape when loaded. BAIL BRACES — are made of very best malleable iron, curved and bolted to the bail and the support for the wheel frame. These braces add great stiffness to the legs of the bail and keep them in perfect alignment. TUB — galvanized steel throughout. The ends are of one piece with flanges formed on their edges to which the body sheet is riveted. The ends are reinforced with heavy galvanized plates, as are the top edges of the tub ends as well as the sides which are reinforced with gal- vanized angle iron. The corners are securely riveted as is every point in the construction of the tub. The tub is indestructible and self-cleaning on account of its shape. It is made in one size only: 24 inches wide, 41 inches long and 14 inches deep. SUPPORT FOR TRACKER WHEEL FRAME — a malleable ‘‘U” shaped casting, engaged and riveted to both sides of the steel bail and bail brace, forming a truss of great rigidity. ROD TRACK SWITCH OR CURVE — Fig. 354, page 226, made of high carbon angle. Fitted with mal- leable approaches. May be used either right or left hand. 4 No. 405 STAR LITTER CARRIER—weight com- plete, 110 pounds. Finished in gray enamel. STAR Equipped Barn of A. J. Love, Loveland Farms, Omaha, Neb. Page Two Hundred Twenty-five * Page Two HUOUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO- Rod Track Accessories SILL Fig. 342 illustrates the STAR Loop Clamp by means of which a loop can be formed quickly at either end of the rod track. Weight, each 134 pounds. Fig. 354 Fig. 354 illustrates STAR Rod Track Switch and Curve. It is made of one piece of 1144 x 14-inch angle iron, with malleable ends curved to receive the rod. STAR Rod Track Switches operate equal- ly well as right or left hand, and are inter- changeable to either position. Weight, each, 25 pounds. Fig. 446 The Automatic Stop and Returner _ illus- trated in Fig. 446 is used at the anchor post to insure the auto- ; matic return of the carrier to the barn. - p= F This returner prevents the carrier from striking the anchor post and furnishes the necessary momentum for the automatic return Clamp for Rod Track, Fig. 423, is used at without any tendency towards running the carrier off the rod. Weight, each 3!4 pounds. the intersection of two rod tracks to prevent sagging. Weight, each, 5 ounces. Ale Fig. 364 Tension Bolt, Fig. 364. Length 30 inches. Thickness, 7 inch. Complete with washer and nut. Weight, each, 614 pounds. Angle Bracket, Fig. 344, is Wey used where the rod track angles off either to right or left, after passing out of doors. Weight, each, 31% pounds. Fig. 340 Spring Track Support, Fig. 340, is used to take up the sag in rod tracks over 125 feet in length. Weight, each, 814 pounds. Fig. 352 Fig. 352 shows attachments of a rod track in barn and in yard. Hundred Twenty-six TUS S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Rod Track Anchors HE successful working of a Rod Track outfit depends upon the ends of the rod being properly secured so as to prevent unnecessary sagging. In the yard an anchor post of suitable height should be used so that the end of the rod at the post can be elevated about 15 inches for every 100 feet of rod used above the end secured in the barn. of the carrier after the tub is dumped. This elevation insures the automatic return Fig. 353.—Rod Track, Anchor Rod and Turnbuckle The Anchor Rod and Turnbuckle illustrated in Fig. 353 should by all means be secured. In addition to the 36-inch tension bolt used in connection with the turn- buckle for take-up purposes, a °<-inch steel rod extends from the top of the ground, down thru the dead log. This steel rod will not rust out or break and overcomes any possibility of the anchor giving away below the ground line. GUTTER FEED ALLEY ey Fig. 356 Fig. 356 shows an illustration of a STAR Rod Track Litter Carrier outfit. Where one carrier is used for both sides of the barn, this arrangement is economical and practical. Fig. 375.—Anchor Rod and Tension Bolt Fig. 375 illustrates a medium priced anchor for supporting the anchor post in the yard. This anchor is furnished with a loop in the rod track and with a 36-inch tension bolt, which extends through the dead log. Weight, each, 12 pounds. Fig. 374.—Anchor Rod Anchor Rod, Fig. 374, method of anchoring post when supporting end of rod. This anchor is furnished complete with loops at either end. While not as convenient as the rod track turnbuckle, Fig. 353, it can be made to answer the purpose nicely. Weight, each, 10 pounds. illustrates a moderate priced Page Two Hundred Twenty-seven *& HOUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO-. * How to Order Carriers and Accessories for Star Rod Track CARRIER Order the carrier illustrated on page 224 or 216. When ordering rod track, always specify over-all measurements as the proper allowance will be made for the thickness of the walls when the loops are formed. The Rod Track will be cut to length and looped when exact measurements are given. ROD TRACK One tension bolt, Fig. 364, should be specified Jb TENSION BO for each end of each rod track used. Select one of the three anchors illustrated on page 38 for each anchor post used. Fig. 353 Anchor Rod and Turnbuckle is by all means preferable. ANCHOR ROD TRACK CURVE, This curve is adapted for making either a Fig. 354 right or left hand right angle turn. AUTOMATIC STOP One should be ordered for each anchor AND RETURNER post used. It is very important for the successful working of a Rod Track outfit that the anchorage should be made absolutely secure. A Rod Track outfit is always practical as well as economical and will invariably give satisfaction where care is taken to see that the an- chorage is secure. The anchor post should be securely set and the dead log should be buried so it takes a bearing against a solid bank of dirt. A firm anchorage permits taking up the sag of the rod. The success, however, of a perfect working rod track outfit depends on the care used in providing for a permanent anchorage. Harvester Hay Tools > HUNT: HELM ~- FERRIS & CO- >‘ Strength Plus Durability Sy aesnt is the first thing to look for in a hay carrier track. Next you want durability. You get the ideal combination in Star Track. You get a track 100% stronger than any other hay carrier track manufactured. STAR hay carrier track is made of the same material as railroad rails. Study the photograph in the circle above. Two special steel flanged bars, firmly riveted together. Absolutely rigid. Can not bend, buckle, twist or spring. Strong enough to support many times the heaviest load you would ever put on it. STAR Harvester Hay carriers have the same kind of quality you will find HSAs Wea But it’s the idle months that test the worth of a hay carrier. Few break the first season. You use the carrier once a year. The rest of the timemes idle. STAR Track and Harvester Hay carriers are dependable. They are ready for service without delay or expense year after year. They are backed with years of service. They are built extra strong where the strength is needed. They remain in service long after ordinary hay tools would be worn out. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Harvester Hay Carrier For Star Double Flange Steel Track Sheaves Grooved for Either Rope or Cable (Plain or Roller Bearing) SPECIFICATIONS NAME—Harvester, No. 493. STYLE—Reversible Fork Carrier for Star Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Track. FRAME— Best gray malleable iron, fully reinforced. HARVESTER NUT LOCK—Special Harvester Feature used to prevent the frame bolts from working loose. This is an exclusive feature with all Harvester Carriers and insures abso- lute rigidity. WHEEL BASE—15!1/ inches, center to center. TRACKER WHEELS—Best gray iron, 3 inches in diameter at the tread, hub drilled to take special steel axle. AXLE —This is a lathe-turned steel axle made by the most modern automatic machinery. SHEAVES—7 inches in diameter, best gray iron, drilled to take steel axle. The three large sheaves on this Carrier are grooved for 7¢-inch rope or *¢-inch wire cable, as desired. BEARINGS—Sheaves on roller bearing carriers are fitted with eleven 14-inch steel roller bearings, revolving on °¢-inch steel shoulder pin. On plain bearing carriers, the sheaves revolve on °¢-inch turned steel axle. FORK PULLEYS—Improved design, fitted with 7-inch roller bearing sheave and self- closing fork hook. SLING PULLEYS Fig. 553, illustrated on page 258, may be used in place of fork pulley, as illustrated, thus allowing use of slings when desired. SELF-CLOSING FORK HOOK—Special feature with all Harvester Carriers. By the use 2 of this hook, the fork may be quickly detached. Much superior to the ordinary methods of Fig. 561 attaching fork. LOCK—Improved type of gravity lock. No springs to rust out or break. This lock em- Fig. 561 showstrans- _ braces the double grapple principle, permitting pulley to enter at any angle and holding it securely. parent end view of Simple in construction and positive in action. locking parts used on TRIP-BLOCK—Made of best malleable iron, of special design, with a depression on the all Harvester Fork under side bolting over a rivet head on the track, thus making it absolutely impossible to loosen. Carriers. Note man- ROPE—This Carrier is fitted with sheaves so designed that it may be used with either ner in which lock en- 34-inch or 7¢-inch manila rope or *s-inch wire cable and without any changing of the Carrier. gages fork pulleys and FINISH—Gray enamel. Roller bearing carriers trimmed in red. Plain bearing carriers holds load. trimmed in blue. : WEIGHT—Each, 50 Ibs. Page Two Hundred Thirty-one No. 494 Harvester Hay Carrier For Wood Track Sheaves Grooved for Either Rope or Cable (Plain or Roller Bearing) HE No. 494 Harvester Hay Carrier is ae similar to the No. 493 Harvester Hay Carrier illustrated on the preceding page, with the exception that the tracker wheels and trucks of this carrier are especially designed for Wood Track. Otherwise, the specifications covering the No. 493 Harvester Hay Carrier apply throughout. This is the heaviest type of Fork Carrier on the market. The design of the trucks assures more than ample strength for the heaviest load. Page Two Hundred Thirty-two HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & COs () Fig. 556 shows illustration of cross section of Roller Bearing Sheaves used in Harvester Hay Carriers Nos. 493, 494 and 496. An extra long wheel base is provided. The dis- tance from center to center of tracker wheels is 1534 inches. 7 inch rope sheaves are pro- vided to guarantee not only ease in operation but also the least possible wear on the rope. These sheaves are designed to take either % inch rope or %@ inch wire cable, as desired. This extra heavy carrier can be depended upon to give extra service without any additional expense for up-keep. Weight, each, 54 lbs. STAR LINE Fig. 557 IMPROVED CABLE CLAMP The Cable Clamp illustrated in Fig. 557 is shipped with carriers Nos. 493, 494 and 496 where desired for use in connec- tion with the cable draft rope. It is quickly and easily attached. It fits into a socket on the carrier where it turns or swivels freely, thus keeping the twist out of the cable. HE No. 496 Harvester Hay Carrier is T similar to the No. 493 Harvester Hay Carrier illustrated on page 231, with the exception that the tracker wheels and trucks of this carrier are especially designed to operate on °¢ inch cable. The trip block swings loose on the cable so that by gravity its position directly under the cable is maintained under all conditions. It can be located at any desired point or detached EQUIPMENT No. 496 Harvester Hay Carrier For Cable Track Sheaves Grooved For Either Rope or Cable (Plain or Roller Bearing) without taking down the cable itself. This carrier has the same wheel base and the same extra large rope sheaves as are pro- vided with the No. 493 and the No. 494 Harves- ter Hay Carriers described on the preceding pages. Its extra strength and oversize rope sheaves guarantee not only an easy operating carrier, but permanent service without any replacement expense of any kind. Weight, each, 54 lbs. Page Two Hundred Thirty-three HUNT: HELM No. 564 Harvester Hay Carrier For STAR Double Flange Steel Track (Plain or Roller Bearing) *-FERRIS & CO SPECIFICATIONS NAME—Harvester, No. 564. STYLE—Reversible Fork Carrier for STAR Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Track. Full roller bearing sheaves with frame of best grade malleable iron, fully reinforced. Frame provided with nut locks to prevent bolts from working loose, an exclusive feature on all Harvester Carriers, which insures absolute rigidity. WHEEL BASE—15!% inches, center to center, with tracker wheels of best gray iron, 3 inches in diameter, the hub drilled to take special steel axle. SHEAVES—Four-inch best gray iron sheaves. BEARINGS—Sheaves on roller bearing carriers are fitted with eleven 14-inch steel roller bearings, revolving On plain bearing carriers, 54-inch turned steel axle. on °-inch steel shoulder pin. the sheaves revolve on FORK PULLEYS—Latest design, mounted in heavy frame, fully reinforced. The fork pulley is supplied with self-closing fork hook, a special feature with all Harvester Carriers. Page Two Hundred Thirty-four SLING PULLEYS—Fig. 553, illustrated on page 258, may be used in place of fork pulleys, allowing use of slings when desired. LOCK—Improved type of gravity lock. No springs to rust or break. This lock embraces the double grapple principle, permitting pulley to enter at any angle and holding it securely. Simple in construction and positive in action. TRIP BLOCK—Made of best malleable iron, of special design, with a depression on the under side bolting over a rivet head on the track, thus making it absolutely impossible to loosen. ROPE—tThis Carrier is designed for use with rope and we recommend °4 or 7¢-inch manila as being the most serviceable. FINISH—Gray enamel. Roller bearing carriers trimmed in red. Plain bearing carriers trimmed in blue. WEIGHT—36 pounds. STA R LINE EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS NAME~—Harvester, No. 502. STYLE—Reversible Fork Carrier for Star Double Flange Steel Track. FRAME —Best grade malleable iron, fully reinforced. HARVESTER NUT LOCK—Special Harvester Feature used to prevent the frame bolts from working loose. This is an exclusive feature with all Harvester Carriers and insures absolute rigidity. WHEEL BASE—1114 inches, center to center. TRACKER WHEELS—Best gray iron, 3 inches in diameter at the tread, wide flange, hub drilled to take steel axle. AXLE—This is a lathe-turned axle, made by the most modern automatic machinery. SHEAVES—4 inches in diameter. Best grade gray iron, drilled to take steel axle. BEARINGS—Sheaves on roller bearing carriers are fitted with eleven 14-inch steel roller bearings, revolving on °¢-inch steel shoulder pin. On plain bearing carriers, the sheaves revolve on °¢-inch turned steel axle. SLING PULLEYS—No. 553, illustrated on page 258, may be used in place of fork pulley, as illustrated, allowing use of slings when desired. No. 502 Harvester Hay Carrier For STAR Double Flange Steel Track (Plain or Roller Bearing) FORK PULLEYS — Latest design, mounted in heavy frame which is reinforced at locking portion. All fork pulleys are supplied with self-closing fork hooks for holding fork, including a universal joint between fork pulley and self-closing fork hook, allowing great freedom of movement. Fork Pulleys are fur- nished with rope guards, making it impossible for rope to leave the sheave. SELF-CLOSING FORK HOOKS—Special feature with all Harvester Carriers. By the use of these hooks a fork may be quickly detached. This hook is much superior to the ordinary method of attaching fork. LOCK—Improved type of gravity lock. No springs to rust out or break. This lock embodies the double grapple principle, permitting pulley to enter at any angle and holding it securely. Simple in construction and positive in action. TRIP BLOCK—Made of best malleable iron of special design, with a depression on the under side bolting over a rivet head on the track, thus making it absolutely impossible to loosen. ROPE—This Carrier is designed for use with rope and we recommend 34 or 7-inch manila as being the most serviceable. FINISH—Gray enamel. Roller bearing carriers trimmed in red. Plain bearing carriers trimmed in blue. WEIGHT—333 pounds. Page Two_Hundred Thirty-five No. 503 Harvester Hay Carrier For Wood Track, Plain or Roller Bearing HE No. 503 Harvester Hay Carrier is similar to the No. 502 Harvester Hay Carrier illustrated on page 235, with the exception that the tracker wheels and trucks of this carrier are especially designed for WOOD track. Otherwise, the No. 502 Harvester Hay Carrier apply throughout. This carrier was designed to com- bine strength with compactness. It has Page Two Hundred Thirty-six the specifications covering. ve HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & CO- fe ) a wheel base of 12 inches from center to Like all Har- vester Carriers, it is equipped with center of tracker wheels. gravity locks which operate without the The tracker wheels are of best gray iron, 3 inches in diameter at the tread, with wide flanges and hub drilled to take steel axle. use of springs of any description. Weight, each, 37 lbs. HE No. 504 Harvester Hay Carrier is similar to the Nos. 502 and 503 Harvester Hay Carriers, with the exception that the trucks and tracker wheels are especially designed to operate on 24 in. cable. The trip block swings loose on the cable and by gravity maintains its posi- tion directly under the cable, under all conditions. It can be located at any S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 504 Harvester Hay Carrier For Cable Track Plain or Roller Bearing desired point or detached without taking down the cable. Like all Harvester Hay Carriers, the No. 504 is fitted with gravity locks operating without springs. Strength combined with prac- ticability of design, assure uninterrupted service without additional expense of upkeep. Weight, each, 38 lbs. Page Two Hundred Thirty-seven * HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & COs o Hundred Thirty No. 575 Harvester Cross Draft Hay Carrier Roller Bearing, for STAR Double Flange Steel Track HE No. 575 Harvester Cross Draft Carrier is instantly adjustable to standard makes of Hay Carrier Tracks. With this carrier, the load is taken up at right angles to the track. No trip block is required. A pull on the draft rope immediately brings the carrier into posi- tion directly over the load. The rope grip instantly locks the moment the draft rope slackens. This makes it possible to take the hay into the mow at any height. The right angle principle of the carrier itself assures even distribution over the mow. ©The Cross Draft Carrier effects a very material eight Also furnished for Wood Track, Specify "No. 576 saving of draft rope because only enough to elevate load is required. A °%¢-inch shift rope is used to move the carrier over the mow. The horses travel a less distance and are back at the barn by the time the carrier has returned from the mow. This type of carrier is constantly gaining in favor on account of its simplicity of opera- tion and because of the saving both in time and in rope. This carrier is also designed for use on WOOD track. Specify No. 576. S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No.575 Harvester Cross Draft Sling Hay Carrier SPECIFICATIONS NAME—Harvester Cross Draft Carrier, No. 575. This Carrier is called ‘“‘Cross Draft’’ be- cause the draft rope runs directly across the barn to the team, not only making a natural saving in rope but also reducing friction to a minimum. STYLE—Sling Carrier for Star Double Flange Steel Track. It is also made for wood track. Specify No. 576 for wood track. ADJUSTMENT—This Carrier is so con- structed that it can be adjusted to fit other steel hay carrier tracks. This is done by turning the right and left hand thread bolt which connects carrier legs as shown in illustration opposite. The Harvester Cross Draft Carrier is the only Car- rier where the working parts are hinged on the adjusting bolt of the carrier legs, which allows working parts to adjust themselves and draw in direct line with the load, keeping ropes straight and free, preventing binding and cutting. The legs of this Carrier oscillate on the adjusting bolt, thus allowing every wheel to carry its part of the load. The oscillating or swinging feature allows Carrier with load to pass over an obstruc- tion or full mow without additional strain on track or Carrier. FRAME—Best grade malleable iron, fully reinforced. Extra heavy and long so as to distribute the load over a greater portion of the track. WHEEL BASE— 1624 inches center to center of tracker wheels. TRACKER WHEELS—Best gray iron, 3 inches in diameter at the tread, wide flange, hub drilled to take steel axle. AXLE—This is a lathe-turned steel axle made by the most modern automatic machinery. SHEAVE—FEight inches in diameter, best grade gray iron, drilled to take large steel roller bearing axle. SHEAVE BEARINGS—The large rope sheave turns on six special and extra large roller bearings contained in a housing, thus giving to the Carrier increased efficiency. SLING PULLEYS—Malleable frame of im- proved design. Extra wide flanges with rolled edges, preventing chafing of draft rope. Pulley hooks are large enough to be used in connection with any style or make of rope or chain slings or in connection with forks. The hooks on sling pulleys are fitted with self-locking device, pre- venting slings or forks from becoming detached except at will of operator. ROPE GRIP—This Carrier is provided with a rope gripping device having a 4-inch gripping surface and curved to conform to circle of large sheave. When hoisting rope is slackened, lock- ing device travels with sheave, thus clamping rope securely and with absolutely no chafing. The small rope attached to the lever as shown in illustration, when pulled, releases grip on draft rope and allows slings to return to load. TRIP BLOCK—No trip block is necessary with this Carrier, as the draft rope running at right angles to the track automatically brings carrier to position over the load. ROPE—This Carrier is designed for use with rope only and we recommend 34-inch or 7<-inch manila as being the most serviceable. DIRECTIONS—Full set of directions and illustrations, explaining the simple manner in which this Carrier is roped and operated, is sent with each Carrier or mailed upon application. FINISH—Gray enamel, trimmed in red. WEIGHT—No. 575 Cross Draft Carrier, each 40 pounds. No. 576 for wood track, weight each 43 pounds. GUARANTEE—We claim every Harvester Carrier to be perfect in workmanship and ma- terial. We back up our claim with a written Harvester guarantee attached to every Carrier shipped. Read this guarantee on page 2. Page Two Hundred Thirty-nine No. 687 | Y Harvester : Y Giant y : Sling Hay y | . Y | Carrier ly 4 Roller Bearing, for STAR Double Flange Steel Track sSSZs Se WAS Btnan KG HE No. 687 Harvester Giant Sling Hay Carrier, as the name implies, is extra heavy and designed for extra service. It is not necessary, unless desirable, to elevate the load to the carrier. A down pull on the trip rope illustrated, releases the carrier from the trip block and allows the load to be taken into o Hundred Forty ee * HONT- HELM -FERRIS & cosy Also furnished for Wood Track, Specify No. 688 the mow at any height. This carrier is equipped with an extra duty 4-wheel truck of sufficient strength to handle any load. Note especially that this carrier is so designed that the load at all times is directly centered under the track so that it is equally distributed, each tracker wheel carrying its share of the weight. * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT * The 914-inch roller bearing rope sheave guarantees ease of operation without wear on the rope. The rope grip is designed to effectively hold the load without allowing the rope to either slip or chafe. The design of this carrier provides not only for an even distribution of the load, but extra strength as well as extra service. SPECIFICATIONS NAME—Harvester Giant Sling Hay Carrier No. 687. So named because it is extra heavy and extra strong, designed for heavy work. STYLE—Sling Carrier for STAR Double Flange Steel Track. It is also made for wood track. Specify No. 688 for wood track. FRAME— Best grade malleable iron, fully reinforced. Extra heavy and large so as to distribute the load over a greater proportion of the track. WHEEL BASE—17!4 inches from center to center of tracker wheels. TRACKER WHEELS—Gray iron. Three inches in diameter. Wide flange. AXLE—Lathe-turned _ steel made by automatic machinery. SHEAVE—9!64 inches in diameter. Best gray iron. SHEAVE BEARINGS—tThe large rope sheave turns on six special, extra long roller bearings contained in a housing. SLING PULLEYS—tThe sling pul- leys provided with this Carrier are Har- vester Long Neck Pulleys. These pulleys are made with a malleable frame of axle, improved design, provided with auto- matic self-closing hook. The sling or fork snaps into this hook and can easily be detached, but, it cannot possibly be removed by accident. The hooks are large enough to be used in connection with any style or make of rope or slings or any style of fork. A wide throat with rounded edges prevents wear on the rope. ROPE GRIP—This Carrier is pro- vided with a rope gripping device which has a long gripping surface. This grip- ping surface conforms to the circle of the large wheel. When the hoisting rope is slackened the gripping surface travels with the wheel and sets gradu- ally. This does not mean that the rope slips through the grip, but the grip travels with the rope and clamps firmly at the point where it first takes hold, without chafing or wearing the rope. The extra long gripping surface naturally insures a firm and safe pur- chase on the rope and holds it securely without chafing. The trip rope attached to the lever as shown in the illustration locks the grip on the draft rope and at the same time releases the Carrier from the trip block. By using this trip rope it is not necessary to raise the load to the carrier as it can be taken into the barn at any desired height. ROPE—?,4-inch, ‘¢-inch or 1-inch rope may be used. %-inch pure manila rope recommended for best results. FINISH—Gray enamel, trimmed in red. WEIGHT—No. 687 Giant Sling Hay Carrier, each 61 lbs. Page Two Hundred Forty-one > No. 500 Harvester Sling Hay Carrier (Note. Illustration shows Carrier roped to deposit load in mow at right angles to track) HE No. 500 Harvester Sling Hay Carrier yy illustrated above is instantly adaptable to be used to handle the load at either right angles or parallel to the track. The larger illustration shows the sling pulleys roped to drop the load at right angles to the track. The smaller illustration shows the sling pulleys roped to drop the load parallel to the track—simply by transferring the end of the rope from one hook to another. This is Two Hundred Forty-two HUNT: HELM: FERRIS & COs ° \; |! Showing p ea No. 500 y Harvester ef roped to se ; deposit load ve) WY 4 in mow a ae parallel eS to track a patented exclusive feature of this carrier. This carrier is adapted for handling hay under all conditions—it is two carriers in one. Note particularly that the tripping arm, also the frame of the large sheave, is hinged so that either may adjust itself in line of draft, thus preventing friction or the chafing of the rope. For this same carrier to operate on WOOD track, specify No. 548, weight each, 51 lbs. S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 500 Harvester Sling Hay Carrier For Star Steel Track SPECIFICATIONS NAME—Harvester, No. 500. STYLE—Reversible Sling Carrier for STAR Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Track. FRAME—Best grade malleable iron, fully reinforced, extra heavy and long wheel base so as to distribute the load over a greater portion of the track. WHEEL BASE— 1714 inches center to center of tracker wheels. TRACKER WHEELS—Best gray iron, 3 inches in diameter at the tread, wide flange, hub drilled to take steel axle. AXLE—tThis is a lathe-turned steel axle made by the most modern automatic machinery. SHEAVES—Two in number, made of best gray iron, drilled to take steel axles. Frame of large sheave is hinged to rope gripping lever allowing sheave to adjust itself in line of draft, thus preventing rope chafing over edge of sheave. SHEAVE BEARINGS—Specially designed steel bearings. SLING PULLEYS—Malleable frame of im- proved design. Extra wide flanges with rolled edges, preventing chafing of draft rope. Pulley hooks are large enough to be used in connection with forks. The hooks on sling pulleys are fitted with a self-locking device, preventing slings or forks from becoming detached except at will of operator. ROPE GRIP—Five inch malleable iron rope grip so constructed that when pulleys strike tripping arm the lock slides forward and grips rope without chafing it and at the same time locks it securely. This operation automatically releases car from trip block. The heavier the load the greater the tension on the lock, with the result that it is impossible for the rope to slip through the grip. A special trip rope can be used with this carrier by the use of which the carrier is released from the trip block and load may be carried into the mow at any desired height. TRIPPING ARM —Of special design, mal- leable iron and hinged to Carrier frame, allowing Carrier to be operated with pulleys at right angle or parallel to track without re-roping. TRIP BLOCK— Made of best malleable iron, of special design, with a depression on the under side bolting over a rivet head on the track, thus making it absolutely impossible to loosen. ROPE—This Carrier is designed for use with rope only and we recommend 34-inch or 7-inch manila as being the most serviceable. DIRECTIONS—Full set of directions and illustrations, explaining the simple manner in which this Carrier is roped and operated, is sent with each Carrier or mailed upon application. FINISH—Gray enamel, trimmed in red. WEIGHT —Harvester Carrier, No. 500, for steel track, 51 pounds. Page Two Hundred Forty-three No. 16 Harvester Sling Hay Carrier Triple Draft for STAR Double Flange Steel Track HE No. 16 Harvester Sling Hay Carrier was designed to meet the demand for a carrier to operate perfectly when roped triple purchase. This carrier is exceedingly strong, is well balanced, and never fails to give satisfaction. The adjustable rope clamp shown can be attached to the draft rope at any Page Two Hundred Forty-four > HUONT->- HELM -FERRIS & CO a ¢ Also furnished for Wood Track, Specify No. 23 point desired and releases the carrier, permitting the load to be taken into the mow at any height. This carrier combines all the im- provements and is sold under the guar- antee of all Harvester Hay Carriers. This same carrier is also designed to operate on WOOD track. When order- ing, specify No. 23. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 16 Harvester Sling Hay Carrier For Star Steel Track SPECIFICATIONS NAME—Harvester No. 16. STYLE—Reversible Sling Carrier for STAR Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Track. FRAME—Best grade malleable iron, fully reinforced, extra heavy and long wheel base so as to distribute the load over a greater portion of the track. WHEEL BASE—1714 inches center to center of tracker wheels. | TRACKER WHEELS—Best gray iron, 3 inches in diameter at the tread, wide flange, hub drilled to take steel axle. AXLE—This is a lathe-turned steel axle made by the most modern automatic machinery. SHEAVES—Four in number, made of best gray iron, drilled to take steel axles. SLING PULLEYS—Malleable frame of im- proved design. Extra wide flanges with rolled edges, preventing chafing of draft rope. Pulley hooks are large enough to be used in connection with forks. with a self-locking device, preventing slings or The hooks on sling pulleys are fitted forks from becoming detached except at will of operator. ROPE GRIP—Five-inch malleable iron rope grip so constructed that when pulleys strike tripping arm the lock slides forward and grips rope without chafing it and at the same time locks it securely. This operation automatically releases car from trip block. The heavier the load the greater the tension on the lock, with the result that it is impossible for the rope to slip through the lock. A special trip rope can be used with this carrier by the use of which the carrier is released from the trip block and load may be carried into the mow at any desired height. TRIP BLOCK—Made of best malleable iron, of special design, with a depression on the under side bolting over a rivet head on the track, making it absolutely impossible to loosen. ROPE— This Carrier is designed for use with rope only and we recommend %4-inch or 7¢-inch manila as being the most serviceable. DIRECTIONS—Full set of directions and illustrations, explaining the simple manner in which this Carrier is roped and operated, is sent with each Carrier or mailed upon application. FINISH—Gray enamel, trimmed in red. WEIGHT—Harvester No. 16, for steel track, 53 pounds; Harvester No. 23 for wood track, 55 pounds. The No. 16 Harvester Hay Carrier as des- cribed above was especially designed to be used by those wishing to operate a sling hay carrier roped triple purchase. With each carrier is furnished an adjustable trip casting as shown in the illustration, which is fastened at any point on the rope. While the load is being elevated to the desired height the Carrier is held rigidly at the trip block. By the use of the Adjustable Trip, the carrier is automatically released when the load is at the desired height. Harvester Carrier No. 16 has the same frame, wheel base, tracker wheels, axle, pulleys, lock, trip block, etc., as described in specifications for Carrier No. 500 and carries the same ironclad Harvester guarantee. Page Two Hundred Forty-five * Page Two HFIUNT: HELM -FERRIS & CO- No. 142 Star Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Track SPECIFICATIONS E can prove the superiority of STAR over any hay carrier track on the market, irrespective of make or price. Read the specifications carefully. MATERIAL—STAR Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Track is made of high carbon steel of the same grade used in the manufacture of railroad rails. CONSTRUCTION—STAR Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Track is as simple in con- struction as it is strong and durable. It is really two tracks in one—the two special rolled steel bars being securely joined with rivets. These rivets are only eight inches apart, which makes the track rigid, therefore it will not bend, buckle, twist or spring. STRENGTH—tThe strength of any track is in its thickness rather than in its width. It is a well known fact that any material set on edge will support a heavier load without bending than if laid flat. On this principle we constructed STAR Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Track. It is guaranteed to be as strong at the splice as at any other place. By actual test we have found STAR Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Hundred Forty-six Track able to sustain nearly twice as heavy a load as any other hay carrier track manu- factured. HANGERS—STAR Track Hangers slide lengthwise of track, thus adjusting to any rafter bracket. Hangers may be put in or taken out if necessary without disturbing the track. ; SPLICE—In Fig. 143 we show plainly the construction of a splice consisting of three pieces of malleable iron, one section inside of track and two sections outside, and so locked that they cannot become loosened. No drilling nor punching is necessary to fit splice blocks, as they are shipped complete. TRIP BLOCK—AIll Trip Blocks used with STAR Double Flange Hay Carrier Track fit over the head of a rivet in the track. They cannot possibly jar loose or slide. INSTALLATION—One of the most de- sirable features of STAR Double Flange Hay Carrier Track is the ease with which it is in- stalled, requiring a wrench only to bolt the splice in place. The track is shipped complete, ready to install. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Star Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Track and Fixtures Fig. 126 No. 126 Rafter Bracket, weight per doz., 334 Ibs. Thefabovefillustration shows’a’section’of STAR Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Track. Furnished in 6 and 12 foot lengths. Wt. per ft., 2 lbs. cs Fig. 573 No. 573 Adjustable Rafter Brackets, weight, per doz., 334 Ibs. Fig. 143 a The above illustration shows construction of Splice Block and method of holding track together. Wt. each, 1 lb. ADJUSTABLE HANGER AND RAFTER BRACKET By use of the adjustable hanger and rafter bracket, as shown in Fig. 572 and 573, the position of Hay Carrier Track can be accurately adjusted. This is particularly desirable where : the rafters are uneven as in an old barn. Fig. 148 Fig. ee The track can be raised or lowered by Ne. ae nae Bethe oa tae adjusting the position of the nut on the hanger. Flange Stee! Hangers, weight The bracket is so shaped that it holds the Track, weight, per doz., 51/4 lbs. nut and prevents it from turning when the doz., 4 lbs. track is in use, as shown in Fig. 145. g OUTSIDE TRACK HANGER Fig. 767 Outside Track Hanger for STAR Double Flange Steel Track. The above jointed track hanger is used to support STAR Double Flange Steel Hay Carrier Track at end of barn. Weight, per doz., 11 Ibs. TRACK ROD AND END STOP The Track Rod and End Stop in the illustration below, Fig. 72, is used at the end of track to prevent track from working endwise. Two end stops are included with each Carrier without charge, track rods being = extra. Fig. 72 Track Rod, weight, per doz., 16 Ibs. Fig. 767 Page Two Hundred Forty-seven Page Two HUNT: HELM: FERRIS & COs A 2 fp = No. 710 Peerless Hay Carrier For Double Angle Steel Track (Plain or Roller Bearing) SPECIFICATIONS NAME—\Peerless No. 710. STYLE—Reversible Fork Carrier for Peer- less Double Angle Steel Hay Carrier Track. FRAME—Best grade malleable iron, fully reinforced. NUT LOCK—Used to prevent frame bolts from working loose, insuring absolute rigidity. WHEEL BASE—151'4 center of tracker wheels. TRACKER WHEELS—Best gray iron, 3 inches in diameter at the tread, hub drilled to take steel axle. AXLE—This is a lathe turned steel axle, made by the most modern automatic machinery. SHEAVES—~7 inches in diameter; best gray iron, drilled to take steel axle. The three large sheaves are grooved for 74-inch rope or 3¢-inch wire cable, as desired. BEARINGS—Sheaves on roller bearing car- Tiers are fitted with eleven 14-inch steel roller bearings, revolving on °%-inch steel shoulder pin. On plain bearing carriers the sheaves revolve on %%-inch turned steel axle. inches, center to Hundred Forty-eight FORK PULLEY—Improved design built with 7-inch rope sheave and sister hook. SLING PULLEYS—No. 553, illustrated on page 258, may be used in place of fork pulley illustrated, thus permitting use of slings when desired. SISTER HOOK—Special feature with all Peerless Carriers. Constructed of two malleable iron castings, swiveling on steel bolt. This hook prevents fork from becoming detached except at will of operator. LOCK —Improved type of gravity lock, grapple principle, no springs. Permits pulley to enter at any angle and holds it securely. Simple in construction and positive in action. TRIP BLOCK—Made of best malleable iron, of special design, held securely to the track by two bolts. ROPE—This carrier is fitted with sheaves so designed that it may be used with either 34-inch or 7<-inch manila rope or 34-inch wire cable without changing the carrier. FINISH—Gray enamel. Roller bearing carrier, trimmed in red. Plain bearing carrier trimmed in blue. Weight, each, 49 pounds. S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 707 Peerless Hay Carrier For Double Angle Steel Track (Plain or Roller Bearing) SPEGCEETEATIONS NAME—\Peerless No. 707. STYLE—Reversible Fork Carrier for Peer- less Double Angle Steel Hay Carrier Track. FRAME—Best grade malleable iron, fully reinforced. NUT LOCK—Used to prevent frame bolts from working loose, insuring absolute rigidity. WHEEL BASE—13 inches center to center of tracker wheels. TRACKER WHEELS—Best gray iron 3 inches in diameter at the tread, hub drilled to take steel axle. AXLE—Lath-turned steel axle is used. SHEAVES—4 inches in diameter. gray iron, drilled to take steel axle. BEARINGS—Sheaves on roller bearing car- riers are fitted with eleven 14-inch steel roller bearings, revolving on °¢-inch steel shoulder pin. On plain bearing carriers, the sheaves revolve on °%-inch turned steel axle. FORK PULLEY—Improved design built with 7-inch rope sheave and sister hook. Best SLING PULLEYS—No. 553, illustrated on page 258, may be used in place of fork pulley illustrated, thus permitting use of slings when desired. SISTER HOOK—Special feature with all Peerless Carriers. Constructed of two mal- leable iron castings, swiveling on steel bolt. This prevents fork from becoming detached except at will of operator. LOCK—Improved type of gravity lock. Grapple principle permits pulley to enter at any angle and holds it securely. Simple in construction and positive in action. TRIP BLOCK—Made of best malleable iron, of special design, held securely to track by two bolts. ROPE—tThis carrier is fitted with sheaves so designed that it may be used with either l4-inch or 7-inch manila rope. FINISH—Gray enamel. Roller bearing car- rier, trimmed in red. Plain bearing carrier, trimmed in blue. Weight, each, 37 pounds. Page Two Hundred Forty-nine te HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & COs te Page Two No. 708 Peerless - Hay Carrier For Wood Track (Plain or Roller Bearing) SPECIFICATIONS is similar to the No. 707 Peerless Hay Carrier illustrated on the preceding page, with the exception that the trucks and tracker wheels were de- signed for use on WOOD track. Other- wise the specifications covering the No. 707 Peerless Hay Carrier apply through- out. This carrier was designed to combine strength with compactness. It has a Nese 708 Peerless Hay Carrier Hundred Fifty wheel base of 13 inches from center to center of tracker wheels. The tracker wheels are the best gray iron, 3 inches in diameter at the tread, with wide flanges, hub drilled to take steel axle. This is a dependable carrier designed to give prolonged service without addi- tional cost or up-keep. Weight each, 40 lbs. % STAR LINE EQUIPMENT _ * No. 709 Peerless Hay Carrier For Cable Track (Plain or Roller Bearing) SPECIFICATIONS HE No. 709 Peerless Hay Carrier is similar to the No. 707 Peerless Hay Carrier illustrated on page 249, with the exception that the trucks and tracker wheels of this carrier are designed to operate on 5-8 inch cable. Otherwise the specifications are the same. The trip block swings loose on the cable and its position by gravity is main- tained directly beneath the cable under all conditions. It can be located at any desired point or detached without taking down the cable. The No. 709 Peerless Hay Carrier combines all the improvements and special features to be found in Peerless carriers. It is designed to give con- tinuous service without up-keep expense. Weight each, 40 lbs. Page Two Hundred Fifty-one te Page Two HUNT: HELM +- FERRIS & CO- forced. Extra heavy and long so as to distribute the load over a greater portion of the track. WHEEL BASE—1634 No. 705 Peerless Cross Draft Hay Carrier For Wood Track Specify No. 706 SPECIFICATIONS NAME—No. 705 Peerless Cross Draft Carrier. This carrier is called Cross Draft because the draft rope runs directly across the barn to the team, not only making a material saving in rope, but also reducing friction to a minimum. STYLE—Sling Carrier for Peerless Double Angle Steel Hay Carrier Track. If for use with Wood Track, specify No. 706. ADJUSTMENT —tThis carrier is so constructed that it can be adjusted to fit other steel hay carrier tracks. This is done by turning the right and left hand thread bolt which connects carrier legs as shown in above illus- tration. The Peerless Cross Draft Carrier is the only carrier where the working parts are hinged on the adjusting bolt of the carrier legs, thus allowing working parts to adjust themselves and draw in direct line with the load, thus keeping ropes straight and free, preventing binding and cutting. The legs of this Carrier oscillate on the adjusting bolt, allowing every wheel to carry its part of the load. The oscillating or swinging feature allows Carrier with load to pass over an obstruction or full mow without additional strain on track or carrier. FRAME—Best grade malleable iron, fully rein- Hundred Fifty-two inches, center to center, of tracker wheels. TRACKER WHEELS— Best gray iron, 3 inches in diameter at the tread, wide flange, hub drilled to take steel axle. AXLE—This is a lathe- turned steel axle, made by the most modern automatic machinery. SHEAVE—Six inches in diameter, best gray iron, drilled to take steel axle. SLING PULLEYS— Malleable frame of improved design. Extra wide flanges with rolled edges, preventing chafing of draft rope. Pulley hooks large enough to be used in connection with any style of rope or chain slings or in connection with forks. The hooks on the sling pulleys are fitted with self-locking device, preventing slings or forks from becoming detached ex- cept at will of operator. ROPE GRIP—This Carrier is provided with a gripping device or lock having a 4-inch gripping surface and curved to conform to circle of large sheave. When hoisting rope is slackened, locking device travels with sheave, thus clamping rope securely and with absolutely no chafing. The small rope attached to the lever as shown in illustration, when pulled, releases grip on draft rope and allows slings to return to load. TRIP BLOCK—No trip block is necessary with this carrier, as the draft rope running at right angles to the track, automatically brings carrier to position over the load. ROPE—This carrier is designed for use with rope only and we recommend 34-inch or 7g-inch manila as being the most serviceable. DIRECTIONS—Full set of directions and illustrations explaining the simple manner in which this carrier is roped and operated is sent with each Carrier, or mailed upon application. FINISH—Gray enamel, trimmed in red. WEIGHT—No. 705 Cross Draft Carrier, weight, each, 36 lbs. No. 706 for wood track, weight, each, 40 lbs. STAR LINE SSS NAME—FPeerless No. 704. STYLE—Reversible Sling Carrier for Peerless Double Angle Steel Hay Carrier Track. FRAME—Best grade malleable iron, fully reinforced, extra long wheel base, so as to distribute the load over a greater portion of the track. WHEEL BASE—171 inches, center to center, of tracker wheels. TRACKER WHEELS—Best gray iron, 3 inches in diameter at the tread, wide flange, hub drilled to take steel axle. AXLE—This is a lathe-turned, steel axle, made by the most modern automatic machinery. SHEAVES—Three in number, made of best gray iron, drilled to take steel axle. SLING PULLEYS—Malleable frame of improved design. Extra wide flanges with rolled edges, preventing chafing of draft rope. Pulley hooks are large enough to be used in connection with forks. The hooks on sling pulleys are fitted with a self-locking device, preventing slings or forks from becoming detached except at will of operator. EQUIPMENT as Sip) Atm f il No. 704 Peerless Sling Hay Carrier For Double Angle Steel Track Roller Bearing ROPE GRIP—5-inch malleable iron rope grip, so constructed that when pulleys strike tripping arm the lock slides forward and grips rope without chafing it and at the same time locks it securely. This operation automatically releases car from trip block. The heavier the load the greater the tension on the lock, with the result that it is impossible for the rope to slip through. A special trip rope can be used with this carrier by the use of which the carrier is released from the trip block and the load may be carried into the barn at any desired height. TRIPPING ARM—Of special design, malleable iron. TRIP BLOCK—Made of best malleable iron, of special design, securely bolted to the track. ROPE—This Carrier is designed for use with rope only and we recommend 34-inch or 7¢-inch manila as being the most serviceable. DIRECTIONS—Full set of directions and illustrations explaining the simple manner in which this carrier is roped and operated, is sent with each carrier, or mailed upon application. FINISH—Gray enamel, trimmed in red. WEIGHT —For steel track, 52 Ibs. Page Two Hundred Fifty-three * HUONT- HELM -FERRIS & CO —yx No. 581 Peerless Double Angle Steel Hay Carrier Track Fig. 581 The above illustration shows a section of Peerless Double Angle Steel Hay Carrier Track, made in 6 and 12 foot lengths. SPECIFICATIONS EERLESS Double Angle Steel Hay P Carrier Track is built of exactly the same material as is used in the The two inch by inch steel angles, separated by construction of railroad rails. iron spacers, are riveted firmly together. Fig. 581 shows a section of Peerless Double Angle Steel Track. The heavy rivets holding the two angles together forming this track, are spaced 12 inches apart so that it is impossible for the track to bend, buckle or get out of line. Fig. 582 shows this splice block by which the sections of Peerless Double Angle Steel Hay Carrier Track are joined. Each Splice Block consists of two sections of malleable iron held to- gether by three heavy bolts. We guar- antee this track to be as strong at the splice as at any other point. Sufficient Page Two Hundred Fifty-four splices for a complete installation are furnished with the track. In supporting this track, either Hang- er Fig. 584 or the Adjustable Track Hanger Fig. 588 can be used. The con- struction of the track permits these hangers to be spaced to conform to the arrangement of the rafters, regardless of the distance apart. Rafter Bracket, Fig. 126, is used with Track Hanger, Fig. 584, as shown in illustration Fig. 583. The Adjustable Rafter Bracket, Fig. 573, is used in con- nection with the Adjustable Track Hang- er, Fig. 588, as shown in Illustration Fig. 585. Peerless Double Angle Steel Hay Carrier Track is not only strong and practical, but it is convenient to install. The only tool necessary is a wrench, one section being hung at a time and bolted in place. > STAR LINE EQUIPMENT ww Peerless Double Angle Hay Carrier Track Fixtures Fig. 582 Fig. 573 : - Fig. 126 ADJUSTABLE Sate PEERLESS RAFTER BRACKET END STOP RAFTER BRACKET To keep carrier from running off end of track. =I zi Fig. 585 Fig. 588 Fig. 584 Fig. 583 ADJUSTABLE HANGER ADJUSTABLE TRACK HANGER AND and RAFTER BRACKET TRACK HANGER HANGER BRACKET By use of the adjustable hanger and rafter bracket shown in Fig. 585, the position of the Hay Carrier Track can be accurately adjusted. This is particularly desirable where the rafters are uneven, as in old barns. The track can be raised or lowered after it is put up, by turning the nut on the hanger. Page Two Hundred Fifty-five * HUNT+> HELM ~+- FERRIS & CO- Wood Track Hangers and Other Fixtures WOOD TRACK HANGER AND RAFTER JOINTED TRACK HANGER BRACKET Fig. 83 Weight, per doz., 111 lbs. TRACK HANGER HOOK Re Fig. 84 Made in three sizes: Weight, per doz., 12-in., 93, Ibs. Weight, per doz., 14-in., 103, lbs. Weight, per doz., 16-in., 12 lbs. Fig. 79 WOOD TRACK HANGER By the use of this Hanger the track is hung directly in the center of the peak and has the full strength of DO) Fig. 131 both rafters. RIDGE-POLE HANGER 10-inck Weight, per doz., 8'/2 lbs. RAFTER BRACKET Fig. 126 Fig. 87 Weight, per doz., 334 Ibs. Made of the best malleable iron, of proper size to be used on ridge-pole 2x6 or 2x8. By driving a nail in SWIVEL ROPE HITCH AND HOOK each slot it is made secure enough to hold any track. Weight, per doz., 5/2 lbs. FLOOR HOOK Fig. 86 One of the most handy and useful articles in a hay No hard knots to untie, no wasting of rope by tool outfit. Twist in the rope is removed by cutting knots open. the swivel. Weight, 54-in. hook, per doz., 8 Ibs. Weight, per doz., 16 lbs. No. 85 No. 85A—Weight, 34-in. hook, per doz., 121% Ibs. Page Two Hundred Fifty-six STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Sling Pulleys and Sling Locks Fig. 641 Harvester Long Neck Pulleys The Harvester Long Neck Pulleys or Stacking Pulleys as they care commonly called, as shown in Fig. 641, are used in connection with wire cable for stacking hay. These are extra heavy long neck pulleys. They are provided with sheaves so grooved that rope may be used instead of cable if desired. The edges of the throat are rounded and smooth so that they will not wear the rope. Each pulley is pro- vided with an automatic self-closing sling hook, and a large eye to which rope may be fastened. Harvester Long Neck Pulleys with 61% in. sheaves, per set, weight, 15 lbs. Harvester Long Neck Pulleys with 4 in. sheaves, per set, weight, 13 Ibs. Note: Be sure to specify size of sheave wanted. Fig. 578 Harvester Fork Clevis Fig. 824 Sling Pulleys for Use with End Trip Slings By use of the Harvester Fork Clevis illustrated in Fig. 578, any style of fork may be used with either parallel or right angle sling pulleys of any make. It is sometimes desirable to take off the greater part of the load with a fork and then to use a single sling for the remaining part as the sling takes up the hay cleaner than the fork. This Fork Clevis is fitted with a swiveling sister hook to which any style of fork can be attached and made secure. Hay Fork Clevis, Fig. 578, weight, each, 2 Ibs. Fig. 824 illustrates Sling Pulleys especially adapted for use with End Trip Slings. The Sling Pulleys regularly furnished with Sling Carriers are adapted for use with Center Trip Slings. Sling Pulleys, Fig. 824, for use with End Trip Slings, per set, weight, 14 lbs END TRIP SLING LOCKS home made slings. weight, each, 2 lbs. Fig. 552 illustrates the Single Hook Sling Lock pro- vided with one large hook only, into which the braided loops at the end of the rope sling may be hooked. This style of lock is especially desirable for use with Fig. 552, Single Hook Sling Lock, weight, each, 2 lbs. Fig. 551, Double Hook Sling Lock (not illustrated) The Triple Hook Sling Lock, as illustrated in Fig. 591, Fig. 552 Single Hook Sling Lock is provided with three hooks into which the rings attached to the ends of the ropes used in either two or three rope end trip slings, can be hooked. When this lock is released by the trip rope shown, the ends of the rope sling are also released. Fig. 591 Triple Hook Sling Lock, weight, each, 2 lbs. Fig. 591 Triple Hook Sling Lock Page Two Hundred Fifty-seven * HUNT- HELM- FERRIS & CO; Page Pwo Sling Pulleys and Hay Slings Harvester Sling Pulleys Harvester Sling Pulleys are equipped with registering heads suitable for use with all Harvester and Peerless Fork Carriers when it is desired to use Slings instead of Forks. Harvester Sling Pulleys can be used with any style or make of Fork Carrier provided they are equipped with the proper registering heads. No. 553 Harvester Sling Pulley is for use with Center Trip Slings only. No. 553 No. 829 Harvester Sling Pulley is for use with End ree : Trip Slings only. No. 829 Harvester Sling Pulley for : use with Center Trip Specify carefully which pulley is wanted. Weight, Harvester Sling Pulley for use with End Trip Slings cach, 10 Ibs. ings € ae Junior Rope Sling Fig. 549 illustrates the Junior Rope Sling. It is made with two, 1/%-inch loose lay ropes that will not gnarl nor kink. Each rope has an adjustable take-up at one end so it can be shortened or lengthened as desired. This same sling is also furnished with three ropes instead of two. When ordering specify Fig. 549A. Weight, 2-rope Sling, Fig. 549, each, 5 lbs. Weight, 3-rope Sling, Fig. 549A, each, 6 lbs. Junior Chain Hay Sling Fig. 550 illustrates the Junior Chain Hay Sling made with two chains. This sling is constructed of non-kinking galvanized chain, guaranteed to be strong enough for all purposes. Weight, Junior Chain Hay Sling Fig. 550, each, 6 lbs. Note that the Sling Pulleys illustrated in Figures 549 and 550 are fitted with a triple hook sling lock, Fig. 591, illustrated and described on the preceding page. Fig. 549 Where the Harvester Sling Pulley illustrated in Fig. 829 Fig. 550 Junior Rope Sling is used, this triple hook sling lock is not required. Junior Chain Sling Center Trip Adjustable Rope Sling we we we , pune we ; Ny if we Yy MIA, A, o OK yee) iy ey ‘ pill we Fig. 480 Center Trip Adjustable Rope Sling The Fig. 480 Center Trip Adjustable Rope Sling, as in unison by a single trip rope. This sling is adjustable illustrated above, is a radical improvement over the old to any width. It is furnished in one size only, 16 feet. style End Trip Rope Sling. The double locks are operated Weight, each, 7 lbs. Hundred Fifty-eight STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Hay Slings Fig. 55 O. K. CENTER TRIP SLING Fig. 55 represents our O. K. Center Trip Sling, with 4-foot cross bars. The ropes are 14-inch loose lay, are strong and will not gnarl nor kink. They have an adjustable take-up at either end so that they can be shortened or lengthened to suit the length of the hayrack. The cross bars are heavy and strong, made of hardwood, in 4 and 5-foot lengths. Weight, No. 55 Sling, 4-foot bars, 18 Ibs. Weight, No. 55A Sling, 5-foot bars, 21 lbs. Fig. 58 O. K. CENTER TRIP SLING Above we illustrate our O. K. Center Trip Sling, 5-foot bars, 3 ropes. This is the same style sling as shown in Fig. 55 with the exception of an extra rope running lengthwise. Weight, No. 58 Sling, 23 Ibs. No. 56 HARVARD CENTER TRIP SLING The Harvard Center Trip Sling is extra strong in every respect. It is made for heavy work. As this sling is specially roped, it forms a bed or net sufficiently close to carry fine hay or grain satisfactorily, no matter how short or dry. It is furnished with either 5 or 6-foot bars. Weight, 5-foot sling, Fig. 56, each, 29 lbs. Weight, 6-foot sling, Fig. 56A, each, 33 lbs. Page Two Hundred Fifty-nine te HONT- HELM -FERRIS & CO-. Hay Slings Fig. 769 HARVARD DOUBLE LOCK CENTER TRIP SLING The Harvard Double Lock Center Trip Sling, illus- sling especially strong at the point of greatest strain and trated above, is adapted for handling hay, fodder, or palances the load at the same time. This sling is con- large bundles of grain. Two sets of locks are used to jected and locks with the same motion and can be in- join the two halves of the sling instead of one. This = double lock device makes two separate connections—a stantly shortened or lengthened to fit the hay rack. It is hook and eye being used at one end of the bars and a_ a very popular sling because of the constantly increasing lock at the other. This double connection makes the demand for a sling to carry large and very heavy loads. Fig. 395 CHAIN HAY SLING Owing to the large demand we are now able to furnish strength. The two center bars come closely together, a Chain Hay Sling, which we recommend for heavy work, only 14 inches apart, thus small bundles may be raised such as is expected in the use of Sling Hay Carriers. without becoming loosened or falling out of the Sling. Extra strong non-kinking galvanized chain is used. Note - c = that the bars next to the sling lock are thicker at the T ae sling com espone to our S-foot O. K. Center center than at the end and that the outer bars are shorter oP PE PERE SES: than the bars next to the sling lock, thus insuring great Weight, each, 30 lbs. Fig. 479 CHAIN HAY SLING Fig. 479 illustrates a Chain Hay Sling, 4 chains length- 6-foot Harvard Center Trip Rope Sling, Fig. 56A, and it is wise, one chain across. This sling corresponds to our — especially designed to carry fine stuff. Weight, each, 35 Ibs. Page Two Hundred Sixty S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Hay Fork Pulleys MALLEABLE FRAME KNOT-PASSING PULLEYS Fig. 103 represents our special design Malleable Frame Knot-passing Pulley. It has 6-inch sheave, which revolves on large hollow pin; sheave is made of hard maple. The eye is malleable swivel. The frame is made of the best malleable iron. Weight, dozen, 343, lbs. Fig. 104 shows the same frame with 6-inch cast iron sheave. The sheaves are interchangeable. These pulleys are warranted to give satisfaction. Weight, dozen, 45 Ibs. STEEL FRAME KNOT-PASSING PULLEYS Fig. 105 illustrates our Steel Frame Knot-passing Pulley. It has 6-inch hard maple sheave, which revolves on large bushing. Frame is pressed out of wrought steel; has malleable swivel eye. Weight, dozen, 361/2 Ibs. Fig. 106 represents same frame with 6-inch cast iron sheave. The sheaves are interchangeable. Weight, dozen, 52 lbs. CAST FRAME PULLEYS Hollow Pin Fig. 101 represents our Cast Frame Pulley, made after our own special design. It has 6-inch hard maple sheave, revolving on large hollow pin. Weight, dozen, 37 lbs. Fig. 102 represents the same frame with 6-inch iron sheave. Sheaves are interchangeable. Weight, dozen, 48 lbs. Page Two Hundred Sixty-one > 4 HUOUNT~- HELM - FERRIS & CO- Hay Fork Pulleys STEEL FRAME PULLEYS Fig. 107 illustrates our Plain Steel Frame Pulley. The frame is made of wrought steel, with malleable swivel eye. The sheave is made of hard maple; is 6 inches in diameter, revolving on large bushing. Weight, dozen, 26 lbs. Fig. 108 represents same frame with 6-inch cast iron sheave. The sheaves are interchangeable. Weight, dozen, 40 lbs. Fig. 10814 same pulley as Fig. 108 with the ex- ception that the sheave is 51 inches in diameter instead of 6 inches. Weight, dozen, 32 lbs. ALL IRON PULLEY Fig. 109 represents our All Iron Pulley. It has cast iron frame, with cast iron sheave 51/4 inches in diameter. Frame has heavy rib to increase the strength. The sheave revolves on large hollow pin. Has swivel eye. Weight, dozen, 38 lbs. FLOOR PULLEY Fig. 110 illustrates our Floor Pulley. The frame thoroughly protects the sheave. The sheave is made of hard maple. It has a hollow pin and swivel eye. Weight, dozen, 39 Ibs. WOOD FRAME PULLEYS Reed Pattern Fig. 111 illustrates our Wood Frame Pulley, with wrought steel yoke and malleable swivel eye. The frame and sheave are hard maple. The sheaye revolves on a large bushing. Weight, dozen, 33 Ibs. Fig. 112 represents the same construction, except that a swivel hook is used in place of the malleable eye. Weight, dozen, 35 Ibs. Fig. 111 Page Two Hundred Sixty-two Hay Fork Pulleys SPECIAL STAR PULLEY Fig. 113 illustrates our special STAR Pulley. It has steel yoke, malleable swivel eye, large bushing and hard maple 6-inch sheave. This pulley we recommend to dealers wanting the best. Frame constructed to prevent chafing of rope. Weight, dozen, 41 Ibs. BIG STAR PULLEY Fig. 114 represents our Big STAR Pulley. It has hard maple sheave 7 inches in diameter. The frame is made of malleable iron, extra strong and heavy, with steel yoke, malleable swivel eye, and large bushing. Frame constructed to prevent chafing of rope. Weight, dozen, 52 lbs. MALLEABLE FRAME PULLEY Roller Bearing Fig. 125 illustrates our new Malleable Frame Pulley, with roller bearings. Has malleable swivel eye and 6-inch iron sheave. Made for the very best trade. Weight, dozen, 60 lbs. MALLEABLE FRAME PULLEY Knot-Passing Fig. 48 illustrates our new Malleable Frame Knot-Passing Pulley, with large hollow pin. It has a hard maple sheave, 6 inches in diameter. Frame is made of malleable iron, extra strong and heavy. Has malleable swivel eye. Frame constructed to prevent chafing of rope. Weight, dozen, 40 Ibs. MALLEABLE FRAME PULLEY Hollow Pin Fig. 127 illustrates our new Malleable Frame Hollow Pin Pulley. Frame constructed to prevent chafing of rope. Malleable swivel eye, 6-inch hard maple sheave. Weight, dozen, 36 Ibs. We also furnish this pulley with 6-inch iron sheave, Fig. 128. Weight, dozen, 53 Ibs. PEERLESS PULLEY Knot-Passing Fig. 155 is designed especially to use with shift rope in connection with Nos. 575 and 576 Cross Draft Carriers, page 238, and Nos. 705 and 706, page 252, Weight, Fig. 155 Pulley, per doz., 30 lbs. S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Fig. 114 Page Two Hundred Sixty-three HUNT +-HELM “FERRIS & COs. Hay Fork Pulleys STEEL FRAME CABLE PULLEY Fig. 43 represents our Steel Frame Cable Pulley which making an extra strong pulley. We also furnish this is fitted with 7-inch iron sheave adapted for 3g or 14-inch pulley of the same construction but fitted with roller- cable. Frame made of high carbon steel. We use a_ bearing sheave. very heavy machine bolt to hold sheave in place, Weight, Steel Frame, Fig. 43, per doz., 71 Ibs. GIANT WOOD FRAME PULLEY Fig. 554 shows Giant Wood Frame Pulley, hard maple sheaves, 10 inches in diameter. The sheave of this pulley being extra large and turning on bushing 1%¢ inches in diameter makes it of very light draft. The bushing fits into the bottom of the steel yoke to which is attached a large wrought iron pulley hook. The frame is wood, made of perfect stock bolted together and braced in such a manner as to insure a pulley of great strength. Weight, Fig. 554 Pulley, per doz., 162 lbs. . WOOD FRAME CABLE PULLEY Fig. 44 illustrates our Wood Frame Cable Pulley. This pulley is fitted with 7-inch iron sheave. Heavy hardwood frame. This is a very substan- tial pulley and manufactured for heavy work. Weight, Wood Frame, Fig. 44, per doz., 123 Ibs. Fig. 44 Sister Hook and Clamp Fig. 703 shows Sister Hook and Clamp, ; ‘ The Sister Hooks are constructed of two which offers a very convenient method of ? malleable hooks which swivel on a steel bolt. hanging a pulley at the end of the track. They hold the pulley securely without danger This fixture includes a universal joint be- of its being detached by accident, but when tween the sister hook and clamp, allowing great - desired the pulley may be readily detached. flexibility and freedom of movement. Page Two Hundred Sixty-four S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Hay Forks Nellis Hay Fork Short Head Double Extra Long Double Harpoon Fork Harpoon Fork Fig. 95 4 Made of steel. Length of Fig. 94 tines under cross-bar, 25 in. = : Weight, 11 Ibs. Weight, 1614 Ibs. ig. 9 Made of steel. Length of tines under the cross-bar, 31 inches. Weight, 18 lbs. Lock-Lever Double Harpoon Fork ——) so Ik rm TAS Fig. 96 Made of special spring steel, 114 x 34, with malle- able lever and barbs. It has a large capacity owing to the cross-bar being placed near top of fork. Length under the cross-bar, 30 inches. The special feature is that it locks open as well as closed. Weight, 25 lbs. Fig. 98 Alfalfa Double Harpoon Fork Made of steel, extra large and strong. Length of tines under cross-bar, 33 inches. Width be- tween tines, 2014 inches. 42 Weight, 29 Ibs. Page Two Hundred Sixty-five HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & COs Grapple Hay Forks The Automatic Safety Grapple Fork without Center Tine, especially adapted for the quick handling of loose or baled hay, fodder, etc. Constructed of high carbon spring steel. Six Tine Safety Grapple Fork Fig. 558 shows 6-tine Grapple Fork closed after it has released the load and comes back to the wagon, ready for the operator to pick it up and place it in the hay as desired. This fork trips easily from any direction, is double braced, very strong and guaranteed. This fork has a spread of 55 inches. Weight, Fig. 558, 6-tine fork, each 47 lbs. Four Tine Safety Grapple Fork Fig. 559 shows 4-tine fork open and ready to set in hay. The pull on the trip rope releases load and the fork closes and locks automatically as shown in Fig. 558, eliminating the danger from an open fork descending to the load over the operator. Weight, Fig. 559, 4-tine fork, each 40 lbs. Fig. 559 Giant Safety Grapple Fork The Giant Automatic Safety Grapple Fork is of the same general design as that shown above but is much larger, heavier and stronger. It has an extreme spread of 63 inches between the points of the tines when open and has a correspondingly greater capacity. Weight, Fig. 833, 4-tine fork, each 48 lbs. Weight, Fig. 834, 6-tine fork, each 56 lbs. age Two Hundred Sixty-six S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Hay Forks Jackson Pattern The greatest strength and capacity with the least amount of weight were the first objects to be secured in the construction of this fork. It is made in the following sizes: 31% foot, with four tines, a light fork for hay. 4 and 41% foot, with four tines, for thresh- ing machines and stacking hay. 5 and 6 foot, with six tines for heading or large loads. Made in six sizes: 3% ft. 4 tine, 46 lbs. 4 ft. 4 tine, 47 Ibs. 4l6 ft. 4 tine, 55 Ibs. 5 ft. 6 tine, 56 lbs. 51% ft. 6 tine, 58 Ibs. 6 ft. 6 tine, 74 Ibs. The tines are made of high grade spring steel and the material used throughout is of the very best. The trip latch is reliable. It has convenient hand-holds on the head, which are of great assistance in operating the fork. The woodwork is neatly made, all riveted and constructed so as to get the greatest possible strength. The fork is guaranteed to be strong and reliable, and is warranted to do good work. California Pattern Made in six sizes: 3% ft. 4 tine, 45 lbs. 4 ft. 4 tine, 46 lbs. 44 ft. 4 tine, 54 lbs. 5 ft. 6 tine, 55 Ibs. 516 ft. 6 tine, 57 lbs. 6 ft. 6 tine, 72 lbs. Description same as above. This fork has single head and the Jackson pattern has double head. Page Two Hundred Sixty-seven > HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & CO; Material for Hay Carrier Outfits STEEL RAFTER GRAPPLE SNATCH PULLEY BLOCK Fig. 90 The Snatch Pulley Block shortens the travel of the horse. Tie a knot in the rope and put the washer in Fig. 89 front of it. The rope can then be thrown off the snatch A very useful tool for attaching to rafters or beams. Pulley thus allowing the fork to be returned to the load Much more convenient than trying to hang a pulley without waiting for the return of the horse. with a rope in the peak of a barn. Weight per ,doz., 30 Ibs. Weight per doz., 60 lbs. FIXTURES FOR SUPPORTING STEEL HAY CARRIER TRACK AT END OF BARN Weight per set, 12 lbs. if an vil i MT Fig. 73 Many ways have been devised for supporting steel track at the end of barn, nearly every carpenter having a way of his own which has not always proven to be the best. It is im- portant that the track at end of barn should be well supported because the heavy pull is at this place, and a little defect in supporting the track will cause a great deal of trouble. We show in the above cut a means of doing this, which we believe to be as good as any other, if not the best way. We are pre- pared to furnish the above fixtures complete and ready for use at a reasonable price. A set consists of two heavy angle-shape castings with bolts; ; | one bar, !4-inch round iron, 8 feet long, with eye at one end Sut shawane How che | and nut at the other; two malleable ridge pole hangers. Applied. Page Two Hundred Sixty-eight STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Directions for Supporting Track at End of Barn Illustration showing how steel track is supported when hay is taken in at end of barn. For directions, see page 271. Fig. 152 Illustration showing how wood track is supported when hay is taken in at end of barn. For directions, see page 271. Fig. 153 V END HANGER FOR STEEL TRACK This hanger is used to support the track when the hay is taken in at end of barn, as shown in Fig. 152. Weight, V-End Hangers, each, 1 lb. 5 oz. Fig. 88 STAR PULLEY BRACKET HOLDER No. 821 STAR Pulley Bracket Holder works with any ordinary pulley. The STAR Pulley Bracket Holder is used to support a pulley carrying the draft rope through either the side or end of the barn. It permits using the smallest possible amount of draft rope. To attach this Pulley Bracket Holder, cut a hole in the barn siding 4 inches wide and 8 or 10 inches high. Bolt to the top of the opening. The pulley can be attached or removed from the inside or outside of barn. This inexpensive arrangement permits a material saving of rope and reduces friction to a minimum. Page Two Hundred Sixty nine > a HUNT+- HELM - FERRIS & CO-- Hay Carrier Returner OU need have no more trouble getting your carrier back to the trip block— this little machine will do it for you. As soon as the hay rope is unhooked from the whiffle-tree this machine will draw the carrier back to the trip block without any aid, and you can have your fork set by the time the horse has returned and is ready to draw up another load. No farmer can afford to do without it. It will work with any make of carrier. No weight is furnished, as it is necessary to vary this according to the length of rope used. A bag of sand will do for a weight. Complete set of directions sent with each returner. Illustration Showing Manner of Putting up Hay Carrier Returner when Hay is Taken in at the Center of the Barn. Fig. 91 Weight, each, 60 lbs. Illustration Showing Manner of Putting up the Hay Carrier Returner when Hay is Taken in at the End of the Barn. Page Two Hundred Seventy STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Material for Hay Carrier Outfits MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR STEEL TRACK CARRIERS FOR 40-FOOT BARNS One carrier, 36 feet of track, 19 hangers, 19 rafter brackets, 2 lbs. of bracket nails, 5 pulleys, 1 fork, 6 floor hooks. FOR 50-FOOT BARNS One carrier, 48 feet of track, 25 hangers, 25 rafter brackets, 2'/ lbs. of bracket nails, 5 pulleys, 6 floor hooks, 1 fork. FOR 60-FOOT BARNS One carrier, 60 feet of track, 31 hangers, 31 rafter brackets, 3 lbs. of bracket nails, 5 pulleys, 1 fork, 6 floor hooks. FOR 70-FOOT BARNS One carrier, 66 feet of track, 34 hangers, 34 rafter brackets, 31 lbs. of bracket nails, 5 pulleys, 1 fork, 6 floor hooks. FOR 80-FOOT BARNS One carrier, 78 feet of track, 40 hangers, 40 rafter brackets, 4 lbs. of bracket nails, 5 pulleys, 1 fork, 6 floor hooks. MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR WOOD TRACK CARRIERS FOR 40-FOOT BARNS One carrier, 21 hanging hooks, 21 rafter brackets, 2 lbs. of bracket nails, 5 pulleys, 1 fork, 6 floor hooks. FOR 50-FOOT BARNS One carrier, 26 hanging hooks, 26 rafter brackets, 21% lbs. of bracket nails, 5 pulleys, 1 fork, 6 floor hooks. FOR 60-FOOT BARNS One carrier, 31 hanging hooks, 31 rafter brackets, 3 lbs. of bracket nails, 5 pulleys, 1 fork, 6 floor hooks. FOR 70-FOOT BARNS One carrier, 36 hanging hooks, 36 rafter brackets, 31% Ibs. of bracket nails, 5 pulleys, 1 fork, 6 floor hooks. FOR 80-FOOT BARNS One carrier, 41 hanging hooks, 41 rafter brackets, 4 lbs. of bracket nails, 5 pulleys, 1 fork, 6 floor hooks. DIRECTIONS FOR PUTTING UP WOOD TRACK AT END OF BARN Take a bar of ¥4-inch round iron and make an eye at one end and thread and nut at the other end. Bend the rod over a standard (page 269) and bolt the other end through the roof of the barn. DIRECTIONS FOR PUTTING UP STEEL TRACK AT END OF BARN When hay is taken in at end of barn, fasten a piece of 2x6 across the rafters near the end of barn to prevent the track from working endwise, and let the other end extend out ‘of barn. Bolt the trip block to the track over the rivet, about two feet outside of the end of the barn. Bolt two pieces 4x4 to the roof as shown (page 269) extending same about three feet from the end rafter. Place one V-shaped end hanger (Fig. 88) at the end of these pieces and the other half way between that and the end of barn. DIRECTIONS FOR PUTTING UP WOOD TRACK Put hangers on four rafters over the driveway and about six feet apart for the balance. Nail rafter irons on with clinch nails. See that the track is the proper depth where trip block goes on to properly operate the locks. The trip block may need blocking down from the track, or setting up into the track, according to the depth of track used. See that the nuts are all set in on the under side of track. Use 34-inch rope, and boil and stretch it to make it soft and pliable. DIRECTIONS FOR PUTTING UP STAR STEEL TRACK Slip rafter brackets through hangers and nail to rafters in each end of barn and one in the center with clinch nails. Fasten a string to rafter brackets in end of barn and pass it over the one in the center; draw up tightly and fasten to the one in the other end of the barn. This will be a gauge to get the hangers all even and inline. Put hangers on to each pair of rafters through the barn. Elevate the track one section at a time and slide it on the hangers, then splice the track and be sure that the nuts are drawn up tightly on the three bolts. Fasten a piece of 2x6 across the rafters at each end of the track to prevent the track from working endwise. If a pulley changer is to be used, bolt hook No. T-5 to this 2x6 three or four inches to one side of track; but if not, use a floor hook in place of T-5 to hold the pulley. See that the bolts in the trip block are drawn up tightly. The trip block can be put on at any place where there is a rivet. Page Two Hundred Seventy-one fe HUNT: HELM +- FERRIS & COs he Dealer’s Display Rack Page Two The Harvester Hay Carrier Display Rack PRACTICAL display rack, de- A signed for dealer’s use in display- ing and demonstrating Harvester Haying Tools. A carrier so mounted and promi- nently displayed will attract prospective buyers of Haying Tools. Dealers can point out to advantage and demonstrate the greater strength, weight and durability, as well as ease of operation, of these carriers. Hundred Seventy-two This display rack is built of steel tubing, is 44 inches high and 48 inches wide. Furnished free (except for carrier, clamp and pulley) with an order speci- fying the necessary amount of Haying Tools. Only furnished with carrier mounted. Specify type of carrier. Weight, each 47 lbs. arn Door 72 gers fla * HUNT-+- HELM- FERRIS & CO. > Cannon Ball Door Hangers and Track HE Cannon Ball Door Hanger is the most widely sold hanger in America. Being known from coast to coast, and having been used for years, its heavy sales speak volumes for the merit of the article. “Cannon Ball Door Hangers” are the standard by which all others are judged. They represent the height of perfection in design, construction and operation. Special designed steel ball wheels— light running, and with a wide tread, are mounted on a strong steel truss frame. The frame, with wheels, runs completely enclosed in a tubular track —nothing exposed. Cannon Ball Door Hangers are built tandem or single wheel type, flexible, and constructed frictionless, noiseless, with long roller bearings. They are adjustable or non-adjust- able as may be required. The adjust- able type ensures an easy operating door at all times. If door swells or warps, by adjusting a screw it is moved away from the building, preventing any fric- If the floor swells, the door can be raised to clear the obstruc- tion or binding. tion by means of the adjusting nut. The non-adjustable hanger repre- Page Two Hundred Seventy-four sents a type that has been on the market for years. It is built most substan- tially, only the best of materials being used; » Lhe hangers of this type will operate for years and give the best of service. These tandem hangers were designed for use with heavy doors and operate successfully under all conditions. Cannon Ball Track is the result of years of experience. It represents the highest point of development in the manufacture of door tracks. x STAR LINE EQUIPMENT * No. 384 Cannon Ball Tandem Door Hanger Non-Adjustable HE Cannon Ball Door Hanger shown T opposite is of the tandem type. Two special designed steel ball wheels, light running and noiseless, are mounted on a strong steel frame. Each wheel re- volves on ten cold rolled steel roller bear- ings, making the hanger absolutely friction- less. The frame with the wheels runs completely enclosed in Cannon Ball Tubu- lar Track—nothing is exposed to the wind or weather. The door strap is connected to this strong, steel frame by a malleable bracket or stirrup. This hanger is non- adjustable and is especially adapted for use with heavy doors. Packed one pair in a box; six pairs in a carton. Weight per dozen pairs, 68 lbs. Fig. 384 Page Two Hundred Seventy-five * HUNT- HELM -FERRIS & coy No. 440 Cannon Ball Tandem Door Hanger Lateral and Vertical Adjustments IGURE 440 illustrates another type of Cannon Ball Tandem Door Hanger. Two special designed steel ball wheels, revolving on ten cold rolled steel roller bear- ings, are supported by a strong steel frame. The frame and wheels operate in Cannon Ball Tubular Track—nothing exposed to the weather. A connecting stirrup of the very best malleable iron supports the door strap. This door strap of high carbon steel is so designed that the door can be set closer to the building, or farther away, as = desired, by means of an adjusting screw at ——————— the top of the strap. The door may also ] © ( | ie Imm = be raised or lowered as may be required by = 7 turning a nut at the bottom of the strap. bd This strap is designed for doors of any Fig. 440 thickness. By using this hanger, doors that have swelled or warped, can be oper- ated as easily as a new door just put up. This hanger, being of the tandem type, is designed especially for heavy doors. Packed one pair in box; six pairs in carton. Weight, per dozen pairs, 84 lbs. Dealer’s Display Model ISPLAY and demonstrate Cannon Ball Hangers | Cannon Ball Fi. 440 Tandem Barn Dh D and Track and easy sales will be the result. ee ieee We furnish a neatly finished model, as illus- trated, suitable for counter or window display. We also include a very attractive display card, advertising the exclusive features of Cannon Ball Hangers. of [anger We charge regular prices only for the pair of hangers and the brackets. This model equipped with the style of hanger you are handling, should be included with the next order. Weight, each, 27 lbs. Fig. 792 Page Two Hundred Seventy-six % STAR LINE EQUIPMENT * No. 507 Cannon Ball Tandem Door Hanger Fig. 507 Lateral and Vertical Adjustments HE hanger illustrated in Fig. 507 is a Tandem Cannon Ball Hanger hav- ing both lateral and vertical adjust- ments. Two steel ball wheels of special design are mounted on a strong steel frame. Each wheel revolves on ten cold rolled steel roller bearings, making them friction- less and noiseless. The frame and the wheels are com- pletely enclosed in Cannon Ball Track— nothing is exposed to rain or snow or other damaging elements so that the hanger operates easily, smoothly and _ perfectly at all times. The steel door strap is connected to the frame by a stirrup of malleable iron. By turning the set-screw at the top of the strap, the door can be moved closer to the building or farther away as desired. By turning to right or left the nut which sets on top of the door strap, the door may be raised or lowered as may be required. The No. 507 is a hanger that works perfectly in all kinds of weather and which will operate equally well on swelled and warped | doors. Packed one pair in a jos bx joer sty fl carton. Weight per dozen pairs, 84 Ibs. Mr. J. C. Beard’s Star Equipped Barn at Decorah, Iowa Page Two Hundred Seventy-seven > HUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO; | non Ball Tubular Track 3-Foot Lengths tubular track on the market. Its reputation has placed it on the shelves of practically every dealer in the United States and Canada. This track is con- structed of 14 gauge, special analysis steel. It is formed under a process which combines the strength of material with the strength of design. Its construction provides Fig. 388 greater strength and less friction. Being tubular in shape, GontcliohGannon Ballunerce the hangers operating inside of it are completely enclosed. Convenient—Compact—May Be Stored This construction permits the hangers to operate noise- Maden Counts: lessly and without friction. Cannon Ball Track is not only bird-proof but also weather-proof and its shape makes it self-cleaning. Center Brackets, Figure 682, and End Brackets, Figure 680, shown on opposite page, are used in connection with this track. Cannon Ball Tubular Track is built in 3-foot sections and is regularly packed 96 feet to the crate. Weight per crate of 96 feet, 205 Ibs. Detachable Cannon Ball Track Cover 3-Foot Lengths Ca Ball Track is recognized as the most popular JA T an additional cost, a galvanized cover is provided, when desired, for short length Cannon Ball Track. This cover, if such Fig. 602 Front View of Cannon Ball Hanger i a thing is possible, makes this track even more Detachable | storm, wind, snow, rain and weather-proof Galvanized | than before. This cover is sold separately. Fig. 603 Sectional View of Cannon Ball Hanger With Detachable Galvanized Cover Cover Comes packed 96 feet to the crate. Weight, per crate of 96 feet, 60 Ibs. & Page Two Hundred Seventy-eight STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 681 Cannon Ball Tubular Track Long Lengths To supply the demand for longer lengths, Cannon Ball Track is made in 4, 6 and 8 ft. sections. Aside from the difference in length, the track shown above is exactly like that shown on the opposite page. any width door. assorted as follows: three 4-foot, four 6-foot and eight 8-foot sections. These lengths in combination with the regular 3-foot sections will accommodate Cannon Ball Track in longer lengths than 3-foot is packed 100 feet to the crate, Weight per crate, 215 lbs. Cannon Ball Track Brackets Fig. 682 Center Track Bracket The Cannon Ball Track Brackets shown herewith are used to complete the simple instal- lation of No. 387 Cannon Ball Track in 3-foot lengths shown on the opposite page and the No. 681 Cannon Ball Track in long lengths illus- trated above. Cannon Ball Center Bracket Fig. 682, is re- quired to join sections of Cannon Ball Tubular Track sections of the bracket and also extend down so the two rivets shown connect the two as to engage the slots at the ends of the rail sections, preventing them from turning. Cannon Ball Intermediate Track Bracket, Fig. 683, is used to support sections of Cannon Ball Tubular Track longer than 3-feet. These ~ Fig. 683 Intermediate Track Bracket Fig. 680 End Track Bracket Intermediate Track Brackets differ only from the Center Track Brackets in that they can be slid along the rail as desired, whereas the Center Track Brackets connect and support only the ends of the sections. Cannon Ball End Track Bracket, Fig. 680, is required to close up and support the ends of the track. The Cannon Ball Center and Intermediate Track Brackets are packed two dozen to the crate. Weight per crate, 23 lbs. The Cannon Ball End Track Brackets are packed one dozen to the crate. Weight per crate, 8 lbs. Page Two Hundred Seventy-nine fs HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & COs & No. 651 Covered Cannon Ball Door Track (Illustrated in Connection with the No. 440 Adjustable Cannon Ball Hanger) Fig. 685 Splices Furnished Free with Covered Cannon Ball Track (Not necessary to specify) Fig. 651 HE Covered Cannon Ball Track illustrated above combines all the advantages of the Standard Can- non Ball Track shown on the preceding pages. To this, add the advantage of a deep cover, which is riveted (not welded) to the track itself. This cover is sufficient in depth so that it not merely sheds those rains which descend gently, but the cover ‘a Two Hundred Eighty comes clear down below the top of the door as shown in the illustration. By countersinking the stirrup of the hanger, the door can be brought still higher so that the door is enclosed in a it practically manner which makes weather-tight. This cover not only gives the greatest possible measure of protection as in- dicated above, but acts as a support for % STAR LINE EQUIPMENT _ * No. 651 Covered Cannon Ball Door Track (Continued) the track, doing away with brackets. Any of the Cannon Ball Hangers shown on pages 275, 276 and 277 can be used in connection with this Covered Cannon Ball Track. Covered Cannon Ball Track is fur- nished in four, six and eight-foot lengths. Four pieces of one length are packed in acrate. Weight of track, four and one-half pounds per foot. End Track Brackets are the same as those used with regular Cannon Ball Track and are packed in crates of one and two dozen each. Weight per dozen, 9 lbs. GannonBall andi Governed! Gannon Ball brack HE special advantage of using the weatherproof cover supplied with Covered Cannon Ball Track is in the protection afforded where the track is actually above the door opening. The rest of the track may be regular Cannon Ball—without the cover. The splice shown in Fig. 685 on the opposite page makes a neat, smooth connection between the Covered Cannon Ball Track and that which is built with- out the cover. By using the Covered Cannon Ball Track immediately above the door open- ing and Cannon Ball without the cover for the balance of the track, quite a saving is effected. Combination of Regular and Covered Track Fig. 658 The accompanying illustration shows a practical and popular way of combin- ing regular Cannon Ball Track with Covered Cannon Ball Track. As shown the covered track is used only where it is required over the door opening. (Covered Cannon Ball Track described on opposite page. Regular Cannon Ball Track shown on pages 278 and 279.) Page Two Hundred Eighty-one » HUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO- * Weatherproof Cannon Ball Barn Door Track and Hangers N the Weatherproof Cannon | Ball Barn Door Track the top of the hood is turned in toward the building and clamped to it. The lower edge of the hood is bent out, forming a long deflector which throws the rain away from the building. The hood comes well down below the top of the door, preventing rain or wind from entering over the door. The hood or shield carries no weight whatsoever —it is a weather Fig. 648 Vii + Weatherproof | Hit fags Ball Sa i! ; Va protection pure and simple. Oor Tac shown Wh / ie with the No. 653 ji} poe Weatherproof Cannon Ball Hanger i er TREE CELT coca Track itself is of much heavier sae construction than the hood, be- ing made of 14-gauge steel, strong and heavy enough to meet every requirement. Both track and hood are held in place by the same bolts which also support the track brackets. No. 653 Weatherproof Cannon Ball Hanger In Fig. 647 is shown the No. 653 Cannon Ball door hanger in connection with the track. A picture of the same hanger alone is shown in Fig. 653. Weight per dozen pairs, 74 lbs. No. 661 Adjustable Weatherproof Cannon Ball Hanger yN Gi The hanger shown at the right is similar in construction to the hanger shown at the left and other illustra- tions on this and the opposite pages. The difference is that it is fitted with an adjustable strap which permits the door to be raised or lowered—or set closer or farther from the barn—after the door is hung. Fig. 653 Weight per dozen pairs, 96 lbs. Fig. 661 Page Two Hundred Eighty-two 4 STAR LINE EQUIPMENT — No. 647 Weatherproof Cannon Ball Barn Door Track SS I (cl i S. A hinged strap at the end of each Fig. 647 section of cover is used to draw adjoining When strap is raised, as shown above, sections into line with each other so that = it uncovers a round opening through which they make a neat, tight, weatherproof = the lateral adjustment of the hangers can connection and are sécurely joined. SS" __sibe made by the use of a screwdriver. N Figure 658 is shown a sectional view of Weatherproof | Cannon Ball Track and Hanger. This illustration clearly shows the extra deep cover or hood, with which the track is provided. It also shows how the track conforms exactly to the shape of the steel ball wheel, giving the wheel an even bearing on both sides. This illustration also shows the shape of the stirrup, which conforms to the shape of the track and prevents the hanger from jumping off. The track and cover being independent of each other, the track is put up before the cover is applied. Nail holes are pro- vided along the upper edge so that the track can be set in place, properly alligned and securely fastened before the cover is bolted on. Center Track Brackets N Figure 656 at the left is shown the Center Track Bracket or Splice, by means of which two sections of track are accurately lined up where they con- nect, making a smooth joint. Thisetracks issfurnished in 4) .6-and | Wonee or Canoe 8-foot lengths, and is packed in crates of Ball Track and Hanger 52 feet, made up of two 4-foot, two 6-foot and four 8-foot lengths. Weight of track, per foot, 3!4 lbs. Enough Center Track Brackets to install the track are included in each crate of track. End Track Brackets packed in crates of one dozen each. Weight of brackets, per dozen, 7 lbs. Fig. 658 Page Two Hundred Eighty-three * Page Two a 8 ee ee ee — HROUNT- HELM -FERRIS & COs * No. 845 Weatherproof Tandem Door Hanger = ——===== HE Weatherproof Tandem Door r= Hanger shown in Fig. 845 at the left is practically noiseless and Ar frictionless. The toughness of steel men 7 with the desirable qualities of iron, ¢ have been combined in the construc- tion of the wheels. They are roller bearing, as indicated in Fig. 571, and run in a roomy groove. The tandem truck holds the wheels in alignment and prevents them from sticking or binding. Packed one pair in a box; six pairs in a carton. Weight per dozen pairs, : =“ 85 lbs. See opposite page for descrip- Sectional View of Wheel tion of track. Showing Roller Bearings No. 846 Weatherproof Tandem Door Hanger Lateral and Vertical Adjustments N Fig. 846 at the right is shown | the Weatherproof Tandem Door Hanger, which combines all the desirable features of the No. 845 hanger shown above in addition to the adjustable features. The door strap of high carbon steel & is so designed that by turning the screw in the top of it, the door can be placed closer to the building or set farther away from it. By loosening the two nuts at either side of the strap, the height of the door may be adjusted by turning the nut at the bottom of the strap. By using this hanger, doors that have swelled or warped can be operated as easily as a new door. Packed one pair in a box; six pairs in a carton. Weight per dozen pairs, 107 Ibs. Fig. 846 Hundred Eighty-four STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 847 Weatherproof Barn Door Track ) ie) | Fig. 847 HIS, new Weatherproof Barn Door Track is all that its name | implies. The deep cover affords a shelter that protects the track, brackets and hangers from the ravages of rust, and more important still—it comes down below the top of the door and keeps rain, sleet and snow from blowing into the barn. Easiest Track to Install No directions are needed. There is nothing to figure out. You can’t put it up wrong. Track, brackets, cover and cover splices are all riveted together, making a one-piece track. You can start at either end. Lag screw one piece to the barn, add the other sections, hang your door, put on your end stops and the job is done. And that’s all you will ever have to do, because both track and hangers are virtually trouble-proof. The cover cannot sag and rub on the hangers. Neither can it lose its shape, and the weatherproof feature that the shape gives it; it has no weight to hold up, the track being independently supported by good, strong brackets, as shown in both pictures on this page. The illustrations also show how the heavy track is firmly riveted to these sturdy brackets. There is no danger of the track being torn loose from its fastenings. The sectional view at the right shows that the hanger has plenty of clearance and the groove in which the wheels operate is large enough to give the wheels ample room to run without sticking or binding. The track can’t be thrown out of line at the joints because—as shown in the cut-away view above—the lip or projection from the end of one piece of track fits accurately into a corresponding notch in the end of the next section. This automatically lines up the track. It makes an even joint so that the operation of the hanger is perfectly smooth. Track comes in 4 ft., 6 ft. and 8 ft. lengths. It is packed in crates of 52 ft., consisting of two 4 ft., two 6 ft. and four 8 ft. sections. Weight of track per foot, 214 lbs. End track brackets packed with hangers. Fig. 848 Sectional View Page Two Hundred Eighty-five > a HUN T- HELM -FERRIS & CO- > <¢ No. 28 Twentieth Century Door Hanger Roller Bearing, for Round Track Fig. 35 Rear View HERE always has and probably always will exist a demand for a strictly A No. 1 round track door hanger. The Twentieth Century Barn Door Hanger has proven itself a decided improvement, both in style and construction, on all other hangers of this class. Both frame and hood of the hanger are one mal- leable piece. This makes it strong enough for the largest doors. ae 50) The wheels have wide grooves and run on hardened Front View Sectional View steel roller bearings which, of course, reduce friction to a minimum. A projecting lip below the wheel makes it impossible to jump the track. The hanger, running on round track, possesses about the same amount of flexibility as ordinary hinge or flexible types. Finish is battleship gray enamel and red. Hangers packed one pair in a box with bolts and brackets—six pairs to wooden case. Weight, per dozen pairs, 74 Ibs. Page Two Hundred Eighty-six STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 30 Twentieth Century Door Track Made in Two-foot Sections Only HE fact that Twentieth Century Barn Door Track is made in two- foot sections gives it five distinct advantages over ordinary round track. Here they are— 1. Easier to erect. You don’t have to juggle ten-foot sections in the air. 2. Bracket turns on splice so rail cannot warp. 3. Any width of door can be fitted with the necessary length of track. Carpenter doesn’t have to find different length of track for different doors. 4. Dealer at all times has complete stock of track as it is only necessary Fig. 49. Track Fig. 82. Splice Fig. 42. End Bracket for him to carry one length. This can easily be stored under counter if desired. 5. The track is closed—the only round track that IS—consequently no water can get in to rust it away. We positively guarantee that this track is as strong at the splice as at any other point and stiff enough to sustain the heaviest door. The splice is exactly the same diam- eter as the track and forms a continuous and smooth passage for the hanger. All track crated 100 feet to crate, finished diameter 11% feet, 120 lbs. in battleship gray enamel; inches; weight per 100 — ie Daca et te oe eens ee ace SR ee aX 20t)-Centyup oBARN DOOR TRACK LM A FERRIS BeC0. HARVARD I Fig. 140 Crate Containing 100 feet Section Bracket * Page Two Hundred Eighty-seven a > a HUNT- HELM -FERRIS & COs. * No. 397 Flexo Door Hanger Roller Bearing—Hinge Type HE FLEXO HANGER, as the name suggests, meets every demand for a practical hinge hanger to operate on flat track. This hanger is flexible and hinged to the door “soit vcans be pushed out at the bottom, as illustrated in Fig. 399, if de- sired. This hanger cannot jump the track nor get out of order. Fig. 397 The Flexo Hanger is neat Fig. 308 Bron View, in design and nicely finished Back View in gray enamel, trimmed with red. It is roller bearing and fitted with a double steel door strap attached. The removable steel pin, secured by a cotter, permits attaching the door strap to the hanger after it has been secured to the door. One pair of hangers, complete with bolts, packed in a pasteboard box, one dozen pairs to wooden case. Weight, per dozen pairs, 64 Ibs. No. 160 Flexo Door Track used with Flexo Door Hangers, is made of high carbon steel, ;'5 x 1/4 in., furnished in 6, 8 and 10 ft. lengths. Weight, per 100 ft., 105 lbs. 3 Wi ‘ | < We) Fig. 160 Flexo Track Page Two Hundred Eighty-cicht QQ? BOVS ai) “So N S y | 5 6 Do * HUOUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO —yr No. 800 Cannon Ball Combination Garage Door Set (Folding-Sliding) Fig. 785 HE Cannon Ball Combination (Folding-Sliding) Garage Door Set, neat and efficient, has been especially designed for use on‘ all types of garages. By the use of regular Can- non Ball Track and specially designed Cannon Ball Hangers we have devised a complete garage outfit which will fit a door opening of any size up to 814 feet. The same outfit can be furnished for wider doors on special order. Like other Cannon Ball Hangers and Track, this garage door hanging is frictionless and noiseless and operates most éasily. When the folding-sliding doors are opened Page Two Hundred Ninety they are automatically held in place by the patented spring bracket which sup- ports the end of the track. This spring device operates regardless of the thick- ness of the doors. An adjustment on the hanger prevents the doors sag- ging. As the folding-sliding doors fold inside, they take up a minimum amount of space and operate in a small circum- ference. If it is undesirable to operate the whole front, a convenient entrance is obtained by means of a single swing- ing door. By the use of this outfit the opening is made weather tight. These sets are packed complete, ready to install. > STAR LINE EQUIPMEN a | No. 800 Cannon Ball Combination Garage Door Set (Folding-Sliding—Continued) N Fig. 787 is illustrated the inside of a garage with the doors closed and the complete Cannon Ball Combination Garage Set in view. Note how perfectly the doors fit the opening, making it weather-tight. The door to the right swings independently of the other two, permitting an easy entrance to or exit from the garage —a great convenience at all times, especially in cold weather. The Fig. 787 two spring door bolts, one located at the top, the other at the bottom, at IGURE 786 shows the inside of a the center of the folding-sliding doors, kK garage with all the doors open. lock them securely and keep the entrance Note that the private entrance weather-tight. door swings back against the wall at the right. Also that the two folding-sliding doors on the left roll back on our special Garage Hanger running in Cannon Ball Track, and fold against the wall, where they lie flat, occupying only the space required by their own thickness. They are held in this position by our patented Spring Bracket which sup- ports the track at the end, as shown in the illustration. When the doors are folded back against the wall, the spring in the bracket holds them securely, regardless of their thickness. Fig. 786 Page Two Hundred Ninety-one > HUNT: HELM- FERRIS & CO-- +* No. 800 Cannon Ball Combination Garage Door Set (Folding-Sliding—Continued) Fig. 788 IGURE 788 shows the Cannon Ball Spring Track support attached to the |e of the track at the left. The Track is supported at the opposite end by a track bracket that swivels. When the Folding-Sliding Doors are opened, the track adjusts itself to allow. the doors to swing around and lie flat against the wall. The spring in the supporting bracket holds the doors securely against the wall, regardless of their thickness. The doors can be closed by simply giving them a slight pull—they almost close themselves. Dealers’ Display Outfit WE) hte this model on your counter, or in your show win- dow. Demonstrate to con- tractors and builders of garages the only perfect Combination Garage Door Set. A neatly printed placard is in- cluded with each model, stating twelve big talking points that are bound to convince. Include one of these models with your next order for Cannon Ball Hangers. Weight, each, 24 lbs. . Fig. 790 S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 800 Cannon Ball Combination Garage Door Set (Folding-Sliding—Continued) be. 800 shows one complete garage set. This set contains: 1 614-foot length of Cannon Ball Track. 1 Cannon Ball Swivel Bracket. 1 Floor Guide. 1 Hand Pull. 1 Specially designed Tandem Cannon Ball Hanger. 6 “T”’ Hinges. 3 Butt Hinges. 1 set Chain and Foot Bolts. 1 Spring Supporting Bracket for Cannon Ball Track. 1 Cannon Ball Door Latch. The necessary screws, lags and bolts are included for installation. A complete set, ready to be installed. Weight, per set, 35 lbs. Fig. 789 FLOOR GUIDE FOR CANNON BALL COMBINATION GARAGE DOOR SET IGURE 789 shows the operation F of the floor guide used in con- nection with the Cannon Ball Combination Garage set. The folding-sliding doors glide into it easily, and will hold firmly in place when once closed. The swinging door slides into place and when these doors are locked, the floor guide pre- vents any play. It holds the doors firmly. Fig. 802 SPECIAL GARAGE HANGER IGURE 802 illustrates the Special Garage Hanger Pivsea in the Cannon Ball Combination Garage Door Set. This hanger is of the tandem type, each wheel revolving on ten cold rolled steel roller bearings. This hanger swivels, permitting an easy opera- tion of the doors. It is an adjustable hanger, a feature which permits the doors to operate if they are warped, or if the floor is swelled. One hanger packed in a Cannon Ball Combination Garage Door Set. Page Two Hundred Ninety-three » a HUNT+- HELM - FERRIS & CO-- No. 900 Flexo Folding-Sliding Garage Door Set Fig. 985 HE above illustration pictures the practicability of the No. 900 Flexo Folding-Sliding Garage Set. Note that the service door swings back against the wall at the right, also that the two folding-sliding doors on the left roll back on our special Garage Hanger. These doors fold back against the wall where they lie flat, occupying only the space required by their own thickness. See Fig. 886 on opposite page. The end of the track being blocked out, holds the door securely back against the wall. Two Hundred Ninety-four The distinctive features of the No. 900 Flexo Folding-Sliding Garage Door Set which will appeal to you, are 1. Fits any opening. 2. Easy to install. 3. Adjustable Hanger to take care of sagging. 4. A weather-proof entrance. 5. Doors fold inside, occupying minimum space. 6. Neat in appearance and efficient in service. Ss TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 900 Flexo Folding-Sliding Garage Door Set (Continued) HE Flexo Folding-Sliding Garage Door Set, Fig. 900, includes sufficient items for one complete Garage outfit. The set contains one length of track, one floor guide, one specially de- signed Garage Hanger, one-half dozen “T” hinges, three butts, one pair chain and foot bolts and one Cannon Ball Door Latch. ll i ic Pall One hand pull. The necessary (ge aes (ee a hee Brena * Cannon Ball Garage Door Hangers For Use with Cannon Ball Curve and Right Angle Installations, Fig. 715 Weight per dozen pairs, 56 lbs. © sn installations shown on pages 298 and 299 (GHG & 7) E Fig. 735 Weight per dozen pairs, 76 lbs, Used in installation shown on page 297 Page Two Hundred Ninety-six Described on the Following Pages HE old, reliable Cannon Ball Hanger built with special straps and_ swivelling arrangement. The Straps are adjustable to fit a door of any thickness and are also reversible, allowing attach- ment at either right or left end of the door. The swivelling arrangement is necessary in order that the hangers will operate in the curve or right angle. Figure 715 illustrates the Single - Wheel Non - adjustable Cannon Ball Garage Swivel Hanger for use in connection with Cannon Ball Curve. Figure 734 illustrates the Single-Wheel Adjustable Cannon Ball Garage Swivel Hanger for use in connection with Cannon Ball Curve. Figure 735 illustrates the Two- Wheel Non-adjustable Cannon Ball Garage Swivel Hanger for use in connection with the Can- non Ball Right Angle. Figure 736 illustrates the Two- Wheel Adjustable Cannon Ball Garage Swivel Hanger for use in connection with Cannon Ball Right Angle. Fig. 734 Weight per dozen pairs, 67 lbs. Used in installations shown on pages 298 and 299 Weight per dozen pairs, 89 lbs. Used in installation shown on page 297 STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Fig. 737 NE of the general types of garages for which garage 6) equipment must be furnished, is where the opening is placed to the extreme side of the front of the garage. The accompanying illustration shows how in such a case, the door can be installed by the use of a Cannon Ball Right Angle in connection with Cannon Ball Track and Brackets (see pages 278 and 279). The Cannon Ball Right Angle consists of two 3-foot lengths of track, cut out, intercrossed and gas- welded, forming a right angle. Each arm of the right angle is 3 feet in length; isnotched on the end, as isa regular piece of Cannon Ball Track, so that it can be joined to Cannon Ball Track by the use of Cannon Ball Center Brackets. Two runs of track are installed and joined by the Cannon Ball Right Angle. With this arrange- ment, Cannon Ball Tandem Garage Hangers, Nos. 735 or 736, page 296, are used. A Single Door should have two handles set a foot from each end of the door. For an installation where the Cannon Ball Right Angle is used, the following material is necessary: FOR ONE 8-FOOT DOOR 1-12 dozen pair No. 735 or No. 736 Cannon Ball Garage Hangers. 12 feet Fig. 387 Cannon Ball Track. 7 A The No. 716 Cannon Ball Right Angle for use with Cannon One only Fig. 716 Cannon Ball Right Angle. 1-3 dozen Fig. 682 Cannon Ball Center Brackets. 1-6 dozen Fig. 680 Cannon Ball End Brackets. Note that this takes care of the type of garage where the Cannon Ball Track Curve cannot be used, for lack of space. If the garage is too short to permit the use of an 8-foot door, two 4-foot doors can easily be installed, but such installations require careful fitting. (Any Fig. 716 Ball Track and Brackets. Weight, each, 15 lbs, Two supporting brackets are furnished as shown in the illustration. Page Two Hundred Ninety-seven * Page Two HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & COs Cannon Ball Curve Installation ABE: ead | i 1 a ; Hh / / fai / Mids ia Fig. 775 Y the arrangement of Cannon Ball Track as shown in the accompanying illustration, rolling doors can be used where the opening is nearly as wide as the building itself. When hung in this manner the doors remain inside the building where they are not subject to damage by wind or accident, and when open lie back against the wall where they occupy only the space required by their own thickness. To arrange Cannon Ball Track as shown in Fig. 775, Cannon Ball Track Curve Fig. 712 is used. The Cannon Ball Track Curve is a curved length of standard Cannon Ball Track. It fits into brackets like the straight lengths. A special support riveted to the top of the curve and fastened to a brace as shown, keeps the curve from twisting or sagging. of the curve is twelve inches. The distance from the middle of the track bracket, joining the curve and the straight track, to the corner is 141% inches. The opening should be started at least 15 inches from the corner, so that the door hangers rest in the straight track when the door is closed. Cannon Ball Single Wheel Garage Swivel Hangers, as shown in Fig. 715 and Fig. 734, page 296, are used in connection with the track curve. A handle should be attached to each of the outer sections of the three-section door, one foot from the outer edge of each. A third handle should be located in the middle of the center section. Hundred | Ninety-eight The center radius | Equipment necessary for complete installation where Cannon Ball Curve is used: FOR ONE 3 SECTION, 8-FOOT DOOR 1-6 dozen pair No. 715 or No. 734 Cannon Ball Garage Hangers. 18 feet Fig. 387 Cannon Ball Track. 1 only Fig. 712 Cannon Ball Curve. 14 dozen Fig. 682 Cannon Ball Center Brackets. 1-6 dozen Fig. 680 Cannon Ball End Brackets. il Fig. 712 The No. 712 Cannon Ball Track Curve for use with Fig. 387 Cannon Ball Track, Brackets, etc. Weight, each, 4 lbs. N Fig. 774 is I illustrated the two-door in- stallation for use with the Cannon Ball Curve. These two doors may be hinged in the mid- dle, and by using the No. 715 or No. 734 Cannon Ball Garage Swivel Hangers, illustra- ted on page 296, they may be opera- ted easily and suc- © cessfully. Two door pulls as shown in the illustration, should be located at least six inches from outside edge of each door. the space required by their own thickness. as they require less space in turning the corner. Cannon Ball Curve Installation See TT STAR LINE EQUIPMENT OT Fig. 774 These doors, when open, lie against the side wall and occup; aly They are much more convenient than a single door Regular Cannon Ball Track, Fig. 387, Center Brackets, Fig. 682, and End Brackets, Fig. 680, are used, together with a regular Cannon Ball Curve as shown in Fig. 712 on the preceding page. Equipment necessary: Cannon Ball Track. a roe i ——= 7 Fig. 773 2 only Fig. «712 Cannon Ball Curve. 1-6 doz. Fig. 680 Cannon Ball End Brackets. IGURE 773 F shows the in- side arrange- ment of a garage where two four- foot doors meeting in the center are used to close an eight-foot door opening. Fig. 712 Cannon Ball Track Curve is used in connection with Fig. 387 Cannon Ball Track, Fig. 382 Cannon Ball Cen- ter Brackets and Fig. 680 Cannon Ball End Brackets. When two four-foot doors are used, each should have a handle set six inches from the outside edge. 1-6 doz. pair No. 715 or No. 734 Cannon Ball Garage Hangers. 21 feet Fig. 387 24 doz. Fig. 682 Cannon Ball Center Brackets. Page Two Hundred Ninety-nine Page Three HUNT:HELM nee Fig. 776 Cannon Ball Parallel-Track Installation HE Cannon Ball Parallel-Track Installation is shown in the above illus- | tration. Note that two runs of Fig. 387 Cannon Ball Tubular Track are supported by Fig. 696 Cannon Ball Parallel Center Brackets. Cannon Ball Door Hangers as illustrated on pages 275, 276 or 277 are used. _ This installation is adapted for permitting one series of Doors to operate in connection with another series of doors on an adjoining track. This arrange- ment permits the doors to pass or repass each other so that two doors or two series of doors occupy no greater space than one, if desired. Fig. 861 shows a cross section of twodoors and the two tracks running parallel, which instantly conveys the practicability of this arrangement where it is de- sirable to use doors to close a wider opening than a single door would occupy. Brackets for supporting runs of Cannon Ball Track installed parallel, are fitted with two sleeves of 12-gauge material riveted to a triangular brace made of 3-16 x 114 inch steel. The rivets project *g of aninchon the inside of the track, engaging the slots in the ends of the track sections, preventing them from turning, thus keeping the track in perfect alignment. Parallel Cannon Ball Center or Intermediate brackets, weight per dozen, 30 lbs. Parallel Cannon Ball End Brackets, weight per dozen, 12 Ibs. Fig. 803 Cannon Ball Parallel Intermediate Bracket Fig. 698 ‘ Cannon Ball Parallel End Bracket Cannon Ball Parallel Center Bracket Hundred “FERRIS & COs # Lag Sc | Adjustable | | Adjustable Fig. 861 #” The Illustration # above is drawn to exact scale and shows the proper method of attachingand supporting the track. a STAR LINE EQUIPMENT te Fig. 780 Cannon Ball Straight-Track Installation “3 Brackets Fig. 682 and End Brackets Fig. 680 are used in the installation shown in the above illustra- tion. This installation is used where a door is hung on the inside of a garage sufficiently wide to permit the door sliding back as illustrated in Fig. 780. Any one of the Cannon Ball Hangers illustrated and described on pages 275, 276 or 277 may be used in this installation, but we suggest the use of No. 440 Cannon Ball Tandem. Door Hanger illustrated herewith. This has proven most satis- factory. A complete description of Cannon Ball Track and Brackets may be found on pages 278 and 279. Fig. 440 illustrates Cannon Ball Tandem Barn Door Hanger for installations as shown above. For description see page 276. Fig. 440 R ‘Brackets Cannon Ball Track Fig. 387, Center Page Three Hundred One Je HUNT +: HELM -FERRIS & CO-s Barn Door Stay Rollers No. 174 HARVARD STAY ROLLER No. 176 PERFECTION STAY ROLLER TEEL frame with gray iron wheel, as shown in Figure 174. Easily and quickly adjusted. Cannot roll over or get away from the door. Japan finish. Packed one-half dozen in pasteboard box. Weight, per dozen, 11 pounds. Fig. 176 The frame of Fig. 176 is made of heavy steel and the adjusting parts ofiron. Can- not turn over sideways or get away from the door. Japan finish, packed one Fig. 174 dozen in a box. ® Weight, per dozen, 12 pounds. No. 173 STANDARD STAY ROLLER Made of steel{with gimlet point thread and gray iron wheel. Illustrated in Fig. 173. Japan finish. Weight, per dozen, 7 pounds. Fig. 173 iI | i No. 172 STAR STAY ROLLER (ADJUSTABLE) Fig. 172 illustrates the STAR Door Stay Roller. It will pay you to look at its design carefully. Positively cannot roll over sideways or bend away from the door. Spike is made of best malleable iron. Lag screw is put in to hold it in place. BAIA AL IAA AIA Japan finish. Packed one dozen in pasteboard box. Weight, per dozen, Fig. 172 11 pounds. Page Three Hundred Two STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Barn Door Stay Rollers No. 175 DUPLEX STAY ROLLER lappy yy yyy Fig. 175 HE principal points of the roller illustrated in Fig. 175 are strength and neatness. Lag screw is 5 x 14 inches and wheel is made of gray iron. Packed one dozen to the pasteboard box. Weight, per dozen, 11 lbs. No. 563 UNIVERSAL STAY ROLLER Adjustable and Reversible Fig. 563 Mh ui ummm “ IGURE 563 shows the Universal Stay Roller in position where it is desired to attach it to the barn. Note extra wide space between screw holes, giving added strength and rigidity. The Universal Stay Roller is reversible, thus allowing roller being used where it is desirable to set the legs in cement floor or driveway. This would be necessary in case of a cement or stone barn. The end of the plate to which the wheel is attached is slotted. This makes the roller adjustable to doors of different widths. Packed 1% dozen in pasteboard box and 3 dozen in wooden box for shipping. Japan finish. Weight, per dozen, 11 pounds. No. 754 THE GIANT STAR STAY ROLLER Fig. 754 A Stay Roller That Is a Giant in Strength HE Giant STAR Stay Roller was designed on account of the great demand for a large, heavy, stay roller for cement. It is made of the very best iron throughout. The wheel is 31% inches in diameter, having an inch and a quarter face. The complete roller is 6 inches in height. The bottom loop or template is firmly imbedded in the cement. The stay roller being separate, it can be attached by the two bolts and nuts as shown in the illustration, after the cement has hardened around the template. The roller is adjustable to doors of different thick- nesses by means of the two bolts as shown in the illustration. Finished in black japan. Packed loose. Weight, each, 3 lbs. Page Three Hundred Three P age Three HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & CO- No. 694 Cannon Ball Door Latch For Swinging or Sliding Doors | Mn ; i Fig. 694 The Cannon Ball Door Latch illustrated in Fig. 694 may be used on any door whether it slides or swings, and whether it opens to the right or left. It latches automatically, being con- trolled by a single, simple spring, which makes its operation quick and sure. “The latch guard is so designed that it cannot be opened by accident, although it can be easily opened by a turn of the handle from either inside or outside. No. 793 Cannon Ball Door Stop =|\\\ i t \i S\ Fig. 793 HE Cannon Ball Door Stop illustrated in Fig. 793 is constructed of special high carbon steel. It is firmly braced, and when attached to the side of the building, offers a perfect and substantial bumper for the door. Adjustable to doors of different thicknesses. It is finished in black Japan. Packed one dozen in box. Weight, per dozen, 9 lbs. Hundred Four A padlock may be hooked into a hole above the latch bolt, locking the door. The latch plate, handles, and all exposed parts are so shaped and protected that they will not catch on harness or other passing objects. This latch is designed to fit doors of any thickness up to two and one-half inches. Finished in black japan, thoroughly baked on at a high temperature. Each latch packed separately in cardboard cartons. Weight, per one-half dozen, 8 lbs. No. 177 Star Gravity Barn Door Catch Fig. 177 Fastened to the side of the building, this de- vice automatically catches the door and holds it open. Packed one dozen in a box. Weight, per dozen, 6 lbs. * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Ww No. 823 Star Outside Door Latch HE STAR Door Latch, as shown in. Fig. 823 at the left, is used outside to draw a pair of sliding doors together, making the connection tight and stormproof. The hook or catch is inserted in the loop attached to the stationary part of the latch. The handle is then pushed down into the position shown in the NAAT Fig. 823 picture just as you would close the blade of a knife: The strong spring attached to the loop not only draws the doors tightly together, but also automatically locks the latch so that it can- not be opened by accident. The latch handle can be locked shut with a padlock. This latch is especially valuable where doors have been so warped or reixed that they do not meet evenly in the middle. No. 823 STAR Door Latches are packed in paper cartons. Weight per dozen, 10 lbs. No. 860 Star Inside Door Latch HE lower illustration on this page shows a latch used to draw the door up tight against the casing. This makes a stormproof connection between the door and the building. It is par- ticularly desirable in the case of doors which have been hung for some time and do not accurately fit the opening. The construction of this latch differs but slightly from that of the latch shown above in Fig. 823; it operates in exactly the same manner. It can be locked with a padlock. Fig. 860 STAR Inside Door Latches are packed in paper cartons. Weight per dozen, 10 lbs. Fig. 860 Page Three Hundred Fiy * Page Thr HOUNtT- HELM -FERRIS & CO- de No. 404 Cannon Ball House Door Hanger N response to repeated demands that we manu- facture a house door hanger similar in construc- tion to the Cannon Ball i Barn Door Hanger we pre- ss sent herewith our Cannon Ball House Door Hanger and Track which possesses features of merit and ad- vantage not found in other makes of goods of this class. aim —— an = Diss TS [| The hanger and plate for attaching to the door are made of steel; the adjusting screw has an extra long bearing in the Yrame of the hang- er, making a very strong and positive ad- justment; two specially formed wheels are used which are indestructible, wide tread, leather covered, noise- less, fitted with roller bearings and are, therefore, light running. The hangers are packed one full set or half set ina wooden box, neatly labeled. Ten full or half sets in a crate. Weight of hangers, per pair, 4! lbs. The track used is made from No. 14 gauge steel, specially formed, and slotted 14-inch on the under side to take the hanger frame. The diameter is 214 inches, inside measurement. The construction has been rigidly Fig. 441 tested and is guaranteed to be entirely satisfactory. Noiseless, Leather-Tread Wheel of the Cannon Ball House Weight of track, per foot, 2 lbs. IBIS SEEN SF Fig. 441 illustrates the specially formed rollers used on the Cannon Ball House Door Hanger. These rollers have steel bushings covered with sole leather washers, with a red fibre washer at either end, all of which are brought together under heavy pressure and held in place.on either side by a steel washer. The wheel is then placed in a lathe and perfectly turned to the required size. ee Hundred Six S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 411 Cannon Ball House Door Track 7, Fig. 411 HIS Track is made from No. 14 gauge steel, construction has been rigidly tested and is guar- specially formed and slotted 14-inch onthe anteed to be entirely satisfactory. Weight of under side to take the hanger frame. The track, per foot, 2 lbs. Furnished with two- diameter is 214 inches, inside measurement. The piece hardwood header. Fig. 412 Track Adjustment We call particular attention to the track ad- the use of a screwdriver only. Either end of justment. It is not necessary to take the Can-_ the track may be raised or lowered as desired and non Ball Track down to adjust it. The track secured in the adjusted position. This is a feature is adjusted quickly at the door opening with not found in any other house door track. DOUBLE DOORS DOUBLE DOORS SINGLE DOORS SINGLE DOORS No. SizeofOpening No. Size of Opening No. SizeofOpening No. Size of Opening 24 4 ft. 27 Tri 121% Qi. Oiin: 15% 5 ft. 6 in. 2416 4 ft. 6 in. 27% 7 ft. 6 in. is) Site 16 Ontts 25 5 ft: 28 8 ft. 131% 3 ft. 6 in. 1614 6 ft. 6 in. 2514 5 ft. 6 in. 29 9 ft. 14 4 ft. 17 Tkts 26 6 ft. 210 10 ft. 141% 4 ft. 6 in. -17% 7 ft. 6 in. 2614 6 ft. 6 in. 15 Sette Fage Three Hundred Seven HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & CO No. 468 Cannon Ball, Jr., House Door Hanger ii : ih / ry hi — Fig. 468 IGURE 468 illustrates the Cannon Ball, Jr., F House Door Hanger, which is of the same construction and has the same adjustment as the Cannon Ball House Door Hanger. The only difference is that it has a single wheel in- stead of two wheels. The roller is covered with sole leather and is therefore noiseless. The track is shipped with the header attached as shown DOUBLE DOORS DOUBLE DOORS No. Size of Opening No. Size of Opening 24 4 ft. 27 Tkte 2416 4 ft. 6 in. 271% 7 ft. 6 in. 25 5 ft 28 8 ft. 2516 5 ft. 6 in. 29 Ont: 26 6 ft. 210 10 ft. 261% 6 ft. 6 in. Zs Zh in the illustration and is easily installed and guaranteed to work perfectly. The hangers are packed one full or half set in a wooden box, neatly labeled. Ten full or half sets in a crate. Screws, stop and floor guides packed with the hangers. Weight of hangers, per pair, 414 lbs. Weight of track, per foot, 2 lbs. SINGLE DOORS SINGLE DOORS No. Sizeof Opening No. Size of Opening 12144 2 ft. 6 in. 1514 “Siftonnt 13 Sate 16 Orit. 13144 3 ft. 6 in. 1614 6 ft. 6 in. 14 4 ft. 17 eakte 141% 4 ft. 6 in. 1714 7 ft. 6 in. 15 Sift. 18 8 ft. -age Three Hundred Eight 70S Lt I flardware JSpecr * HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & CO- >< Page Three No. 844 New Star Tank Heater Cast Iron—One Size Only Figure 844 HE New STAR Tank Heater illustrated above is a later design of the STAR Tank Heater, which has been so long and favorably known in every state where tank heaters are used. This New STAR Heater differs from the former type in that it has square instead of rounding corners. This heater is cast in two halves, as the illustration shows. The New STAR Heater is carefully cast of the best gray iron. Its extra weight makes it self-sinking. It is not necessary to provide for any fastenings either in cement, wood, or steel tanks. The New STAR is a submerged heater. This means that the fire is entirely under the water so that the full benefit is derived from every bit of fuel burned. A heavy heater of this type holds the heat longer and keeps the water from freezing after the fuel is consumed. The basket grate is held in place by a heavy, steel handle, as illus- trated. The grate containing the fire is easily lifted out while the ashes are being removed and then dropped quickly into the position shown. The New STAR Heater, height 24 inches, shipping weight, 225 pounds. Hundred Ten Ss TAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 242 Star Tank Heater Cast Iron—One Size Only Fig. 242 HE STAR Tank Heater, shown in the above illustration, has been on the market for years and has given such an excellent account of itself that it needs no introduction in those localities where Tank Heaters are used and appreciated. Its reputation is such that there is a continued demand for it, some preferring a heater of this shape to the square type of heater shown in the illustration of the No. 844 heater on the preceding page. This heater is being made today, as it has been for several years past, of the very best quality of gray iron. It is a heavy heater that sinks of its own weight, thus making it unnecessary to provide for fastenings in either iron, cement or wooden tank. This heater is built on the principle of a base burner, the heat passing around the outer shell of the heater. By this system of radiation, the heat is so thrown into the water that a maximum amount of heat is given off with a minimum amount of fuel. Height 24 inches. Shipping weight, 240 lbs. Page Three Hundred Eleven > 4 HUNT+- HELM -FERRIS & COs Page Three No. 691 New Rinkle Tank Heater ‘ << HE New Rinkle Tank Heater is a sub- merged heater, which works on the same principle as the STAR Tank Heater shown on the opposite page, and can be used with wood, iron or cement tank. The body of the heater is made of 14-gauge boiler iron, all except the end or head being in one piece. The smoke pipe is of one piece, made with a flange at the base. This flange is electrically welded to the inside surface of the end of the heater, the hole in the end being cut slightly smaller than the pipe so that when the pipe is inserted it is held firmly in place. The end of the heater is made with a flange or a rim which is welded to the inner surface of Hundred Twelve Fig. 691 the body. This construction makes the New Rinkle one solid piece without seams. Being made of heavy boiler iron, it is proof against cracking. The grate shown in the illustration hangs in the heater. drops into position when replaced, which makes This grate is easily lifted out and it easy to clean out the ashes. The cover is made with a rim, which holds it in place and a handle and draft slide are riveted to the cover. As it is easy to operate and heats the most water for the amount of fuel consumed, it is a most economical heater. The New Rinkle Heater measures 24 inches high. Weight, 93 pounds. ee S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT ® No. 222 Iron King Tank Heater HE body is one piece, the draft chamber being separated from the fire pot by a steel partition. The draft opens at the lower end into the drum shaped portion of the body casting surrounding the basket grate, insuring an abundance of draft at all times. This heater has a cast iron ash pan and a grate shaker. One size only. Diameter, 14 inches. Height, 24 inches. Shipping weight, 143 lbs. Fig. 222 No. 223 Iron King Stay-Down Tank Heater HE illustration opposite shows the Iron King Heater same as above, with the addition of a weight casting which anchors the heater in the bottom of a gal- vanized or wood tank without the use of stay rods of any kind. This is the heater that the trade has been looking for. Sells on sight. One size “only. Diameter, 14 inches. . i n- i Hin Height, 24 inches. Shipping weight, 173 Ibs. tT Fig. 223 Page Three Hundred Thirteen i: HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & CO-. 4 Page Three size, 24 inches. Fig. 220 No. 221 Black Jack Tank Heater Basket Grate HE body casting on this heater is the same as on the heater shown above. This heater is furnished with basket grate. Height of either size, 24 inches. We furnish both heaters shown on this page with heat deflector where desired. Too much cannot be said in favor of the deflector. It is so constructed that the heat is conducted entirely around the outer surface of the heater before it enters the smoke pipe. It is a great fuel saver. No. 1. Diameter, 14 inches. Shipping weight, 110 Ibs. No. 2. Diameter, 17 inches. Shipping weight, 151 Ibs. Hundred Fourteen is possible. INo® =: Diameter, weight, 115 lbs. INO= 2k Diameter, weight, 147 lbs. No. 220 Black Jack Tank Heater Flat Grate is one piece, durable and heavy. No leak Furnished with flat grate. The entire top lifts off, allowing the easy removal of the ashes. The air chamber is a part of the © body casting and, therefore, just as durable as any other part of the heater. Height of either P ‘HIS heater is made of cast iron. The body 14 inches. Shipping 17 inches. Shipping WI Fig. 221 * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT * No. 214 Standard Tank Heater HE heaters shown on this page are made of ' galvanized steel, both body and bottom. They will last much longer than those made of com- mon black steel. The Standard Heater has a hinged grate, so that one-half can be raised with the poker and the ashes taken out without putting out the fire. Long, straight-handled shovel and poker furnished with each heater. Height of both sizes, 24 inches. No. 1. Diameter, 16 inches. Shipping weight, No. 2. Diameter, 19 inches. Shipping weight, 60 Ibs. r ff Lu eet eu aE; Fig. 214 No. 215 Harvard Tank Heater HE heaters shown on this page are tested with water before leaving the factory and warranted not to leak. The Harvard Heater has a basket grate. The fire can be taken out with the grate and replaced, thus saving the trouble of rekindling. Special long-handled shovel and poker furnished with each heater. Height of both sizes, 24 inches. No. 1. Diameter, 16 inches. Shipping weight, 45 lbs. No. 2. Diameter, 19 inches. Shipping weight, 65 lbs. Page Three Hundred Fifteen Page Three Nik | iN a id i \) Ht \ HE Cares and most powerful Wire Stretcher made. Quick, absolutely sure. Never slips, for the heavier the pull, the better the lock holds. A one-pound pull on the rope is equal to four pounds on the wire. Self-supporting from the post and locked and unlocked by a simple right or left movement of the hand. Made with steel blocks and malleable straps. Removable steel axles and hardened steel roller bearings. Equipped with No. 714 Giant Star HUNT +-HELM -FERRIS & CO-*. Stretcher Plain or Roller Bearing No. 498 Giant Star Tackle Block Wire Stretcher f" Plain or Roller Bearing Fig. 498 the best wire clamps ever put on a stretcher. Manufac- tured in three sizes, as shown on this page. Giant STAR Roller Bearing Tackle Block Wire Stretcher, finished in gray enamel, 3-inch sheaves, strung and wrapped with 23 feet of 12-inch manila rope, weight, per dozen, packed for shipment, 120 lbs. Also made plain bearing, finished in red enamel. “Jr.”’ Tackle Block Wire identical in construction with No. 498, shown above, only with 214-inch diam- eter sheaves. Strong, positive and efficient. Giant STAR “Junior” Roller Bearing Tackle Block Wire Stretcher, finished in gray enamel, strung and wrapped with 20 feet of 14-inch manila rope, 214-inch sheaves. Weight, per dozen, packed ready for shipment, 108 lbs. Also made plain bearing, finished in red enamel. A VERY popular number, | No. 482 Star Tackle Block Wire Stretcher Plain or Roller Bearing Hundred Sixteen AME as two numbers above, only made with smaller blocks and 2-inch sheaves. STAR Roller Bearing Tackle Block Wire Stretcher, finished in gray enamel, strung and wrapped with 16 feet of 3¢-inch manila rope. Weight, per dozen, packed ready for shipment, 66 lbs. Also made plain bearing, finished in red enamel. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 188 Star Malleable Tackle Block Wire Stretcher (Patented) Fig. 188 Stretcher each block is constructed with a swiveling hook.” Rope sheaves are covered and revolve on steel axles. Axles are headed at one end and held by cotter pin at the other, making it easy to replace sheaves whenever necessary. A one-pound pull on the rope is equal to four I: the STAR Malleable Tackle Block Wire pounds on the wire. Self-operating clamp holds the rope firmly at any point. It is locked and unlocked simply by moving the hand to right or left. Strung with 16 feet of 3-8 inch rope, ready for use. Weight, per dozen, 54 pounds. No. 400 Star Steel Tackle Block Wire Stretcher Plain or Roller Bearing Fig. 400 HE STAR Steel Tackle Block Stretcher is self-supporting at the post. Each block is constructed with a swiveling hook and the side plates have flanged edges which prevent wear on the rope. Each block has a removable pin held in place by a cotter, so that a sheave can be replaced when necessary. The eccentric clamp used on the rear block is constructed with a hook so that the stretcher can be used for a hoist if desired. Strung with 16 feet of 3-8 inch rope, ready for use. Finished in gray enamel. Also made plain bearing, finished in red enamel. Weight, per dozen, 48 pounds. Page Three Hundred Seventeen HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & CO-* No. 190 Ellwood Pattern Wire Stretcher Fig. 19114 HE Ellwood Wire Stretcher has been on the market for the past twenty years and is known as the best flat bar wire stretcher made. Note that our stretcher is self-supporting at the post. Packed three dozen ina case. The weight per dozen, packed for shipment, is 54 Ibs. No. 191 Ellwood Rod Wire Stretcher Fig. 191 BOVE we illustrate the Ellwood Wire Stretcher with rod extension. This Stretcher having been furnished to the trade for many years, is well known and no extended description is necessary. Note, please, that it is self-supporting at the post, which is a patented feature of all our wire stretchers. Packed three dozen in a case. The weight per dozen, packed for shipment, is 66 lbs. Page Three Hundred Fighteen * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT * No. 193 Star Round Bar Wire Stretcher HE smooth, round bar enables the op- (ermenoye {ie) Wits “tdeve lever in any position on the upper or under side of the bar and on either side of the fence. It grips the bar at any point desired and never slips. The weight per dozen, bundled for shipment, is 60 lbs. fim __< << | No. 197 The Little Giant Wire Stretcher HIS stretcher excels any- thing made in the line of crank stretchers. It is par- ticularly adapted for export trade. No. 281 Little Giant, Sr., with chain for attaching to post, per dozen. 51 lbs. No. 197 Little Giant, Jr., with rope for attaching to post, per dozen, 48 lbs. Fig. 197 No. 196 Improved Dean Wire Stretcher AS notches on one side of the bar only. The price being less than the Elwood makes it a good flat bar stretcher to sell at a low price. a The weight, per a 4 SES S340 =oue dozen, bundled for ship- ere Ca = ment, is 50 lbs. Fig. 196 Page Three}Hundred_Nineteen J me HUNT: HELM -FERRIS & CO- te No. 200 Sampson Woven Wire Stretcher Fig. 200 HIS stretcher answers perfectly the demand for a first class woven wire stretcher of sufficient strength to sustain any pull with enough power to stretch any length of fence desired. The Sampson fits the case exactly for it is strong enough to stand any strain necessary to make the fence snug and tight. It is made very simple in operation and construction and works perfectly. Every movement of the powerful handle stretches the wire several inches. The grip engages the chain firmly and is easily moved when slackened. Handle is 5 feet long, clamping bars 4 feet 6 inches long, both of hardwood. Eight feet of *s-inch tested chain with each stretcher. The Sampson is furnished with handle without extra charge. Weight each, 35 lbs. Page Three Hundred Twenty x STAR LINE EQUIPMENT x No. 858 Star Stable Broom TAR Stable Broom, shown at the right, is made of the best African bass fiber. S The block and handle are of carefully selected wood. While the broom is designed for stable use, it can also be used for sweeping any floor, platform or pavement where there is heavy sweeping to be done. No. 858 STAR Stable Broom, 14-inch size, weight per dozen, without handle, 32 lbs. No. 859 STAR Stable Broom, 16-inch size, weight per dozen, without handle, 35 lbs. Handles for STAR Stable Brooms, weight per dozen, 24 lbs. No. 822 Star Sidewalk Scraper HE STAR Sidewalk Scraper has a blade of heavy pressed steel, firmly bolted to the malleable iron frame which fastens it to the handle. The blade is so curved that when handling slush or snow up to four or five inches deep, a good, vigorous push will send the snow beyond the edge of the walk. The blade is so shaped that the Fi scraper can also be operated by pulling. et: The illustration at the left shows a scraper being pulled, and the small, round picture at the bottom of the page shows the same scraper in position for pushing. The blade is 18 inches long and the scrapers, complete with handles, weigh 63 Ibs. per doz. Fig. 858 IN POSITION FOR PUSHING Fig. 822 Page Three Hundred Twenty-one Pact Three HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & COs: Giant Star Self-locking Steel Hoists DEVICE may be adjustable, and that is all very good, but it may adjust automatically, and that is far better. All sizes of STAR Roller-bearing Steel Hoists are automatically adjustable, that is—three differ- ent sizes of rope may be used in any size hoist and the lock of the STAR Hoist automatically adjusts itself to the size of rope. Suppose you are using one-half inch rope with a No. 22 Giant STAR Hoist and wished to change it to three-eighths inch or five-eighths inch rope; this may be done; the automatic adjustable lock will take care of either size. Suppose you are using a Giant STAR Hoist on outside work and the rope becomes soaked and much swollen. It is not necessary to do any adjusting as the rope lock on all Giant STAR Hoists automati- cally adjusts itself to meet conditions. Fig. 565 shows the location of the Roller Bearings and Axle of the Giant STAR Hoists. It also shows the construction of the lock and gripping dog. When the draft rope which passes through the lock is pulled slightly away from the block, as shown in Fig. Fig. 506 Shows Manner in Which Hoists Automati- cally Lock 506, the gripping dog revolves on the stationary pin, which holds it. This operation throws the gripping dog Fig. 565 into contact with the rope, and automatically locks it. Showing Upper The Giant STAR Hoist is the only hoist on the market Block and Location of Roller Bearings with an automatic adjustable lock. Hundred Twenty-two STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Giant Star Roller Bearing Steel Hoists A Few Important Features 1. Steel blocks throughout, triple, double and single sheave, both upper and lower. 2. A heavy reinforced, drop forged yoke on each block is attached to the axle pin. The hooks are attached to this yoke by a special double pressed and riveted swivel, which slides on this yoke, making the block very flexible. 3. The hooks are extra heavy, reinforced, drop forged and very strong. 4. The sheaves revolve on hardened steel axles, fitted with cold rolled steel bearings, reducing the friction to a minimum. 5. The axles are held in place and can be instantly removed and replaced at any time if desired. These are key axles—an important point. They will not turn when heavily loaded, thus avoiding cutting the sides of the hoist. 6. The lock, which is the vital feature of the hoist, is made of malleable iron and is attached to the axle pin, making it very quick, sure, safe and easy in operation. This lock is on the draft rope. You do not have to use any special locking rope on the Giant STAR. When you stop pulling and move the draft rope slightly outward away from the block or if pulling in that direction, the hoist instantly locks. The heavier the load, the more securely it holds and locks. The lock is released instantly by a slight pull or a little snap of the rope towards the block. The Giant STAR Hoist elevates, lowers, locks and unlocks with one rope only. 7. These hoists are furnished in battleship gray enamel finish. All hoists furnished without rope. Made in thirteen sizes as follows: Sheaves Sheaves Size Approx. Weight, Lbs. No. Above Below of Rope Diameter Capacity Each 2 2 2 36 in. 2esine 1,000 lbs. 4 21 1 1 3¢-16 in. 215 in. 2,000 lbs. 5 22 2 2 34-16 in. 216 in. 2,000 Ibs. 6 23 3 3 3¢-V in. 21 in. 2,000 lbs. 8 31 1 1 16-54 in. 3 ital, 4,000 lbs. 6 32 2 2 14-54 in. Sie eine 4,000 lbs. 8 33 3 3 14-54 in. Site 4,000 lbs. 916 41 1 1 5 Re BA in. 4 in. 6,000 lbs. 101 2 42 2 2 5-34 in Amen 6,000 lbs. 1416 43 3 3 52-34 in 4 in. 6,000 lbs. 18 51 1 1 34-7 in Seine 8,000 lbs. 13 By, 2 2 34-1@ in 5 shal, 8,000 lbs. 1814 53 3 3 34-71% in 5) ain. 8,000 lbs. 2316 Bear in mind, please, that this is the only complete line of self-locking, roller-bearing hoists on the market. Page Three Hundred Twenty-th > a HUNT: HELM- FERRIS & CO- * No. 547 Star Trolley Conveyor Used in Connection With STAR Roller Bearing Self-Locking Steel Hoists nt = | a Showing STAR Trolley Conveyor in Actual Use. For Use in Garages, Machine Shops, Warehouses, etc. ERE is an inexpensive special type of roller bearing con- veyor which may be used for a great variety of purposes. For the garage, in taking the engine out of the car to the bench and back again; for use in warehouses and factories, for carrying coal or any purpose where a load up to 1,000 Ibs. is to be carried quickly and safely. The conveyor is constructed of steel and malleable iron. The four tracker wheels are each 41% inches in diameter, revolving on hardened steel axles fitted with cold rolled steel bearings. The trucks are mal- leable iron and are attached by swivel to a malleable frame. A clevis is attached in the middle of the frame from which may be sus- pended any one of our roller bearing steel hoists. The construction of the Conveyor trucks make it im- possible for it to jump the track. The track on which the conveyor runs may be hung in several directions with branch lines either parallel or at angles to the main line. The load is automatically locked and carried at any desired height. This is a great labor saver and can be arranged to meet every condition and need. Send us a sketch of your floor and requirements for complete plans, estimates and suggestions. Weight of Conveyor, 28 lbs. Page Three Hundred Twenty-four STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Details of Star Trolley Conveyor Used in Connection with the STAR Roller Bearing Steel Hoists Ssass —< KY LESS Specimen (For the Manley Garage) STAR Trolley Conveyor has made good with us. It’s certainly GREAT. It is never around in the way, but is al- ways handy when needed. Nothing could do the work bet- ter, if it cost ten times the few dollars this outfit costs us. Manley Garage, Harvard, Illinois. P. S. Can’t make it too strong. It works finer than silk. track. Fig. 350 Diagram of curve. Each curve takes the place of eight feet of HE track on which the STAR Trolley Conveyor runs is the STAR Double Angle Steel Track, page 000, which by means of the Lag Screw Hanger (Fig. 414) can be suspended from the joists and adjusted absolutely even. Length of regular hangers is 1014 inches, although we furnish longer hangers when necessary. The track weighs 2 lbs. per foot and the Hangers are placed one foot apart. STAR Switches and Curves enable you to make the Track conform to practically any over- head arrangement desired. Owing to the fact that each job has different requirements, the best way is to send us a floor plan indicating how you want to use the Conveyor and our Drafting Department will prepare sketches and estimates without cost or obligation to you. WORK BEN. LLOOR PLAN or MIANLEY GARAGE STARA RD. TEL Page Three Hundred Twenty-five > a HUOUNT- HELM -FERRIS & CO- * New Star Hay Rack Clamps Page Three HE use of bolts in constructing 5h lnvahy mek TS Olle @F Ckike, Wine boring of holes in the timber is not only useless work, but it deprives the timbers of practically one-half of their strength. This can be avoided by the use of the STAR Hay Rack Clamp. No holes are necessary where the STAR Hay Rack Clamp is used, and the full strength of the timbers is thus retained. The STAR Hay Rack Clamp is so simple that any one can put a rack to- gether with it, the only tools needed being a wrench and a saw. The time and labor saved in the making of the rack will pay part of the cost of the clamps. When the clamps are tightened the rack is rigid, and the intermediate bracket being studded and flanged, twisting or slipping of the timbers at the joints is impossible. The clamps, which are placed astride the timbers are twice as strong as bolts. A grooved steel washer makes it impossible for the clamp to cut into the cross-piece, and the steel clip or washer keeps the bottom cross-piece from _ splitting. STAR Hay Rack Clamps are made in four different sizes, 8 clamps in a box, as shown above: put up one set of No. 0. Star Hay Rack Clamp, 12-inch. 111% Ibs. per set. No. 1. Star Hay Rack Clamp, 14-inch. 121% lbs. per set. No. 2. Star Hay Rack Clamp, 16-inch. 131% lbs. per set. No. 3. Star Hay Rack Clamp, 18-inch. 15 _ Ibs. per set. Hundred Twenty-six S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Harvard Hay Rack Fixtures Fig. 11 E desire to call your attention to Harvard Hay Rack Fixtures as illustrated. The demand for a suitable and convenient set of hay rack irons has induced us to put on the market what we believe to be the simplest and best device of this kind ever offered. Bolts for hay racks are out of date. The timbers are weakened by boring holes. They are inconvenient to use and do not make a strong rack. By using Harvard Hay Rack Fixtures it is not necessary to bore holes in the timbers and they are so simple in construction that anyone can use them. A new and excellent feature of the Harvard Hay Rack Fixture is that it is so constructed that it is not necessary to hold the three pieces of the rack em- No. 1. 14 inches long, for 2 x 4 cross pieces, 2 x 8 bed pieces. No. 2. 16 inches long, for 2 x 6 cross pieces, 2 x 8 bed pieces. No. 3. 16 inches long, for 2 x 4 cross pieces, 2 x 10 bed pieces. No. 4. 18 inches long, for 2 x 6 cross pieces, 2 x 10 bed pieces. braced by the fixture in place to be clamped all at one time. For instance, the lower cross pieces and the stringers which rest on them can first be clamped together and then the upper cross pieces can be laid on and clamped in place. This feature makes it very simple to assemble the rack. Another advantage which the Har- vard Hay Rack Fixtures have, on ac- count of the features above described, is that the top of the hay rack may be removed, leaving the two stringers and lower cross pieces, making a wagon box. This will be found to be a very handy attachment and one that will favorably impress the users of hay racks. Made in four sizes Weight, per set, 14 lbs. Weight, per set, 15 lbs. Weight, per set, 17 lbs. Weight, per set, 18 Ibs. Page Three Hundred Twenty-seven > HUNT+- HELM - FERRIS & COs x No. 60 Star Manhole Ring and Cover Hl i AA | i | Fig. 60 Showing Cover Removed a Showing Cover in Place Fig. 61 HE above illustrations show the STAR Manhole Ring and cover. Every dealer has many calls for these for covering cesspools, outdoor cisterns, gas depositaries, etc. Diameter of ring, 2234 inches. Diameter of cover, 201% inches. Weight, complete, 46 lbs. Page Three Hundred Twenty-eight STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 435 Star Offset Hinges Wi "fh 4 @. Fig. 435 Fig. 436 Hinge Hinge on Gable Door HE STAR Offset Hinge is for use on the Hay Door in the gable end of the barn when hay is taken in at the end of the barn. The door, which should be cut in at the top of the gable, should be 10 feet wide by 12 feet high, when harpoon fork is used and 12 feet wide by 15 feet high where slings are used. By using STAR Offset Hinges rain or snow will be kept out of the gable end of the barn. In Fig. 436 we show the method by which the door can be raised when desired by attach- ing a rope fastened to the door to one of the pulley blocks attached to the Carrier, and by running the Carrier into the barn by means of the draft rope the door will be pulled up instantly. STAR Offset Hinges are made of malleable iron and the upper and lower parts of the Hinges are held together by steel pins and cotters. Weight of hinges, per set, 3 lbs. Page Three Hundred Twenty-nine HUNT: HELM -+- FERRIS & CO-. Sik No. 225 Star Anvil and Vise Ty Sar VERY usefulfand convenient tool. No mechanic or farmer can afford to be with- Face hardened and polished. Jaw out one. Wrought iron screw. _ Face 3 x 7 inches. No. 492 HE STAR Stake Holder is made of steel, 2% inches in width, and 14-inch in thick- ness, intended to hold a 2 x 4 or 2 x 3 inch stake, tapered at the lower end. It is fastened will open 4 inches. Will hold gas pipe or round iron. Weight each, 22 pounds. Fig. 492 to the ends of the cross timbers of the hay rack by means of bolts so that the side stakes will fit securely into this holder, as shown. Weight, per dozen, 15 pounds. No. 64 Star Boat Anchor HE STAR Boat Anchor is 12 inches high. Its base is 814 inches wide. The STAR Anchor is the most prac- tical type made for row-boat requireménts. It attaches to the bottom easily and surely, and at the same time can be disengaged and lifted Page Three Hundred Thirty easily and quickly, the water running out through the holes in the base. The STAR Boat Anchor will not catch on snags. Weight each, 18 pounds. * STAR LINE EQUIPMENT No. 233 Star Windmill Regulators auim ore \B cD AAMANAUAAAALAAANG One of the Most Useful Inventions Ever Offered to the Public TTTTTNAN 5) Nb: ar “ia ECAUSE this machine “sun takes full charge of the id BB oc windmill. Because it will allow the mill Ee to go into gear when the water is lowered in the tank. Fig. 233 Because it ‘pulls the mill out (| is iy a of gear before the tank overflows. Because it does away with the mudholes around the tank. Because it saves water. Because it saves the mill and does not allow it to do any pumping when it is not necessary. Because the farmer does not have to go and put the mill in and out of gear. Because it will work on any windmill. Because it will work just as well when the tank is at a distance from the mill. Because it will do its work when you are asleep, when gone to town, or when in the field. Weight, each, 40 lbs. < No.187 Star Wire Lifter ADE of best malleable iron. Length, 36 inches. Weight, 3 Ibs. Indispensable for handling wire. Fig. 187 Page Three Hundred Thirty-one ie HUNT: HELM - FERRIS & CO-- A Word About Wagons HE two BIG things about a wagon are STRENGTH—LOOKS. The appearance of Overland Wagons sells them on sight. Clear, clean, white ash boxes finished with two fine coats of implement coach varnish, covered on the bottom as well as on the sides—an honest job of Page Three Hundred Thirty-two finishing, artistically striped, scrolled andstenciled. Every single part is finished carefully, no daub or “‘slab’’ work on our goods. This, because we realize that ‘‘looks’’ make the first sale and our quality shows at a glance or on minute inspection. But while ‘looks’? may make the first sale, “durability”’ is what makes the repeat orders. And from a ‘‘wear’’ standpoint, our wagons are in a class by themselves. The rim of the wheels is pressed around the spokes, making it impos- sible for them to loosen. An all-steel construc- tion below the box and a brace from the bottom of the bed to the front axle so when a boy runs into the curb or telegraph pole, his wagon is still in service. This is an exclusive feature with us. The full roller bearing axles make our wagons an easy pull for a three-year-old. In our con- struction are embodied all modern improve- ments and many exclusive features which make Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co. Wagons the most saleable and satisfactory on the market today. STAR LINE EQUIPMENT * Overland Coaster Wagon SPECIFICATIONS BODY—Clear white ash, natural finish, trimmed in red and stenciled in black and green. GEARS—Channel arch truss steel construction, enameled black. FIFTH WHEEL—Extra large, made of steel. AXLES—One-half inch round steel, firmly braced front and rear. WHEELS— Heavy iron hub into which straight, smooth, kiln- dried hardwood spokes are driven. Felloes and tires of heavy steel, electrically welded, with edges curled in to hold the ends of the spokes. BEARINGS—Each wheel fitted with eleven cold rolled steel bearings, held in place by a special washer that does not wear cotter pin. TONGUE—Hard, straight maple which bends back and allows wagon to be steered from box. BRAKES—Maalleable iron. x Page Three Hundred Thirty-three I: HUONT- HELM ~- FERRIS & Co, Overland Coaster Wagon With Box Removed HE express box on all Overland Coaster Wagons can be in- stantly removed or replaced. The wagon may be changed from express to coaster in a minute. A simple connection, easily operated, locks box firmly to the bed. Overland Wagons are furnished in the following sizes: Bed Wheel Diameter Style Weight Lbs. No. Inches Inches Brake Per Doz. 0A V2 x2 Shine 8 in. Hand 288 1A 14 x32in. 8 in. Hand 312 2A 14 x34in. 11 in. Hand 396 246A 1514 x 36in. 11in. Hand 414 3A 16° =x8ésin: 11lin. Hand 438 4A 18 x40in. 11in. Hand 492 Page Three. Hundred Thirty-four STAR LINE EQUIPMENT Automatic Wagon Salesman 48 OVERLAND _.0) Tei Goods Attractively Displayed Are More Than Half Sold And these Wagon Display Fixtures make the wagons,look extra good to the folks who are going to buy them. Put a rack of our wagons out in front of your store—let our goods do their own talking—sales will come almost of themselves. Results from the use of Display Fixtures will show you why dealers who have used it, call it the ‘AUTOMATIC WAGON SALESMAN.” Page Three Hundred Thirty-five Fe HONtT- HELM -FERRIS &© CcCOo- > 4 A Glimpse of the Factory Behind Star Goods HERE are a little over 3,000 people in Harvard, Illinois, where the Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co.’s factory is located. Statisticians tell us that the average family consists of five people. Consequently about half the population of Harvard are de- pendent upon the Hunt, Helm, Ferris & Co. factory. Our workmen have practically been brought up in the business. Our factory covers more than six acres of floor space. Every kind of modern labor-saving machinery is included in the equipment. Cost of production is down to the minimum. There’s nothing we would like better than to have you make a trip through our factory in person. But the next best thing is to look over the photographs of dif- ferent parts of our plant reproduced in the following pages. And it’s all the result of thirty-six years of giving people full value for their money. Page Three Hundred Thirty-six STAR LINE EQUIPMENT ‘OD ® suis ‘wypsP “uN _T JO sd9yJO [e19ua4y Hundred Thirty-se\ Three Page 0 U q e Y y Is [i HE LM HUNT: wIooy ssolg -eight Three Page STAR LINE EQUIPMENT 2. ° ts n, fe) fe) HH ue) = G vo £ is 1S) 3 Page Three Hundred Thirty-nine HUNT +: HELM +-FERRIS & CO- Wood Working Room Hundred Forty Section of Paint Shop Section of Shipping Room Page Three Hundred Forty-one HUNT: HELM - FERRIS “& COs ae ee : a ITS General Assembly Room Barn Equipment Assembly Room Page Three Hundred Forty-two S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT 125 Good Reasons Why Star Features Are Exclusive HE patents listed below readily explain why the most valuable and important features are confined exclusively to and are to be found only in the STAR Line. The exclusive features without number which are controlled by our patents are evidence of the thought, of the ingenuity and of the years of hard work devoted to originating the STAR Line and bringing it to its present state of perfection. The STAR Line is fully covered and protected by patents. As required by law, we hereby warn all infringers against any attempt to copy or duplicate STAR patented features. We also warn the public against the use of such infringements, as the users, according to law, share the liability of those who make them. Patent No. Date Invention 1922.54 er ere eee UNC So LO0Ss 7a os bik es sce, © brack {S03 00pm ees as 2. VeADrl) (4-51905) 38th as = = 2, “Stanchion 28s O0p ere ere) Reb 1osOl5. = 9 ooeee e282 CalfiPen 1,124,718 ........ =. Jan. 12,1915 ...... .. . Means forsupporting members of Stalls and the like Rocce ieee eee eres, Occ. «2061014 Woe ie ii. :) «_.. "Stanthion TZ Omemmeemeercmin eee, Deck 15 1914 = = oe eo. 2. + (Mangers TS. een eee SNOW. 24° 1914 fe see oes =” StallliConstruction POO era cere yee pune 2s. 1914) ooh es 2) Stall\Construction . O95 ee ween ADE 28; 1914) ) = 5 ore = S'S. © Mangers TOSS lee nee ee eb? 0S 1914 ee = > sce (StalliSide Construction Ie OSthOSHal er ane 201 O14) ete 0. 1) eartition tor. Meed -“broughs HA0G3 005, ae eee ee, Jane. (6 0914. 2m. (84> ess: Stanchions fe, 090 eae eee ce INOW. 1S), 1913) 2.5.9. Geta, so Stall’ Construction UGS oem we an pulys 29e 1130 a aes... &- stall'Construction. TOGO NOS a een ea) uly. VIP TOISs 9. ees eas. c:. Stanchion 00G* 04ers er uly | Le LOS heen ut = s. «) AnimaliStall IeGH 4 OG mre nen ere. SUnes1O7 19013 728. fo = Ss 2 StopsDevice‘for ‘Stalls \BOniieh2 Om i een April e113 0s is eo. tae. |, .2 StallliConstruction 1Obb S20 ree eee. Var LS 10S so es aos. .. ekteed and Litter Carriers Design 43,458 vee ane 1 OLS ee re 2 ie as one r PAnimals+Pen: Design 43,457 eres span. 20 LOUSh in ete ie, Ss Animal Pen Osteen) =o eee Alig 16; 1912. = £aes..-., . « Stallfand) Manger 1 O29 9Sdieese eee eee June 18) 1012) 05 Kos = ae, os -eeed and Litter ‘Carriers. O2Ai Oia eh ere Mave28. 1OLQ os sna) ee. . ~~ Meedandi Litter Carriers MEO 20,02/ eee ee meter Viny 7, 1902) apes 6, Flanger for Litter Carrier OO, 934 ee ee eee NOViews 110 Lge ater at mrs 3. Atop Device tor Carners 1SOG6383;/e- ey) ae eee OCt.w24,. 19110) Que). ) Swineine: Drack and Boom for Litter Carriers and the like IPOOS$ COV ras nay ce ee Oept elo. TOIT) 2 ea) Sees. 5 - Overhead Track 15003 026 eee me SCD tal 2 1 O11 seen. 4 rack. for Litter Carriers 1F003;09/Mraras nee Septl oe OMs Goce he esaeerrss = (Overhead*Track O90%3 04 webinar ee e Ap ellen un La een =» vStanchion Oo LOme eee men iy estOll wf cw acuiies « . Heed’and)Iitter Carriers 3895899 ate) eon eA prills; LOIN) 2 2 See. « ~Overhead!Switch S385 0 ee ee eA Diet Ole een 4 Animal’Stalls O33 O15 eee eee Dame (1900 en se ee) =) kcack:and) Means; for Supporting: same 083°) tae eee ei eee ReD a Oll ms. eee = 4 Beedtand MitterCarriers 969,405 ......... Sept. 6,1910 .....-. . . . Swinging Track and supporting Boom therefor O25 TL Gece) ee eeunel nS 1909) caer. sets, . 2. Keedvand Litter|Garriers O13 88. es te een Ware 2! 19098 oe es se ) eediand Jsitter Carriers SOG OSs eae ene Dec. La 1008-8 5 eeceee ss) . Latter Carrier SBS S7See ae) | May)26) 19089] 2 2-2. =. :.. Feed’and Litter Carriers SO) O49 mere eee A prilb24 008mm a) smc |. 4) feed and Jeitter\Carriers S00;209 Remo. oe en Sept 719075) secs. . 2. deed and. Litter Carriers SG2 760 Reeeem ee some ieee Aug: 66, 1907-55 = sa es . . eed and Litter Carriers OLS Sota ween eee Vcr 201 9000 eee eee). eo Beedvand litter Carriers POS Ober area te ty Dec. "26; 1016-5) 4 <0) seme. = ce > Animal. Stall DEZOS SS a eee ae Decl 2, 1OlGm a le fe - oe |, & Stall’ Construction Ie 0/, 250 Rea een Decw 5: 1016 ae 6 aeee 5 ... Stall’Construction 1S 0S eee tec Septs 5.11 Ol6e > ps ees. - Animal Stall Cio Stee eee Septye 5, 1916) eye. mec en 2° 5. Animal Stall BOO eee omen ee Keb 15,1 O16) 2 ee) omer 2. Animal Stall 162,250 mar memantine SNOVe20) 1O15ere so A of oe. 5 Cattle Watering Device WOO SSO area ee NOV -slOs 1015) 4 semen S04) Gece. 0 StalliConstruction 1PUGO DSS eae eee en INOVeoOn 1O15e 8 se 8 ee oe) (Cattle Watering (Device Page Three Hundred Forty-three Patent No. 1,156,472 . oi 2560-. 1,145,474 1,239,170 1,235,453 1,226,201 1,225,320 1,291,457 1,288,861 1,283,712 1,282,403 1,271,454 1,256,457 1,251,207 1,250,574 1,241,364 702,295 767,336 770,520 775,080 803,052 804,461 835,786 844,718 809,913 809,912 815,520 835,785 862,459 887,385 797,507 1,023,463 48,467 1,158,911 731,351 761,882 799,980 740,637 757,607 717,562 731,558 753,481 795,902 826,095 835,186 835,185 844,719 865,689 971,741 1,101,170 1,126,435 1,194,729 1,207,285 709,314 731,350 806,882 837,819 902,221 908,849 919,288 977,118 994,448 1,010,781 1,027,714 1,032,056 1,027,713 1,104,353 1,178,065 1,185,189 Page Three Hundred Forty-four Date Oct. Aug. July Sept. July May May Jan. Dec. Nov. Oct... July Feb. Dec: Dec. Sept. June Aug. Sept. Nov. Oct. Nov. Nov. Feb. Jan. Jan. Mar. Nov. Aug. May Aug. 12, 24, 24, By) 225 2, 12, 25, 18, 25, 10, 9, 20, ey, Sith 14, 133 19, 9, 9; 20, 13} 6, 12, 15, April 16, Jan. Nov. June June Sept. Oct. 18, 2, 16, ls 19; 6, April 19, Jan. June Mar. Aug. July Nov. Nov. Feb. Sept. Oct. June Jan. Aug. Dec. Sept. June Dec. Dec; Oct. Jan. 6, 23, 1, 1; Wis 6, 6, 19, 10, 4, 23, 26, 15, 35 16, 16, 12) AS 27, 5 April 20, Nov. June Dec. May July May July April 29, 6, D5 28, 9, 28, 21, 4, HUNT: HELM - FERRIS 1915 1915 . 1915 1917 1917 1917 1917 1919 1918 1918 1918 1918 1918 1917 1917 1917 1902 1904 1904 1904 1905 1905 1906 1907 1906 1906 1906 1906 1907 1908 1905 1912 1916 1915 1903 1904 1905 1903 1904 1903 1903 1904 1905 1906 1906 1906 1907 1907 1910 1914 1915 1916 1916 1902 1903 1905 1906 1908 1909 1909 1910 1911 1911 1912 1912 1912 1914 1916 May 30, 1916 &2>o CO, Invention Overhead Track Joint and supporting means therefor Means for supporting members of Stalls and the like Stall Construction Hog Pen Track for Door Hangers Bull Staff Stall Construction Hay Carrier Door and Track Pig Guard Overhead Track Overhead Track * Stall Frame Construction Door Latch Fastener for Door Gate for Stall Construction Wire Stretcher Wire Stretcher Tackle Block Wire Stretcher Wire Stretcher Wire Stretcher Stretcher for Woven Wire Fences Wire Stretcher Wagon Wagon Wheel Wagon Wagon Toy Wagon Tank Heater Tank Heater Tank Heater Fence Post Hay Rack Construction Hay Rack Construction Means for connecting the Members of Hay Racks Snapping Rolls Spring Hinge Weldless Link Hay Carrier Hanger and Track Fork Pulley Frame Hay Carrier Hay Carrier Hay Carrier Hay Carrier Hay Carrier Hay Carrier Hay Carrier Hay Carrier Hook Hay Carrier Track for Door Hangers Door Hanger Door Hanger Track Track for Door Hangers Track for Door Hangers Door Hanger and Track Method for Making Slotted Tubular Tracks Track for Door Hangers Door Hangers and Track Door Hanger Track for Barn Door Hangers Door Hanger Track Barn Door Track Door Hanger Door Hanger S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Index Page Abpyustaste Rafter Brackets 247, 255 Broom, Stable Adjustable Door Hangers... 276-288 Building Plans.___.. Adjustable Cannon Ball Hangers _ 276, 277 BullPen2s Adjustable Weatherproof Hangers 284 Bull Staff__...._. Adjustable Weatherproof Cannon Ball emerge Roper 282 Bumper for Rod Track Litter Carrier Adjustable Stalls... 23-41 Adjustable Stall Arms... 64 Ones Pen ~ Adjustable Steel Stanchion ___.. 46 Calf Pen Feeding Guards... Adjustable Wood Stanchion.__._. 50 California Pattern Hay Forks... ; AlfalfaWorke:. once ec. -82- 265 Cannon Ball Curve for Garage Door Track Alignment Device_- cee Rie See eee ae ely Alley Gate, eran paren nr : ee: 67 All Purpose Barn Tae. 214 Anchor, Cement................. 65 Anchor for Boats.__....--......... = 330 Anchors for Rod Track... 227 Angle Bracket for Rod Track... 226 INCRE GEREN Cr 330 ESTEE SE ee ae eee ee ne eee eee ee 64 Automatic Steel Hay mack for has Stalls Wee : 95-99 Automatic Stop and Returner for Litter Carrier._.........226 Automatic Sure Stop... zaL8, Automatic Water Bowls... 59-63 Barn Door Hangers CannoniBall22-- 275-277 LOS oe i ee REE = Se Sher Soe Rae Mian ae MRR ers 288 Twentieth Century. mens Hereone 286 Weatherproof ese. ae: ches ese fe cee a ae yeeseennn ce Rice ee 284 Weatherproof Cannon Ball Bee tia meena oe et ieee ee 282 Barn Door Stay Rollers aa o02 Barn Door Track 273-288 Barn Equipment 21-88 Barn Floor Construction 139-144 Barn Plans__.._. : = 131-193 Barn Floor Scraper --91 Barn Truck, ‘‘All Purpose’”’ oe ee a ee eee eee 214 Basket Grate Tank Heaters... 314, 315 Black Jack Tank Heater. 314 Boat Anchor. 330 Booms for Litter Carriers 204 Boss Adjustable Stanchion __. 44 Bowls, Water... ! 59-63 Braced Rafter Barn __ 152 Brackets for Door Track Cannon Ball. 279 ParalleliGannonyhallee ee 300 Twentieth Century _ 287 Weatherproof Ee eee 285 Weatherproof Seana t Ball. ae LIEN oS 283 Bracket, Angle for Rod Track 2226 Brackets, Rafter... 247 Brackets, Supporting for ities ee Track. 210 Bracket, Suspension, for Double Oval Steel Track ee PAI Cannon Ball Door Hangers... Cannon Ball Door Tracks... Cannon Ball Door Stop_.... Cannon Ball Door Latch.. Cannon Ball Garage Door Set (Folding- Sliding) = Cannon Ball Hangers For Curve Track For Right Angle eras Cannon Ball House Door ine and Tacks Carriers for Litter. Heedie ss. Milk Cans ___ Cast Star Tank Heaters: Cement Anchor... Cement Work in Barns. Center Trip Rope Sling Z ees Chain Alley Gate_ : oe eres Chain Hanging, Double ee Sienchionas ‘: Chain Slings... Chains, Neck._........ Channels, Steel... Clamps for Curb... Clamp for Rod Track. Clamps, Partition... Coaster Wagons..:._...........-.------ if Coaster Wagon Display Fixtures Columns, Steel Supporting... Combination Litter, Feed and Milk Gan Came. “Combination”’ Litter Carrier for Rigid Track Inside and Rod Track Outside of Barn... Connected Steel Manger Partitions. Construction Details for Barns. Conveyor, Trolley, with Hoists Cork Brick_ ies Corner Feed Aitaneer Cover, Galvanized, for (Gamer Ball Track. Covered Cannon Ball Track and Hangers. Cow Pen__ Cow Stalls. = Cross Draft Hee Semicon. @upolas =. Cups, Water... Page Three Hundred Forty-five 198, 216, Page 321 133-193 70-73 zs22- 299 275-277 278, 279 304 Pe OF: ...290 ....306-308 218, 224 200 202 ...229-271 310-311 eae 258 -332-339 335 68 ...201 216-218 55 138 eee 324 92-93 102 _.278 _..280-281 --238, 252 ...84-86 59-63 HUNT +-HELM -FERRIS & COs. Page Girb! Clamps soa ees oe ere ee 1l Curve for Cannon Ball Garage Door Fine. a 299 Curves for Double Angle Steel aeacies ele, prec eer Al}s} Curve for Double Oval Steel Track..........-.---------22-20--2--- 221 Gurve for Rod Drack0: on cae nance se eee 226 Dairy Barn Equipments eee 21-88 Dairy, House Plane ee .2s..- 7G eee _.275-288 Double Angle Hay Carrier Track...................-...--- 255 Double Flange Hay Carrier Track ...........-.....---- Wood Hay Carrier Track... hina Double Angle Litter Carsien ieacis : Double Oval Litter Carrier Track... Garage DOOns! =: Fee ene eee ...-289 Hardware Special ties! ee. eresees ees é 309-335 Wlarness ELOOKS presses -102 Harpoon Forks............. 22265) Harvester Hay, Carriersisc re eee 230-245 lay: Carriers sca scciee ccc ccna asap tea re 229-271 Hay Carrier Returner... utthsn: tee pe gee oe Se eee 270 S TAR LINE EQUIPMENT Page Page Hay Carrier Track Manger Drain... sesbec sus fee se ceshsccecsecas Ses OO Star Double Flange... : 246 Manger for Pens... ee ee eee 70, 71, 74 Peerless Double Angle __ eR ies : 254 Mangers, Self Cleaning won mn nnn nn waenceenan= == --02, 53 Fay horse ee ee ; 265-267 Manger Partitions, Connected... Vass a : 54, 55 Manger Partitions, Individual... 56, 57 Hay Fork Pulleys... & 261-264 Manhole G amlole | COV CT ae aoe as anecccc senna cree sete Tees ttsee | eee 328 Hay Rack, Automatic Steel for Horse Stalls cose) ies Gan Gaston. 202 Ray pic ackato rsh en sass re eran eee eee te eee OW MO) SNATIIC StOOlene ee 90 Hay Rack Clamp................ d oe See POLO O2T Mayislings === mes : _.....-.-258-260 Name Plates... aolalWrreel era : 66 Harvard Hay Rack Fixtures. INecki@hains =.= : ae : 66 Harvard Stay Roller. Nellis Hay Fork... Se eae Pao 265 Harvard Tank Heater. New Rinkle Tank Heater. ae eee : 312 Hay Door Hinges... Doplieen INewsotanehanksrHeater = ee eee ee 310 ESSE WCE Tanks 14 apie re Oars Cleaners, Self Acting _. Sere 103 Hen House Plan.. ee rs OY Me eee ee OS Offset Hinges for Hay Doors... : 329 Hinges, Offset, for Hay Doors co mssssnenesgezettrsaetnccgeecsatestzezese 329 Outside Track Support for Litter Carrier Track. 209 Hog House Plans... seostace eanstoasoes 190-191 Overland Coaster Wagons... : 332-335 Wl ogePen sire oor eee nc Se Natl eee SW ne 80-82 Hog Pen Troughs, Galvanized... Be cere een 83 Pant Graye Enamel sesame Si) J 5 Roy oe eo i ae a oe ice eer SO Lao 2S, Parallel Door Track for Garages or other Buildings 300 Hooks) Bloor! ete ie. os ee Be Site GOTAG ParalleliirackiSracketsi se ae 300 Hooks, Track Hanger... . ged 2956, Partition v=o) 00) a ee) Worse stable Hquipmien tas nae 94-103 Partitions, Manger... aes 55-57 jeigute Giclees eee oe oe nM, — EASE Cs Se ae ee ae 206 Partition Clamps -. 66 Horse Stall Fronts with Nutomatic Hayairacki= == O8) Eetainis, Wie OL 343-344 Horse Stall Posts. ............-.--._.. Bese nrhs seen se ee ee 102 Pens, Steel. : hore - ee 69-82 Horse Stall Steel Guards... oe¢ Sethe eon eres enec sees 101 Pens, Steel, for Bulls. ee . ‘ 2/015 eTOuse DOOR ELAS CMs tees eee neo oscars esse acces 306-308 Pens, Steel, for Calves 77 How to Order Pen, Steel, for Cows._ edits ES oo Sete es ee 74-75 Barnbhiquipment eee ete: yk eae eS 104 Pens, Steel, for Hogs —— aceite heceuncsh see -.80-82 HayiCarriers.... eee ee fA a Be Se 271 Pens, Steel, os Young Stock... a ee 79 : : -992- Peerless Hay Carriers = 248-253 Dan race ese oe ae Periection| stay) eOMen cs ee SY [npivipuat Steel Manger Partiti Pig, Pems.—— veneer a oe PersbPantitionsie ees 57 uae cy CR Es Rea OR nis heated othe: warpatiar’ aaa: Trony Kan pyar koEe at er sae 313 DE eae FE Seon Stal enn i eae ree ea ae 102 Poultry House Plan. i sek O3: Jackson Pattern Bey E.On ks feeeee eestor career nes ots 267 Pulleys, Hay Fork... a ite tan eee aay oa 261-264 Uunionpeopelslin gaa eee Kaa a ireeares the Sc Rehan tecee 258 L Rarrer IBracketse epee ee ee Sees 247, 255 IASYGIIN Ga ouselfors b oul tivyse seen eteeenectere eee eee OS TRafters Grapple xtc cc. eon eee esc : 268 Lifter, Wire Peat eoe Registers, Ventilating... se PES Foe ee De eh 87 Lining, Wood ‘for Stanchion _ Regulator, Windmill das 331 List of Patents... sae Returner, for Hay/ Carries Z 270 Latter Carriers=- Ruigid@irack Litter Carriers ee 198 Litter Carriers, Rigid Track. Reinforced Section of Track. 226.208 Litter Carrier for Rod Track. Removable Section of Track ee 2085, 223 Litter Carriers, Combination (Rigid Track Ridge PolevHangern a2 ee ee 256 Inside and Rod Track Outside) Right Angle Installation of Cannon Ball Track Ieitter|Carrien Booms ieee for Garape Moors = — es 297 Eittle|Giant Wire stretchers. RodiiracktAccessonies isc 226, 227 Bock Mever Elarpoon Hor kes nee eee Rod Track Litter Carriers._ 216-218-224 Long Neck Pulleys... : PRoofsbirann in geese ee nea a ee -...-148, 152 Loop Clamp for Rod Track. Roperblaya Slings we se a ee ee E257 200 Round) Barawire stretch ensn.s. ee ee 319 Meateaste Tackle Block Wire Stretchers________.317 Manger Construction... Manger, Corner, for Horse. Stalls _ Mangers, Galvanized, for Horses__....__..._--.-..-----.-----0------= Sanrrary Feed Mangers for Horse Stalls _.__.100, 102 Sanitanya Waters bowlsa = ee ee ee 59-63 Scraper for Sidewalk, Platform, Street or Stable Floor_.321 Page Three Hundred Forty-seven > a HUNT-~- HELM -FERRIS Page Scraper barns loon or) Wale 91 Sectional Views of Dairy Barns. 140, 141 Section, Removable, for Litter Carrier Track 208, 223 Self Acting Oats Cleaner __. Re, ee ea tst 103 Self Cleaning Steel Mangers.........._.. heehee ROS Self Locking Hoists : Sees oP IS) Sidewalk Scraper. en 321 Shngst Hayne ee 258-260 Slingwilay Carriers meen ee pene ences 238-245 & 252-253 Sling Pulleys. Se oA Rone eee ee eee Oy PS Snatch Pulley Block Beer Bebo eee cts eee ae er ee 268 Splices, for Peerless Double ‘Angle Track. ee ee LOD For Double Flange Steel Track.. oer ere ih Split Flange. = Bein sen eet 66 Spring Track Support for Rod Track. ee OO Stable Equipment, Horse. oe ‘= 94-103 Stable Broom... : pereeree oe Oe ete Ll Stacking Pulleys... : 2 : Oy ee AY) Stake Holder... eee ely) Stalls for Cows... es : a 23-41 Stall Arms... : sgt ee OF, Stall Floor Construction. ere AZ, Stall Fronts, with automatic Hay Rack for Horse Stalls... eee ae eee ere OG, StalliGuards Horses es eee 101 HELTER Te To OTe ke anc a an ae a Ee ec 66 Stall Posts for Horse ‘Stalls. ial = Stanchions: 2) ee elds eta gabe EIS aS Meme Stanchion Fastenings. Stanchion Lining, Wood _. Standard Tank Heaters... Be ead ay eh ee 315 Star Tank Heaters _. # Bie ae ee SLO Sit Stay Rollers for Barn Doors_ : = 302, 303 Steel Channels SR ee My Steel Manger Partitions, Individual Ce hes Rae ela Oh, Steel Manger Partitions, Connected... 55 Steel Pens_ = 69-82 Steel Rafter Grape pe freee as 268 Steel Stalls, Conic ages 22-41 Steel Stall Guards. : : peel Oi Steel Supporting Columns__ 5 es Ee 68 Steel Tackle Block Wire Stretchers _ : 316, 317 Stock Tank Heater. 309-315 SS oes a cere oe ee aac : , 90 Straight Track for Garage Doors. ee eet 301 Supporting Columns, Steel.. : scaeduseee sent OO, Support, Track, Spring for Rod racks soe. 1996 Sure Stop__ 18 Suspension Bracket for Double Oval Track. ih Swinging Booms for Litter Carriers : 2 : 204 Swinging Fronts for Hog Pens... pee OGL, Switches for Double Angle Steel Track 207 Switches for Double Oval Steel Track : ee 0 Switch for Rod Track Se eee 220) Winey Block Wire Stretchers _. ee ees (apes i (Rani= Heaters 309-315 Tension Bolt for Rod lo: tol See at hee eee 226 Track, Double Angle for Litter and Feed Carriers.____206 Double Flange for Hay Carriers... 246 Double Oval for Litter Carriers .._... MNS eae 220 Peerless Double Angle for Hay Carriers a De 254 oe louse DOO Ha acs cc enna 306-307-308 Page Three Hundred Forty-eight &o COs . Page Track for Barn Doors Cannon: Ball = = ee 278, 279 Covered Cannon Ball. : _..280, 281 Blexo22 23523 ee 288 Twentieth Century_. ee ts RNR oe RB Co 287 Weatherproof. Weatherproof Cannon Ball Track Curve, Cannon Ball for Garage Doors... 299 Track Hangers for Double Angle Litter Carrier Track... 206 Double Oval Litter Carrier Track Double Flange Hay Carrier Track. = Peerless Hay Carrier Track. 255 Wood Hay Carrier Track... ie 256 Track Rod and End Stop for Hay Carriers... Track Splices for Double Flange Steel Hay: Carrier Track: 4 eee Peerless Hay Carrier Track Track Support for Outside of Barn Track Support, Spring, for Rod Track. Trolley Conveyor with Hoist ..-........-.-----.----------2.--- Troughs, Galvanized, for Hogs _ Trough, Watering Trussed Roof Barn.. Turnbuckle for Anchor Rods. No ae Twentieth Century Barn Door Track and Hangers. 5.2 ee ee beet <8 286, 287 Unit System of Installing Stalls Universal Stay Roller oN End Hanger for Hay Track... 286, 287 Views of Factory - : Ventilating Revisters ae Ventilation _ , Ventilation Equipment. Ventilators___. \V \ AGONS, Coaster Walk Scraper. 5uOn Wall Bracket for Wood Ridge Pole. 208 Wall, Detail of Construction... Water Bowls. Be ae Seah 59-63 Watering Trough. PE shale Eee eee Mee ce 103 Weatherproof Barn Door Hangers. 284 Weatherproof Barn Door Track.___.....-..---..----------------- Weatherproof Cannon Ball Barn Door Hanger... 282 Weatherproof Cannon Ball Barn Door Track.. Windmill Regulator. Window, Detail of Construction ___.. oipecstiesS 138 Window Guards Wire Lifter... Wire Strétcheérs ss 225 af ne at eee Wood Hay Track Fixtures __. Wood Lining for Stanchions Woven Wire 'Stretchers. ...332-335 Youne STOCK: Pens \s2cc eo 79 2 ee ee, ee : | A ¥ <> = “Fg 3 ans F’ a My WUT O000e8947?e7e2 ! H i + a bie if